UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

FORM 6-K

 

REPORT OF FOREIGN PRIVATE ISSUER

PURSUANT TO RULE 13a-16 OR 15d-16

UNDER THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Report on Form 6-K dated March 25, 2021

Commission File Number: 1-13546

 

STMicroelectronics N.V.

(Name of Registrant)

 

WTC Schiphol Airport

Schiphol Boulevard 265

1118 BH Schiphol Airport

The Netherlands

(Address of Principal Executive Office)

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant files or will file annual reports under cover of Form 20-F or Form 40-F.

 

 

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is submitting the Form 6-K in paper as permitted by Regulation S-T Rule 101 (b) (1):

 

 

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is submitting the Form 6-K in paper as permitted by Regulation S-T Rule 101 (b) (7):

 

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant by furnishing the information contained in this form is also thereby furnishing the information to the Commission pursuant to Rule 12g3-2(b) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934:

 

 

If “Yes” is marked, indicate below the file number assigned to the registrant in connection with Rule 12g3-2(b): 82-

 

Enclosure: STMicroelectronics’ 2020 Dutch Statutory Annual Report, including the 2020 IFRS Statutory Accounts.

 

 

---

 

 

---

 

Contents

 

 

---

 

 

---

 

 

 

 

 

---

 

 

1.   Message from the President and Chief Executive Officer on the financial year 2020

 

Dear Shareholder,

 

2020 was an unprecedented year, due to the global pandemic. During the first half, our business continuity plans enabled us to support our customers and to timely execute our R&D programs, while maintaining the most stringent health and safety measures to protect our employees. From Q3, we saw a much faster and stronger than expected restart of demand for our products, which further accelerated in Q4.

 

Our financial performance for the full year, with total revenues increasing 6.9% to $10.2 billion, an operating margin of 12.1% and net profit of $696 million, was solid considering the volatile market conditions, with material swings from one quarter to another. We also managed to increase our net cash position while continuing to invest for future growth.

 

2020: a year of resilience and growth despite the pandemic

 

In Automotive, the negative impact on demand was particularly strong in Q2, especially for legacy automotive in Europe and in the US, with many carmakers and suppliers shutting down for a time. After the summer, global demand started to pick up, much faster and stronger than the industry had anticipated. We then saw a further acceleration during Q4, driven by car production volumes, replenishment of inventories across the supply chain and, more broadly, semiconductor content increase related to electrification and digitalization.

 

In Industrial, during the first half we saw a demand slowdown in some applications (appliances, lighting) while others, such as healthcare, remained positive. From the end of Q2, dynamics improved in key applications areas for ST such as power-related application as well as, renewable energy, motion control and factory automation. This continued in Q3 and, during Q4, the situation improved strongly across all geographies. In Distribution, a key element of our go-to-market strategy in Industrial, recovery started in Asia first from Q2 then in the Americas and Europe from Q3. In Q4, this positive trend further accelerated.

 

In Personal Electronics, during the first half consumer demand was impacted by retail lockdowns, but demand for our key products remained strong, driven by our engaged customer programs. From Q3 there was a strong restart of consumer demand for smartphones, driven by the introduction of 5G devices. This trend accelerated in Q4. Demand related to accessories was strong throughout the year, with healthy dynamics in wearables, tablets, hearables, True Wireless Stereo headsets and gaming.

 

In Communications Equipment and Computer Peripherals we saw solid demand throughout the year for products related to homeworking and enterprise servers, while the overall market for hard-disk drives was softer.

 

In this environment, we delivered total revenues of $10.2 billion, up 6.9% from 2019, with a gross margin of 33.3% and an operating margin of 12.1%. Our net profit was $696 million. During 2020, our net cash increased by $399 million, including capex of $1.28 billion and the acquisitions of connectivity specialists BeSpoon, Riot Micro and SOMOS, as well as a majority stake in GaN specialist Exagan.

 

An acceleration of the long-term trends underpinning our strategy

 

The broad, long term trends in electronic systems that we are focused on have accelerated in 2020 and are driving demand for our products. These trends are Smart Mobility, Power & Energy and IoT & 5G.

 

We are also facing an unprecedented market situation. Semiconductor demand is increasing across the entire industry, driven by car production volumes and replenishment of inventories across the Automotive supply chain,

4

---

 

very lean inventory levels at distributors, and Stay-at-Home effects boosting demand of Personal electronics and Communications products.

 

In 2021, we plan to invest about $1.8 billion to $2.0 billion in CAPEX, in order to meet the strong market demand and to advance our strategic initiatives. This amount includes mainly the addition of capacity for our existing Crolles 300mm fab, mix evolution for our most advanced 200mm fabs and silicon carbide (“SiC”) capacity expansion. It also includes about $400 million of investments for strategic initiatives, as well as the support of R&D activities and the maintenance required by our manufacturing operations. These strategic initiatives are our continued investment in the new Agrate 300mm fab, R&D for Gallium Nitride (“GaN”) power technologies, and the fabrication of SiC substrates.

 

In December we also provided a major update to the third pillar of our value proposition: sustainability. In 2021 we will start implementing our roadmap towards carbon neutrality in 2027, in close collaboration with key partners and stakeholders in a collaborative approach.

 

All these strategic initiatives and investments will be integral to our objective of sustainable and profitable leadership in our end markets. This is the value proposition we commit to all of you.

 

ST’s fundamentals are solid. We are determined to continue to make our company even stronger. We will do so by continuing to keep a balanced markets position, a focus on high growth applications, and a solid product / IP Technology portfolio. All of this will be supported by our operating and financial discipline, by a number of improvement or transformation programs we are engaged in, and by the dedication and commitment of all our employees.

 

 

5

---

 

2.    Corporate overview

2.1. History and development of STMicroelectronics

STMicroelectronics N.V. was formed and incorporated in 1987 as a result of the combination of the semiconductor business of SGS Microelettronica (then owned by Società Finanziaria Telefonica (S.T.E.T.), an Italian corporation) and the non-military business of Thomson Semiconducteurs (then owned by the former Thomson-CSF, now Thales, a French corporation). We completed our initial public offering in December 1994 with simultaneous listings on the Bourse de Paris (now known as “Euronext Paris”) and the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”). In 1998, we also listed our shares on the Borsa Italiana S.p.A. (“Borsa Italiana”).

We operated as SGS-Thomson Microelectronics N.V. until May 1998, when we changed our name to STMicroelectronics N.V. We are organized under the laws of The Netherlands, with our corporate legal seat in Amsterdam, The Netherlands, and our head offices at WTC Schiphol Airport, Schiphol Boulevard 265, 1118 BH Schiphol, The Netherlands. Our telephone number there is +31-20-654-3210. Our headquarters and operational offices are managed through our wholly owned subsidiary, STMicroelectronics International N.V., and are located at 39 Chemin du Champ des Filles, 1228 Plan-les-Ouates, Geneva, Switzerland. Our main telephone number there is +41-22-929-2929. Our agent for service of process in the United States related to our registration under the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, is Corporation Service Company (CSC), 80 State Street, Albany, New York, 12207. Our operations are also conducted through our various subsidiaries, which are organized and operated according to the laws of their country of incorporation, and consolidated by STMicroelectronics N.V.

2.2. Strategy & objectives

At ST, we are 46,000 creators and makers of semiconductor technologies mastering the semiconductor supply chain with state-of-the-art manufacturing facilities. An independent device manufacturer, we work with more than 100,000 customers and thousands of partners to design and build products, solutions, and ecosystems that address their challenges and opportunities, and the need to support a more sustainable world. We develop industry-leading technologies that allow us to provide products and solutions that meet and exceed the needs and expectations of our customers now and into the future.

Our strategy focuses on long-term value creation for the Company and its affiliated enterprises and takes into account the short-, medium- and longer-term evolution of the markets we serve and the environment and opportunities we see. It stems from key long-term enablers: Smart Mobility, where we provide innovative solutions to help our customers make driving safer, greener and more connected for everyone; Power & Energy: our technology and solutions enable customers to increase energy efficiency everywhere and support the use of renewable energy sources; Internet of Things (“IoT”) & 5G: we provide sensors, embedded processing solutions, connectivity, security, optical sensing and power management, as well as tools and ecosystems to make development fast and easy for our customers.

We are focused on application areas which are expected to experience solid growth rates driven by broad, long-term trends in electronic systems. These trends require enablers such as autonomous systems, robotics, securely connected machines and personal devices, digitalization and electrification of automobiles and infrastructure, advanced communications equipment and networks and more power efficient systems.  These enablers drive in turn the demand for the electronic components we develop and manufacture.

Our products are used in a wide variety of applications for the four end-markets we address: automotive, industrial, personal electronics and communications equipment, computers and peripherals.  For the automotive and industrial markets we address a wide customer base, particularly in industrial, with a broad and deep product portfolio.  In personal electronics and communications equipment, computers and peripherals we have a selective approach both in terms of the customers we serve, as well as in the technologies and products we offer.

6

---

 

2.3. Organizational structure

We are organized in a matrix structure with geographic regions interacting with product lines, both supported by shared technology and manufacturing operations and by central functions, designed to enable us to be closer to our customers and to facilitate communication among the R&D, production, marketing and sales organizations.

While STMicroelectronics N.V. is our parent company, we conduct our global business through STMicroelectronics International N.V. and also conduct our operations through service activities from our subsidiaries. We provide certain administrative, human resources, legal, treasury, strategy, manufacturing, marketing and other overhead services to our consolidated subsidiaries pursuant to service agreements for which we recover the cost.

2.4. Products and activities

We are a global independent semiconductor company that designs, develops, manufactures and markets a broad range of products, including discrete and general purpose components, application-specific integrated circuits (“ASICs”), full-custom devices and semi-custom devices and application-specific standard products (“ASSPs”) for analog, digital and mixed-signal applications.

Our diverse product portfolio benefits from a unique, strong foundation of proprietary and differentiated leading-edge technologies. We use all of the prevalent function-oriented process technologies, including complementary metal-on silicon oxide semiconductors (“CMOS”), bipolar and non-volatile memory technologies. In addition, by combining basic processes, we have developed advanced systems-oriented technologies that enable us to produce differentiated and application-specific products, including our pioneering fully depleted silicon-on-insulator (“FD-SOI”) technology offering superior performance and power efficiency compared to bulk CMOS, bipolar CMOS technologies (“Bi-CMOS”) and radio frequency silicon-on-insulator (“RF-SOI”) for mixed-signal and high-frequency applications, as well as a combination of Bipolar, CMOS and DMOS (“BCD”) and vertically integrated power (“VIPower”) technologies for smart power applications, SiC and GaN for high-efficiency systems, Micro-Electro-Mechanical Systems (“MEMS”) technologies for sensors and actuators, embedded memory technologies for our microcontrollers and differentiated optical sensing technologies for our optical sensing solutions.

Our reportable segments are as follows:

“Others” includes revenues from sales assembly services and other revenue. Operating income (loss) of Others includes items such as unused capacity charges, including reduced manufacturing activity due to COVID-19, impairment, restructuring charges and other related closure costs, management reorganization costs, phase out and start-up costs, and other unallocated expenses such as: strategic or special research and development programs, certain corporate-level operating expenses, patent claims and litigations, and other costs that are not allocated to product groups, as well as operating earnings of other products.

7

---

 

2.5. Sales, Marketing and Distribution

Our sales and marketing is organized by a combination of country/area coverage and key accounts coverage with the primary objective of accelerating sales growth and gaining market share, particularly with regards to: strengthening the effectiveness of the development of our global and major local accounts; boosting demand creation through an enhanced focus on geographical coverage with strong technical expertise, supported in the mass market by our distribution channel and local initiatives; and establishing regional sales and marketing teams that are fully aligned with our strategic end-markets: automotive, industrial, personal electronics and communications equipment, computers and peripherals.

We have three regional sales organizations reporting to a global head of Sales & Marketing: Americas; Asia Pacific; and EMEA. Our regional sales organizations have a similar structure to enhance coordination in global strategy alignment and go-to-market activities. The sales and marketing teams are strongly focused on profitable revenue growth and business performance as well as on fostering demand, expanding the customer base, maximizing market share, developing new product-roadmaps and providing the best technical and application support in the field for our customers. The sales and marketing activities are supported by sales engineers, system marketing, product marketing, application labs, field application engineers and quality engineers.

2.6. Research & Development

Since our formation, we have maintained a solid commitment to innovation.  About one-fifth of our employees work in R&D on product design/development and technology and, in 2020, we spent approximately 12.4% of our net revenues on R&D. Our innovations in semiconductor technology as well as in hardware and software contribute to the creation of successful products that generate value for us and our customers. Our complete design platforms, including a large selection of IP and silicon-proven models and design rules, enable the fast development of products designed to meet customer expectations in terms of reliability, quality, competitiveness in price and time-to-market. Through our R&D efforts, we contribute to making our customers’ products more efficient, more appealing, more reliable and safer. Our technology R&D strategy is based on the development of differentiated technologies, allowing for a unique offer in terms of new products and enabling new applications opportunities.

We draw on a rich pool of chip fabrication technologies, including advanced CMOS, FD-SOI, RF-SOI, optical sensing, embedded non-volatile memories, mixed-signal, analog, MEMS, smart power, SiC and GaN processes. This is well embedded in our strong packaging technologies portfolio such as high pin count BGA, Wafer level packaging, highly integrated sensor packages and leadframe package power products. We combine both front-end and back-end manufacturing and technology R&D under the same organization to ensure a smooth flow of information between our R&D and manufacturing organizations. We leverage significant synergies and shared activities between our product groups to cross-fertilize them. We also use silicon foundries, especially for advanced CMOS beyond the 28 nm node that we do not plan to manufacture nor develop internally.

We have advanced R&D centers which offer us a significant advantage in quickly and cost effectively introducing products. Furthermore, we have established a strong culture of partnerships and through the years have created a network of strategic collaborations with key customers, suppliers, competitors, and leading universities and research institutes around the world. We also play leadership roles in numerous projects running under the European Union’s IST (Information Society Technologies) programs. We also participate in certain R&D programs established by the EU, individual countries and local authorities in Europe (primarily in France and Italy).

We currently own approximately 18,000 patents and pending patent applications, corresponding to approximately 9,600 patent families (each patent family containing all patents originating from the same invention), including over 557 original new patent applications filed in 2020.

8

---

 

2.7. Sustainability

Sustainability has been a guiding principle for ST for more than 25 years. In line with our vision to be everywhere microelectronics make a positive contribution to people’s lives, sustainability is deeply embedded in all of our activities. We believe that sustainability is fundamental to our business, brings new opportunities, improves efficiency, reduces risks and secures long-term profitability. It also brings benefits to our employees and our external stakeholders. Our approach to sustainability is expressed in our Code of Conduct, our policies and in our sustainability strategy.

At the heart of our sustainability strategy is an unceasing focus on what really matters for us and our stakeholders. We identify the most material topics for our stakeholders and their impacts on our business by carrying out an extensive materiality exercise every three years. For each material topic identified, we define a specific ambition and long-term goal. The related programs and performance indicators are presented throughout our sustainability report we publish each year and which is available at: www.st.com/company-reports.

We are included in many of the main sustainability indices, such as Dow Jones World Sustainability Index, FTSE4Good, Ethibel, Euronext Vigeo, ISS ESG Prime and Bloomberg Gender Equality index. In 2020, we were recognized for leadership in corporate sustainability by global environmental non-profit CDP, securing a place on its prestigious ‘A List’ for tackling climate change. In addition, as a member of the Responsible Business Alliance (RBA), we participate in the collective efforts of the industry to find solutions to our global sustainability challenges. We have been a signatory of the UN Global Compact since 2000. Our sustainability programs are aligned with its ten principles and contribute to ten of the 17 UN Sustainable Development Goals.

Further information on ST’s Sustainability approach can be found at: www.st.com/st-approach-to-sustainability.

9

---

 

3.    Report of the Managing Board

In accordance with Dutch law, our management is entrusted to our Managing Board under the supervision of our Supervisory Board. Mr. Jean-Marc Chery was appointed on May 31, 2018 as sole member of our Managing Board with the function of President and Chief Executive Officer. Under our Articles of Association, the sole member of our Managing Board is appointed for a three-year term at our Annual General Meeting of Shareholders (by a simple majority of the votes cast), upon a non-binding proposal by our Supervisory Board, which term may be renewed one or more times.

3.1. Statement of the sole member of the Managing Board

The sole member of the Managing Board hereby declares that, to the best of his knowledge, the statutory financial statements as at December 31, 2020 and for the year then ended, prepared under Title 9 of Part 2 of The Netherlands Civil Code in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the European Union, provide a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of STMicroelectronics N.V. and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole and the report of the Managing Board includes a true and fair view concerning the position as per the statement of financial position date, the development and performance of STMicroelectronics N.V. and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with the principal risk and uncertainties they face.

Jean-Marc Chery,

Sole member of the Managing Board,

President and Chief Executive Officer

3.2. Business overview & performance

3.2.1. Results highlights for the year 2020

The total available market is defined as the “TAM”, while the serviceable available market, the “SAM”, is defined as the market for products sold by us (which consists of the TAM and excludes major devices such as Microprocessors (“MPUs”), Dynamic random-access memories (“DRAMs”), optoelectronics devices, Flash Memories and the Wireless Application Specific market products such as Baseband and Application Processor).

Based on industry data published by WSTS, semiconductor industry revenues in 2020 increased on a year-over-year basis by approximately 7% for the TAM and by approximately 4% for the SAM, to reach approximately $440 billion and $202 billion, respectively.

We closed 2020 with total revenues of $10.22 billion, gross margin of 33.3% and operating margin of 12.1%.

Our effective average exchange rate was $1.13 for €1.00 for the full year 2020, as compared to $1.14 for €1.00 for the full year 2019.

Our 2020 gross margin decreased 80 basis points to 33.3% from 34.1% in 2019, mainly due to normal price pressure, increased unsaturation charges, partially offset by a better product mix and lower level of capitalized development costs write-offs.

Our operating expenses, comprised of SG&A and R&D expenses, amounted to $2,395 million in 2020, increasing from $2,307 million in the prior year, mainly due to salary dynamic, higher share-based compensation cost and increased spending on certain R&D programs, partially offset by lower discretionary spending and favorable currency effects.

Other income and expenses, net, was $228 million in 2020 compared to $86 million in 2019, mainly due to a non-recurrent favorable impact associated with the Important Projects of Common European Interest (IPCEI) grants catch-up and lower level of start-up costs, partially offset by incremental expenses associated with the COVID-19 pandemic.

10

---

 

Operating profit in 2020 increased to $1,233 million compared to $1,035 million in 2019 mainly driven by higher revenues and increased level of grants associated with the IPCEI catch-up, partially offset by increased unsaturation charges and salary dynamic.

Combined finance income and costs resulted in a net loss of $439 million, compared to a net loss of $526 million in 2019, and reflect in both years the IFRS accounting of convertible bonds. The 2020 amount included a loss of $417 million for the fair value adjustment of the embedded bondholders’ conversion options (compared to a loss of $544 million in 2019) and a cost of $64 million related to the net-share settlement of Tranche A of our senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017.

Full year 2020 net profit was $696 million or $0.76 diluted earnings per share, compared to net profit of $388 million, or $0.43 diluted earnings per share for the full year 2019.

Capital expenditure payments, net of proceeds from sales were $1.28 billion during the full year 2020 compared to $1.17 billion during the full year 2019.

During 2020, our net cash increased by $399 million, with net cash from operating activities reaching $2.46 billion. During 2020, we received $1.57 billion net proceeds from issuance of the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on August 4, 2020 (the “2020 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds”) and used $750 million to settle Tranche A of the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017 (the “2017 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds”). In addition, we paid $113 million for business acquisitions, $168 million of cash dividends to our shareholders, $184 million for long-term debt repayment and $125 million for the repurchase of ordinary shares. Finally, we invested $577 million of our net cash in short-term deposits.

Our free cash flow, a non GAAP measure, amounted to $627 million in 2020 compared to $497 million in 2019.

3.2.2. Business overview

We are a global independent semiconductor company that designs, develops, manufactures and markets a broad range of products, including discrete and general purpose components, application-specific integrated circuits (“ASICs”), full custom devices and semi-custom devices and application-specific standard products (“ASSPs”) for analog, digital and mixed-signal applications.

We design, develop, manufacture and market thousands of products that we sell to over 100,000 customers.  We emphasize balance in our product portfolio, in the applications we serve and in the regional markets we address.  Our major customers include Apple, Robert Bosch, Continental, Hewlett-Packard, Huawei, Intel-Mobileye, Nintendo, Samsung, Seagate and Tesla.  In addition, our broad portfolio helps foster close relationships with customers, which provides opportunities to enable application solutions and to supply such customers’ requirements for multiple products, including analog, digital, and power products applications.  We also sell our products through distributors and retailers.

Further information on our business model is included in chapter 2 above and paragraphs 3.2.2.1. et seq. below.

3.2.2.1.        Strategy

At ST, we are 46,000 creators and makers of semiconductor technologies mastering the semiconductor supply chain with state-of-the-art manufacturing facilities. An independent device manufacturer, we work with more than 100,000 customers and thousands of partners to design and build products, solutions, and ecosystems that address their challenges and opportunities, and the need to support a more sustainable world. We develop industry-leading technologies that allow us to provide products and solutions that meet and exceed the needs and expectations of our customers now and into the future.

Our strategy focuses on long-term value creation for the Company and its affiliated enterprises and takes into account the short-, medium- and longer-term evolution of the markets we serve and the environment and opportunities we see. It stems from key long-term enablers: Smart Mobility, where we provide innovative solutions to help our customers make driving safer, greener and more connected for everyone; Power & Energy: our technology and solutions enable customers to increase energy efficiency everywhere and support the use of renewable energy sources; Internet of Things (“IoT”) & 5G: we provide sensors, embedded processing solutions,

11

---

 

connectivity, security, optical sensing and power management, as well as tools and ecosystems to make development fast and easy for our customers.

We are focused on application areas which are expected to experience solid growth rates driven by broad, long-term trends in electronic systems. These trends require enablers such as autonomous systems, robotics, securely connected machines and personal devices, digitalization and electrification of automobiles and infrastructure, advanced communications equipment and networks and more power efficient systems. These enablers drive in turn the demand for the electronic components we develop and manufacture.

Our products are used in a wide variety of applications for the four end-markets we address: automotive, industrial, personal electronics and communications equipment, computers and peripherals.  For the automotive and industrial markets we address a wide customer base, particularly in industrial, with a broad and deep product portfolio. In personal electronics and communications equipment, computers and peripherals we have a selective approach both in terms of the customers we serve, as well as in the technologies and products we offer.

3.2.2.2.        Employees

The tables below set forth the breakdown of employees by geographic area and category of main activity for the past two years.

 

 

 

Our future success will partly depend on our ability to continue to attract, retain and motivate highly qualified technical, marketing, engineering and management personnel, as well as on our ability to timely adapt the size and/or profile of our personnel to changing industry needs. Unions are represented at almost all of our manufacturing facilities and at several of our R&D sites. We use temporarily employees if required during production spikes and, in Europe, during summer vacation. We have not experienced any significant strikes or work stoppages in recent years.

3.2.2.3.        Alliances with Customers and Industry Partnerships

We believe that alliances with customers and industry partnerships are critical to our success in the semiconductor industry. Customer alliances provide us with valuable systems and application know-how and access to markets for key products, while allowing our customers to gain access to our process technologies and manufacturing infrastructure. We are actively working to expand the number of our customer alliances, targeting key global OEMs as well as innovative customers and partners around the globe.

From time to time we collaborate with other semiconductor industry companies, research organizations, universities and suppliers to further our R&D efforts. Such collaboration provides us with a number of important benefits,

12

---

 

including the sharing of costs, reductions in our own capital requirements, acquisitions of technical know-how and access to additional production capacities.

3.2.2.4.        Customers and Applications

We design, develop, manufacture and market thousands of products that we sell to over 100,000 customers. We emphasize balance in our product portfolio, in the applications we serve and in the regional markets we address. Our major customers include Apple, Robert Bosch, Continental, Hewlett-Packard, Huawei, Intel-Mobileye, Nintendo, Samsung, Seagate and Tesla. In addition, our broad portfolio helps foster close relationships with customers, which provides opportunities to enable application solutions and to supply such customers’ requirements for multiple products, including analog, digital, and power products applications. We also sell our products through distributors and retailers.

3.2.2.5.        Sales, Marketing and Distribution

Our sales and marketing is organized by a combination of country/area coverage and key accounts coverage with the primary objective of accelerating sales growth and gaining market share, particularly with regards to: strengthening the effectiveness of the development of our global and major local accounts; boosting demand creation through an enhanced focus on geographical coverage with strong technical expertise, supported in the mass market by our distribution channel and local initiatives; and establishing regional sales and marketing teams that are fully aligned with our strategic end-markets: automotive, industrial, personal electronics and communications equipment, computers and peripherals.

We have three regional sales organizations reporting to a global head of Sales & Marketing: Americas; Asia Pacific; and EMEA. Our regional sales organizations have a similar structure to enhance coordination in global strategy alignment and go-to-market activities. The sales and marketing teams are strongly focused on profitable revenue growth and business performance as well as on fostering demand, expanding the customer base, maximizing market share, developing new product-roadmaps and providing the best technical and application support in the field for our customers. The sales and marketing activities are supported by sales engineers, system marketing, product marketing, application labs, field application engineers and quality engineers.

We engage distributors and sales representatives to distribute and promote our products around the world.  Typically, distributors handle a wide variety of products, including those that compete with ours. Our distributors have a dual role, in that they assist in fulfilling the demand of our customers by servicing their orders, while also supporting the creation of product demand and business development.  Most of our sales to distributors are made under specific agreements allowing for price protection and stock rotation for unsold merchandise. Sales representatives, on the other hand, generally do not offer products that compete directly with our products, but may carry complementary items manufactured by others.  Sales representatives do not maintain a product inventory and their customers place large quantity orders directly with us and are referred to distributors for smaller orders.

At the request of certain customers, we also sell and deliver our products to electronics manufacturing services companies, which, on a contractual basis with our customers, incorporate our products into the application specific products they manufacture for our customers. We also sell products to original design manufacturers (“ODM”). ODMs manufacture products for our customers much like EMS companies do, but they also design applications for our customers, and in doing so themselves select the products and suppliers that they wish to purchase from.

In furtherance of our strong commitment to quality, our sales organizations include personnel dedicated to close monitoring and resolution of quality related issues.

3.2.2.6.        Research and Development in the area of new products

Since our formation, we have maintained a solid commitment to innovation. About one-fifth of our employees work in R&D on product design/development and technology and, in 2020, we spent approximately 12.4% of our net revenues on R&D. Our innovations in semiconductor technology as well as in hardware and software contribute to the creation of successful products that generate value for us and our customers. Our complete design platforms, including a large selection of IP and silicon-proven models and design rules, enable the fast development of products

13

---

 

designed to meet customer expectations in terms of reliability, quality, competitiveness in price and time-to-market. Through our R&D efforts, we contribute to making our customers’ products more efficient, more appealing, more reliable and safer. Our technology R&D strategy is based on the development of differentiated technologies, allowing for a unique offer in terms of new products and enabling new applications opportunities.

We draw on a rich pool of chip fabrication technologies, including advanced CMOS, FD-SOI, RF-SOI, optical sensing, embedded non-volatile memories, mixed-signal, analog, MEMS, smart power SiC and GaN processes. This is well embedded in our strong packaging technologies portfolio such as high pin count BGA, Wafer level packaging, highly integrated sensor packages and leadframe package power products. We combine both front-end and back-end manufacturing and technology R&D under the same organization to ensure a smooth flow of information between our R&D and manufacturing organizations. We leverage significant synergies and shared activities between our product groups to cross-fertilize them. We also use silicon foundries, especially for advanced CMOS beyond the 28-nm node that we do not plan to manufacture nor develop internally.

We have advanced R&D centers which offer us a significant advantage in quickly and cost effectively introducing products. Furthermore, we have established a strong culture of partnerships and through the years have created a network of strategic collaborations with key customers, suppliers, competitors, and leading universities and research institutes around the world. We also play leadership roles in numerous projects running under the European Union’s IST (Information Society Technologies) programs. We also participate in certain R&D programs established by the EU, individual countries and local authorities in Europe (primarily in France and Italy).

We believe that market driven R&D based on leading-edge products and technologies is critical to our success. We devote significant effort to R&D because we believe such investment can be leveraged into competitive advantages. New developments in semiconductor technology can make end products significantly cheaper, smaller, faster, more reliable and embedded than their predecessors, with differentiated functionalities. They can enable significant value creation opportunities with their timely appearance on the market. The total amount of our R&D expenses in the past two fiscal years was $1,272 million and $1,208 million in 2020 and 2019, respectively, while the total amount of R&D expenses capitalized amounted to $296 million and $285 million in 2020 and 2019, respectively.

3.2.2.7.        Property, Plants and Equipment

We currently operate 13 main manufacturing sites around the world.

At December 31, 2020, our front-end facilities had a total maximum capacity of approximately 123,137 200 mm equivalent wafer starts per week. The number of wafer starts per week varies from facility to facility and from period to period as a result of changes in product mix.

We own all of our manufacturing facilities, but certain facilities (Muar, Malaysia; Shenzhen, China; and Toa Payoh and Ang Mo Kio, Singapore) are built on land subject to long-term leases.

We have historically subcontracted a portion of total manufacturing volumes to external suppliers. In 2020, we subcontracted approximately 24% of the value of our total silicon production to external foundries. Our plan is to continue sourcing silicon from external foundries to give us flexibility in supporting our growth.

At December 31, 2020, we had approximately $916 million in outstanding commitments for purchases of equipment and other assets for delivery in 2021. In 2020, our capital spending, net of proceeds, was $1,279 million compared to $1,174 million in 2019. In the 2018-2020 period the ratio of capital investment spending to net revenues was about 12.7%.

3.2.2.8.        Intellectual property

Our success depends in part on our ability to obtain patents, licenses and other IP rights to protect our proprietary technologies and processes. IP rights that apply to our various products include patents, copyrights, trade secrets, trademarks and mask work rights. We currently own approximately 18,000 patents and pending patent applications, corresponding to approximately 9,600 patent families (each patent family containing all patents originating from the same invention), including over 557 original new patent applications filed in 2020.

14

---

 

We believe that our IP represents valuable assets. We rely on various intellectual property laws, confidentiality procedures and contractual provisions to protect our IP assets and enforce our IP rights. To optimize the value of our IP assets, we have engaged in licensing our design technology and other IP, including patents, when consistent with our competitive position and our customers’ interests. We have also entered into broad-scope cross-licenses and other agreements which enable us to design, manufacture and sell semiconductor products using the IP rights of third parties and/or operating within the scope of IP rights owned by third parties.

From time to time, we are involved in IP litigation and infringement claims. Regardless of the validity or the successful assertion of such claims, we may incur significant costs with respect to the defense thereof, which could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations, cash flow or financial condition.

3.2.2.9.        Backlog

Our sales are made primarily pursuant to standard purchase orders that are generally booked from one to twelve months in advance of delivery. Quantities actually purchased by customers, as well as prices, are subject to variations between booking and delivery and, in some cases, to cancellation due to changes in customer needs or industry conditions. During periods of economic slowdown and/or industry overcapacity and/or declining selling prices, customer orders are not generally made far in advance of the scheduled shipment date. Such reduced lead time can diminish management’s ability to forecast production levels and revenues. When the economy rebounds, our customers may strongly increase their demands, which can result in capacity constraints due to a time lag when matching manufacturing capacity with such demand.

In addition, our sales are affected by seasonality, with the first half generally showing lowest revenue levels in the year, and the third or fourth quarter historically generating higher amounts of revenues partly as a result of the seasonal dynamics for smartphone applications.

We also sell certain products to key customers pursuant to frame contracts. Frame contracts are annual contracts with customers setting forth quantities and prices on specific products that may be ordered in the future. These contracts allow us to schedule production capacity in advance and allow customers to manage their inventory levels consistent with just-in-time principles while shortening the cycle times required to produce ordered products. Orders under frame contracts are also subject to a high degree of volatility, because they reflect expected market conditions which may or may not materialize. Thus, they are subject to risks of price reduction, order cancellation and modifications as to quantities actually ordered resulting in inventory build-ups.

Furthermore, developing industry trends, including customers’ use of outsourcing and their deployment of new and revised supply chain models, may reduce our ability to forecast changes in customer demand and may increase our financial requirements in terms of capital expenditures and inventory levels.

3.2.2.10.        Competition

Markets for our products are intensely competitive. We compete with major international semiconductor companies and while only a few companies compete with us in all of our product lines, we face significant competition from each of them. Smaller niche companies are also increasing their participation in the semiconductor market, and semiconductor foundry companies have expanded significantly, particularly in Asia. Competitors include manufacturers of standard semiconductors, ASICs and fully customized ICs, including both chip and board-level products, as well as customers who develop their own IC products and foundry operations. Some of our competitors are also our customers or suppliers. We compete in different product lines to various degrees on the basis of price, technical performance, product features, product system compatibility, customized design, availability, quality and sales and technical support. In particular, standard products may involve greater risk of competitive pricing, inventory imbalances and severe market fluctuations than differentiated products. Our ability to compete successfully depends on factors both within and outside our control, including successful and timely development of new products and manufacturing processes, product performance and quality, manufacturing yields and product availability, customer service, pricing, industry trends and general economic trends.

The semiconductor industry is characterized by the high costs associated with developing marketable products and manufacturing technologies as well as high levels of investment in production capabilities. As a result, the

15

---

 

semiconductor industry has experienced, and is expected to continue to experience, significant vertical and horizontal consolidation among our suppliers, competitors and customers, which could lead to erosion of our market share, impact our capacity to compete and require us to restructure our operations.

3.2.2.11.        Public Funding

We receive public funding mainly from French, Italian and EU governmental entities. Such funding is generally provided to encourage R&D activities, industrialization and local economic development. Public funding in France, Italy and Europe generally is open to all companies, regardless of their ownership structure or country of incorporation. The conditions for the receipt of government funding may include eligibility restrictions, approval by EU authorities, annual budget appropriations, compliance with EU regulations, royalties or contingent return provisions as well as specifications regarding objectives and results. The approval process for such funding may be quite long, up to several years. Certain specific contracts require compliance with extensive regulatory requirements and set forth certain conditions relating to the funded programs. There could be penalties if these objectives are not fulfilled. Other contracts contain penalties for late deliveries or for breach of contract, which may result in repayment obligations. Our funding programs are classified under three general categories: funding for research and development activities, capital investment for pilot lines and loans. We also benefit from tax credits for R&D activities in several countries which are generally available to all companies.

The main programs for R&D in which we are involved include: (i) Pan-European program on Nanoelectronics Technology and Applications (PENTA); (ii) EU R&D projects within Horizon 2020 (the European Union’s research and innovation framework); (iii) Electronic Components and Systems for European Leadership (ECSEL) initiative, which combines all electronics related R&D activities and is operated by joint undertakings formed by the European Union, certain member states and industry; and (iv) national or regional programs for R&D and for industrialization in the electronics industries involving many companies and laboratories. The Pan-European programs cover a period of several years, while national or regional programs in France and Italy are subject mostly to annual budget appropriation.

In our role as Coordinator and Project Leader of Nano2017, we had been allocated an overall funding budget of about €400 million for the period 2013-2018, which was subject to the conclusion of agreements every year with the public authorities and linked to the achievement of technical parameters and objectives. A portion of the Nano2017 program was subject to a payback clause (“financial return”), depending on the future accumulated sales for certain products within the scope of the funded program in the period from 2018 to 2023. The financial return corresponded to the payment in 2024 of the original funded amount (€37 million) multiplied by a rate from 0% to 250%, depending on the cumulative amount of future sales. As such, the criteria for recognizing the grant income are not met. As at December 31, 2020, an amount of $42 million was reported as a liability in the consolidated balance sheet, of which $37 million related to the Nano2017 program. We believe the Nano2017 R&D program, which expired in April 2018, has strengthened our leadership in key technologies such as FD-SOI (low-power, high-performance processing), RF-SOI, optical sensors and embedded non-volatile memories. These technologies are at the core of our digital portfolio which includes, among others, microcontrollers, optical sensing, analog and mixed signal, digital automotive and ASICs.

In December 2018, the European Commission announced the approval of Important Projects of Common European Interest (“IPCEI”), a Pan-European project initiated to foster research and innovation in microelectronics to be funded by Germany, France, Italy and the U.K. We are participating in IPCEI for the period 2018 until 2022 in France and until 2024 in Italy. In 2020 we also recognized €187 million (including a catch up attributable to 2018, 2019 and 2020) of grants related to our participation in IPCEI in Italy and €67 million related to our participation in IPCEI in the national and Horizon 2020 program in France.

3.2.2.12.        Suppliers

We use three primary critical types of suppliers in our business: (i) equipment suppliers, (ii) material suppliers and (iii) external silicon foundries and back-end subcontractors. We also purchase third party licensed technology from a limited number of providers.

In the front-end process, we use steppers, scanners, tracking equipment, strippers, chemo-mechanical polishing equipment, cleaners, inspection equipment, etchers, physical and chemical vapor-deposition equipment, implanters, furnaces, testers, probers and other specialized equipment. The manufacturing tools that we use in the

16

---

 

back-end process include bonders, burn-in ovens, testers and other specialized equipment. The quality and technology of equipment used in the IC manufacturing process defines the limits of our technology. Demand for increasingly smaller chip structures means that semiconductor producers must quickly incorporate the latest advances in process technology to remain competitive. Advances in process technology cannot occur without commensurate advances in equipment technology, and equipment costs tend to increase as the equipment becomes more sophisticated.

Our manufacturing processes use many materials, including silicon and SiC wafers, lead frames, mold compound, ceramic packages and chemicals and gases. The prices of many of these materials are volatile due to the specificity of the market. We have therefore adopted a “multiple sourcing strategy” designed to protect us from the risk of price increases. The same strategy applies to supplies for the materials used by us to avoid potential material disruption of essential materials. Our “multiple sourcing strategy”, our Financial Risk Monitoring as well as the robustness of our supply chain and strong partnership with suppliers are intended to mitigate these risks.

Finally, we also use external subcontractors to outsource wafer manufacturing and assembly and testing of finished products.

3.2.2.13.        Environmental Matters

We adopt a rigorous approach to managing our business operations in an environmentally responsible way. Consistent with our sustainability strategy, we have established proactive environmental policies with respect to the handling of chemicals, emissions, waste disposals and other substances of concern from our manufacturing operations. We are certified to be in compliance with quality standard ISO 9001 on a Company-wide basis. We also implement high standards across our manufacturing activities and supply chain. The majority of our sites are ISO 14001 certified and EMAS validated. Furthermore, all of our front-end manufacturing sites and two of our back-end manufacturing sites are ISO 50001 certified.

We aim to maintain our leadership in water efficiency by reducing consumption, recycling more and reinforcing our efforts in water scarcity areas and have a target to reduce our water consumption by 20% in 2025, in normalized values versus 2016 baseline. In 2020, our water recycling rate remained stable compared to 2019 with a recycle rate at 41%.

We are subject to a variety of environmental, health and safety laws and regulations in the jurisdictions where we operate. Such laws and regulations govern, among other things, the use, storage, discharge and disposal of chemicals and other hazardous substances, emissions and wastes, as well as the investigation and remediation of soil and ground water contamination.

In 2020 we increased our use of renewable energy, as 40% of the total energy we purchased came from renewable electricity, which is a 50% increase compared to 2019. Furthermore, in 2020, 88% of the waste generated by our operations was reused, recovered or sent for recycling.

Our commitments and programs in the areas described above contribute to the UN Sustainable Development Goals and in particular to:

 

We are also required to obtain environmental permits, licenses and other forms of authorization, or give prior notification, in order to operate. Moreover, to limit any risks related to our license to operate, we have a three-year

17

---

 

program to conduct third-party EHS legal compliance audits. This program covers all our manufacturing sites, all our warehouses and all our sites with more than 150 employees.

We believe that in 2020 our activities complied with then-applicable environmental regulations in all material respects. We have engaged outside consultants to audit all of our environmental activities and have created environmental management teams, information systems and training. We have also instituted environmental control procedures for processes used by us as well as our suppliers. In 2020, there were no material environmental claims made against us.

In 2020, we decreased our greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions by 19% in absolute terms compared to 2019.

Having achieved our 2025 goal regarding greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions (a reduction of 20% per production unit vs 2016) in 2019, on December 9, 2020 we stepped up our ambition and committed to become carbon neutral by 2027. Our comprehensive roadmap to carbon neutrality includes two specific targets: compliance with the 1.5°C scenario defined at the Paris COP21 by 2025, which implies a 50% reduction of direct and indirect emissions compared to 2018, and the sourcing of 100% renewable energy by 2027.

3.2.2.14.        Labor and Human rights

Human rights are deeply rooted in our history and culture. Our programs are established to ensure that all of our employees are treated with respect and dignity. We follow the most advanced standards and apply a comprehensive due diligence process covering nine core principles: freely-chosen employment, prevention of underage labor and protection of young workers, fair organization of working time, fair wages and benefits, fair treatment and anti-harassment, non-discrimination, freedom of association, fair working conditions and employee well-being, and privacy of personal information.

We are committed to identifying and mitigating any potential and actual human rights risks in our activities. We continually monitor both our own operations and supply chain using assessments and audits. Our programs take into account two main risk criteria: location and type of activity. A taskforce and a community of qualified local coordinators support our program objectives and ensure continuous monitoring. We compel all employees and organizations to respect our standards and any applicable law.

Since 2005, we are leveraging on the RBA code of conduct to develop the whole supply chain on Labor and Human rights effective risk management. All major production and design sites are required to answer the RBA self-assessment on a yearly basis, covering 89% of our employees. The sites scored from 90 to 96/100, which is better than the industry average of 88/100. All our manufacturing sites have a rolling third-party RBA audit program in place, covering 81% of our employees. This includes initial audit, corrective action plan and closure audit on a two-year basis. The sites had an average RBA audit score above the industry average: +44 points in initial audits and +23 points in closure audits (score out of 200). In addition, our manufacturing sites are subject to internal audits allocating priorities with timely and adequate corrective follow-up actions.

In 2020, the main risks identified, and preventive and corrective actions implemented are described in the table below.

 

18

---

 

To improve our overall performance, we regularly train our community and we encourage best practice sharing between the sites.

We aim to improve workers’ awareness of their labor rights and to amplify workers’ voices to improve working conditions and mitigate issues that contribute to forced labor. Our Code of Conduct and related ‘speak up’ culture ensures employees are aware of how to raise grievances.

3.2.2.15.        Anti-corruption and bribery matters

We conduct our business with the highest standards of integrity and believe this is essential for our long-term success. At ST, compliance and ethics are everyone’s job and everyone’s responsibility. We have a zero-tolerance approach to bribery and corruption, regardless of the identity or position of the originator or recipient of any bribe. It is also strictly forbidden for anybody to use Company funds or assets to make a political contribution. Our Code of Conduct and Anti-Bribery and Corruption policy, which are available in the corporate governance section of our website at http://investors.st.com, provide clear definitions regarding instances of bribery and corruption, and include detailed descriptions of the Company’s rules for engaging with third-parties. They also explain how to report actual or suspected violations and outline the potential disciplinary actions and legal consequences of non-compliance.

3.2.2.16.        Social and employee matters

Health and safety

Protecting people from harm and safeguarding their health is key for our success.

We are committed to protecting the health and safety of employees and subcontractors by providing a safe working environment, preventing work injuries and illnesses, and providing access to healthcare. We were even more vigilant in 2020. Since the beginning of the COVID-19 pandemic, ST has had two priorities: (i) the protection and the safety of our employees and our subcontractors by maximizing all prevention measures that can be put in place and (ii) the continuity of our activities to fulfil our commitments.

We believe in helping our employees to adopt healthy lifestyles because we know good health is the foundation of a fulfilling and productive life. Our health plan provides our employees with a very high level of medical care, including regular medical check-ups, vaccinations and prevention screening.

Employee well-being is a key focus at ST and promoting high-quality working conditions was even more important in 2020. At the onset of the global health crisis, we partnered with Eutelmed to provide all employees and their families around the world with 24/7 access to a dedicated support platform, including an online network of over 100 clinical psychologists, to provide psychological support and advice in coping with the pandemic.

We constantly strive to strengthen our safety culture by re-enforcing safe behaviors and working conditions though visits, training, audits, best practice sharing and communication. We prioritize the prevention of potential employee exposure to chemicals, fire and radiation and work to minimize the risks around ergonomics, machinery, handling

19

---

 

and nanomaterials. Our recordable case rate for employees (work-related injuries per 100 employees per year) was 0.14. Our severity rate (days lost per 100 employees per year) was 3.10.

We continue to align our safety programs with industry risks, with a priority on preventing employees’ potential exposure to hazards such as chemicals fire, radiation and nanomaterials; and mechanical, handling and ergonomic risks.

Development and engagement

In 2020, we enhanced our agile and flexible working arrangements, maintaining full employment and working time for all our employees, either on site or at home. We communicated frequently with all our employees, and successfully rolled-out digital business applications and knowledge sharing platforms to up to 15,000 employees working remotely.

Employee engagement is a critical driver of company performance. The 2020 engagement survey again focused on individual engagement, goal alignment and organizational agility, but also included additional questions on how employees perceived the way ST has managed the COVID-19 pandemic, as well as open questions on overall employee experience. The participation rate was 89%, the engagement score was 82% and 82% of the employees stated that they feel safe in their working environment.

We launched our new employer branding and strengthened our communication on social media to reinforce ST’s external image, attractiveness and visibility as an employer of choice, and to promote our employer value proposition which is based on four pillars: (i) one ST everywhere, (ii) shaping tomorrow’s world, (iii) embracing our values and (iv) growing people.

Feedback is a fundamental pillar of our culture. It helps us strengthen and continuously develop our talent pool to address future business challenges. We have reinforced our culture of continuous feedback and pursued all our programs that support employee career development and help to maintain a high level of organizational performance. We particularly focused on a top management talent review to ensure proactive and effective succession plans were in place.

Diversity and Inclusion

We are present in more than 35 countries and employ 100 different nationalities. We believe that diversity and inclusion bring value to our business through effective innovation, attractiveness, engagement and agility.

At the end of 2020 more than a third of our global workforce consisted of women. Strengthening the role of women in building our future is one of our ongoing objectives.

Diversity is an important message of our employer value proposition. It is prominent in all our employer branding campaigns and is a tracked indicator in all our recruitment worldwide. To address the shortage of women in technical functions, we continued in 2020 to promote diversity in STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering and Mathematics) functions through local initiatives that encourage girls to choose technical studies at an early stage in their education.

Our aim is to overcome stereotypes by continuously reinforcing an inclusive mindset that recognizes the value and richness of a diverse workforce. To help us achieve this, we provide diversity and inclusion training for ST employees. By the end of 2020, more than 3,500 managers and human resources (HR) leaders had undergone our Diversity and Inclusion awareness e-learning.

We also started unconscious bias workshops for our employees from all regions where we operate. During these workshops, participants experience how their own unconscious bias and micro-behaviors can impact other people and learn how to be more attentive and mindful when interacting with others.

3.2.3. Key announcements

 

On January 28, 2021, our Supervisory Board has announced that it will propose at our 2021 Annual General Meeting of Shareholders the reappointment of Jean-Marc Chery as the sole member of our Managing Board and the Company's President and Chief Executive Officer.

20

---

 

On January 11, 2021, we announced the appointment of Rajita D’Souza as President, Human Resources and Corporate Social Responsibility. Ms. D’Souza reports directly to the President and Chief Executive Officer and is a member of the Company’s Executive Committee.

On December 14, 2020, we announced a strategic partnership with Schneider Electric to support our goal to reach carbon neutrality by 2027. We intend to collaborate on the overall reduction of energy consumption of our manufacturing and design sites, the renewable energy sourcing strategy across all of our locations, and the identification and implementation of credible and relevant carbon avoidance and sequestration programs.

On December 9, 2020, we announced our goal to become carbon neutral by 2027. Our comprehensive roadmap to carbon neutrality includes two specific targets: compliance with the 1.5 C scenario defined at the Paris COP21 by 2025, which implies a 50% reduction of direct and indirect emissions compared to 2018, and the sourcing of 100% renewable energy by 2027.

On December 8, 2020, we were recognized for leadership in corporate sustainability by global environmental non-profit CDP, securing a place on its prestigious ‘A List’ for tackling climate change.

On October 15, 2020, we announced the acquisition and integration of the assets of SOMOS, a fabless semiconductor company specialized in silicon-based power amplifiers and in RF Front-End Modules (“FEM”) products.  With this acquisition, we reinforced our specialist staff, IP and roadmaps of Front-End Modules for the IoT and 5G markets.

On September 23, 2020, our Supervisory Board decided to maintain the distribution of a cash dividend of $0.168 per outstanding share of our common stock, as approved by the Annual General Meeting of Shareholders on June 17, 2020.

On August 19, 2020, we published our IFRS 2020 Semi Annual Accounts for the six-month period ended June 27, 2020 on our website and filed them with the Netherlands Authority for the Financial Markets (Autoriteit Financiële Markten).

On July 28, 2020, we launched and priced a $1.5 billion dual-tranche offering of the 2020 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds.  The 2020 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds were launched in two $750 million tranches, one with a maturity of 5 years (47.5% conversion premium, negative 1.12% yield to maturity, 0% coupon) and the other with a maturity of 7 years (52.5% conversion premium, negative 0.63% yield to maturity, 0% coupon).  Under the terms of the 2020 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds, we can satisfy the conversion rights either in cash or shares, or a combination of the two, at our selection.  Proceeds from the issuance of the 2020 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds will be used for general corporate purposes, including the early redemption of the outstanding $750 million of Tranche A of our 2017 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds. The issuance of the 2020 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds occurred on August 4, 2020.

On July 28, 2020, we announced the issuance of a redemption notice to inform bondholders that we would be redeeming all of the Tranche A of our 2017 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds at their principal amount on August 27, 2020. We settled the Tranche A of our 2017 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds through the payment of cash for the principal amount and the residual consideration through the delivery of shares.

 

On July 28, 2020, we announced that we will utilize a certain number of shares repurchased under the buy-back program for delivery of shares in connection with the early redemption of our outstanding $750 million Tranche A of our 2017 Senior Unsecured Convertible Bonds.

On July 16, 2020, we announced the signing of two M&A agreements related to the acquisitions of the entire share capital of Ultra Wide Band specialist BeSpoon and of the cellular IoT connectivity assets of Riot Micro, further strengthening our offer for wireless connectivity and, in particular, the roadmap for our STM32 microcontrollers and secure MCUs.

21

---

 

On June 17, 2020, we held our Annual General Meeting of Shareholders (AGM) in Schiphol, the Netherlands. The main resolutions approved by the Shareholders were:

the following resolutions were not approved by the Shareholders:

Following the conclusion of the AGM, the members of the Supervisory Board appointed Mr. Maurizio Tamagnini as the Chairman and Mr. Nicolas Dufourcq as the Vice-Chairman of the Supervisory Board, respectively, for a 3-year term to expire at the end of the 2023 AGM.

On May 12, 2020, we announced the publication of our 2020 Sustainability Report.

 

On April 7, 2020, we closed the acquisition of a majority stake in French GaN innovator Exagan. The transaction was funded with available cash.

On March 25, 2020 we announced the main resolutions to be submitted for adoption at our AGM held in Schiphol, the Netherlands, on June 17, 2020.

 

22

---

 

On February 20, 2020 we announced a collaboration with TSMC to accelerate the development of GaN process technology and the supply of both discrete and integrated GaN devices to market. Through this collaboration, our innovative and strategic GaN products will be manufactured using TSMC’s leading GaN process technology.

On January 15, 2020, we announced the signing of a multi-year SiC wafers supply agreement with SiCrystal, a ROHM group company.  The agreement governs the supply of over $120 million of advanced 150 mm SiC wafers by SiCrystal to us during this period of demand ramp-up for SiC power devices.

3.2.4. Financial outlook: Capital investment

Our policy is to modulate our capital spending according to the evolution of the semiconductor market. To support the strong market demand and our strategic initiatives, we plan to invest in 2021 about $1.8 billion to $2.0 billion in capital expenditures. A portion of these capital expenditures will be devoted to support strategic initiatives: (i) in Agrate, Italy the progression of the new 300 mm fab to support next generation mixed signal, IGBT and power technologies; (ii) R&D for GaN power technologies in Tours 200 mm and prototyping for GaN RF devices in Catania 150 mm and (iii) investments for SiC substrates activities following the Norstel acquisition. In addition to our strategic initiatives, our main capital investment in front-end is in (i) our 300 mm fab in Crolles, optimizing existing infrastructures to support production ramp up on our main runner technologies; (ii) increase capacity for SiC Power Mosfet in our Catania and Singapore facilities; and (iii) mix evolution, and a few selected programs of capacity growth and infrastructure preparation in some of our most advanced 200 mm fabs including the Singapore fab we acquired from Micron. The most important 2021 capital investments for our back-end facilities are expected to be: (i) capacity growth on certain package families, including the SiC technology and Automotive related packages, next generation optical sensing technologies and the new generation of Intelligent Power Modules for Automotive and Industrial applications; (ii) modernization and rationalization of package lines targeting cost savings benefits; and (iii) specific investments in the areas of factory automation, quality, environment and energy savings, in part to support our commitment to be carbon neutral in 2027. In addition, we will invest in overall capacity adjustment in final testing and wafers probing (EWS) to support demand and a changed product mix as well as invest in quality, safety, maintenance, productivity, cost savings and direct emission reduction plan in both 150 mm, 200 mm front-end fabs and back-end plants.

We will continue to invest to support revenues growth and new products introduction, taking into consideration factors such as trends in the semiconductor industry and capacity utilization. We expect to need significant financial resources in the coming years for capital expenditures and for our investments in manufacturing and R&D. We plan to fund our capital requirements from cash provided by operating activities, available funds and support from third parties, and may have recourse to borrowings under available credit lines and, to the extent necessary or attractive based on market conditions prevailing at the time, the issuance of debt, convertible bonds or additional equity securities. A substantial deterioration of our economic results, and consequently of our profitability, could generate a deterioration of the cash generated by our operating activities. Therefore, there can be no assurance that, in future periods, we will generate the same level of cash as in prior years to fund our capital expenditure plans for expanding/upgrading our production facilities, our working capital requirements, our R&D and manufacturing costs.

We believe that we have the financial resources needed to meet our currently projected business requirements for the next twelve months, including capital expenditures for our manufacturing activities, working capital requirements,

3.2.5. Liquidity and financial position

We maintain a significant cash position and a low debt-to-equity ratio, which provide us with adequate financial flexibility. As in the past, our cash management policy is to finance our investment needs mainly with net cash generated from operating activities.

During 2020, our net cash increased by $399 million. The components of the net cash increase for 2020 and the comparable periods are set forth below:

23

---

 

 

 

Net cash from operating activities

Net cash from operating activities is the sum of (i) net profit adjusted for non-cash items and (ii) changes in net working capital. The net cash from operating activities in 2020 was $2,458 million, increasing compared to $2,197 million in the prior year, mainly due to higher net profit and more favorable changes in net working capital.

Net cash used in investing activities

Investing activities used $2,339 million of cash in 2020, increasing from $1,457 million in the prior year, mainly as a result of net investments in short-term deposits of $577 million. Payments for purchase of tangible assets, net of proceeds, totaled $1,279 million, compared to $1,174 million in 2019. In 2020, we also paid $113 million for business acquisitions compared to $127 million in the prior period and $371 million for intangible assets, compared to $354 million in 2019.

Net cash from (used in) financing activities

Net cash from financing activities was $279 million for 2020, compared to $386 million used in 2019, and consisted mainly of $1.57 billion net proceeds from issuance of the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on August 4, 2020, partially offset by $750 million used to settle Tranche A of the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017, $184 million of long-term debt repayment, $125 million repurchase of ordinary shares and $168 million of dividends paid to our shareholders.

24

---

 

Free cash flow (non GAAP measure)

Free Cash Flow, which is a non GAAP measure, is defined as (i) net cash from operating activities plus (ii) net cash used in investing activities, excluding payment for purchases of (and proceeds from matured) marketable securities, and net investments in short-term deposits, which are considered as temporary financial investments. The result of this definition is ultimately net cash from operating activities plus payment for purchase and proceeds from sale of tangible, intangible and financial assets, and net cash paid for business acquisitions. We believe Free Cash Flow, a non GAAP measure, provides useful information for investors and management because it measures our capacity to generate cash from our operating and investing activities to sustain our operations. Free Cash Flow is not a GAAP measure and does not represent total cash flow since it does not include the cash flows generated by or used in financing activities. Free Cash Flow reconciles with the net cash increase (decrease) by including the payment for purchase of (and proceeds from matured) marketable securities and net investments in short-term deposits, the net cash from (used in) financing activities and the effect of changes in exchange rates. In addition, our definition of Free Cash Flow may differ from definitions used by other companies. Our Free Cash Flow is derived from the U.S. GAAP Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows, which differs from the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows under IFRS. A reconciliation with the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows under IFRS is provided in the table below:

 

 

 

25

---

 

Our Free Cash Flow was $627 million in 2020, compared to $497 million in 2019.

Financial position (non GAAP measure)

Our Net Financial Position represents the difference between our total liquidity and our total financial debt. Our total financial resources include cash and cash equivalents, restricted cash, short-term deposits and quoted debt securities; our total financial debt includes interest-bearing loans and borrowings, including current portion, as reported in our consolidated statement of financial position. Net Financial Position is not a GAAP measure but we believe it provides useful information for investors and management because it gives evidence of our global position either in terms of net indebtedness or net cash by measuring our capital resources based on cash and cash equivalents, restricted cash, short-term deposits and quoted debt securities and the total level of our financial indebtedness. In addition, our definition of Net Financial Position may differ from definitions used by other companies and therefore comparability may be limited. Our Net Financial Position is derived from our U.S. GAAP Consolidated Balance Sheet, which differs from the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position under IFRS. A reconciliation with the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position under IFRS is provided in the table below:

 

 

Our Net Financial Position as of December 31, 2020 was a net cash position of $1,099 million, increasing compared to the net cash position of $672 million at December 31, 2019.

At December 31, 2020, our financial debt was $2,617 million, composed of (i) $796 million of current portion of long-term debt and (ii) $1,821 million of long-term debt. The breakdown of our total financial debt included: (i) $675 million in the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued in 2017, (ii) $1,359 million in the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued in 2020, (iii) $579 million in European Investment Bank loans (the “EIB Loans”), and (iv) $4 million in loans from other funding programs and other long-term loans. The EIB Loans are comprised of two long-term amortizing credit facilities as part of our R&D funding programs.

The first, signed in 2013, is a €350 million multi-currency loan which also supports our R&D programs. It was drawn in U.S. dollars for an amount of $471 million, of which $59 million is outstanding as of December 31, 2020. The second, signed in August 2017 is a €500 million loan in relation to R&D and capital expenditure investments in the European Union. It was fully drawn in Euros corresponding to $520 million outstanding as of December 31, 2020. Additionally, in February 2020, we entered into a new €500 million facility agreement with the EIB to support research and development and capital expenditure programs in Italy and France, undrawn as at December 31, 2020. Out of the €500 million undrawn as at December 31, 2020, an amount of €335 million was drawn in February 2021.

26

---

 

On July 3, 2017, we issued $1.5 billion in principal amount of dual tranche senior unsecured convertible bonds (Tranche A for $750 million and Tranche B for $750 million), due 2022 and 2024, respectively. Tranche A bonds were issued at 101.265% as zero-coupon bonds while Tranche B bonds were issued at par and bear a 0.25% per annum nominal interest, payable semi-annually. The conversion price at issuance was $20.54, equivalent to a 37.5% premium on both tranches, which corresponds to 9,737 equivalent shares per each $200,000 bond par value. The bonds are convertible by the bondholders or are callable by us upon certain conditions, on a net-share settlement basis, except if we elect a full-cash or full-share conversion as an alternative settlement. The net proceeds from the bond offering were $1,502 million, after deducting issuance costs.

The call option available to us for the early redemption of Tranche A was exercised in July 2020. As a consequence, bondholders exercised their conversion rights on the full Tranche A. As we elected to net-share settle the bonds, each conversion exercised by the bondholders followed the process defined in the original terms and conditions of the senior unsecured convertible bonds, which determined the actual number of shares to be transferred upon each conversion. We settled the bonds upon conversion by redeeming through cash the $750 million principal amount, and by settling the residual consideration through the delivery of 11.4 million treasury shares. The net-share settlement was fully completed as of October 1, 2020.

On August 4, 2020, we issued a $1.5 billion offering of senior unsecured convertible bonds into new or existing ordinary shares of the company. The bonds were issued in two $750 million principal amount tranches, Tranche A with a maturity of 5 years (47.5% conversion premium, negative 1.12 yield to maturity, 0% coupon) and Tranche B with a maturity of 7 years (52.5% conversion premium, negative 0.63 yield to maturity, 0% coupon). The conversion price at issuance was $43.62 on Tranche A and $45.10 on Tranche B. The bonds are convertible by the bondholders if certain conditions are satisfied. Under the terms of the bonds, we can satisfy the conversion rights either in cash or shares, or a combination of the two, at our selection. Proceeds from the issuance of the bonds, net of $10 million transaction costs, amounted of $1,567 million.

On August 4, 2020, we issued $1.5 billion in principal amount of dual tranche senior unsecured convertible bonds (Tranche A for $750 million and Tranche B for $750 million), due 2025 and 2027, respectively. Tranche A bonds were issued at 105.8% as zero-coupon bonds and Tranche B bonds were issued at 104.5% as zero-coupon bonds. The conversion price at issuance was $43.62 for Tranche A equivalent to a 47.5% conversion premium and $45.10 for Tranche B, equivalent to a 52.5% conversion premium. These conversion features correspond to an equivalent of 4,585 shares per each Tranche A bond $200,000 par value and an equivalent of 4,435 shares per each Tranche B bond $200,000 par value. The bonds are convertible by the bondholders or are callable by us upon certain conditions, on a net-share settlement basis, except if we elect a full-cash or full-share conversion as an alternative settlement. The net proceeds from the bond offering were $1,567 million, after deducting issuance costs paid by the Company.

Our long-term debt contains standard conditions but does not impose minimum financial ratios. Committed credit facilities amounted to $1.2 billion as of December 31, 2020, including the new €500 million long-term line signed with the EIB in the first half of 2020, undrawn as at December 31, 2020. Out of the €500 million undrawn as at December 31, 2020, an amount of €335 million was drawn in February 2021.

On November 5, 2018 we announced the launch of a share buy-back program of up to $750 million to be executed within a three-year period. Shares repurchased under the buy-back program are disclosed on a weekly basis, including a summary of the transactions posted on our website (www.st.com), and are held as treasury shares. As of December 31, 2020, we held 5.8 million treasury shares. Our stock repurchase program may be suspended or terminated at any time.

Our current ratings with the three major rating agencies that report on us on a solicited basis, are as follows: S&P: “BBB” with stable outlook; Moody’s: “Baa3” with positive outlook; Fitch: “BBB” with stable outlook.

3.2.6. Financial risk management

We are exposed to changes in financial market conditions in the normal course of business due to our operations in different foreign currencies and our ongoing investing and financing activities. Market risk is the uncertainty to which future earnings or asset/liability values are exposed due to operating cash flows denominated in foreign currencies and various financial instruments used in the normal course of operations. The major financial risks to which we are exposed are the foreign exchange risks related to the fluctuations of the U.S. dollar exchange rate compared to the Euro and the other major currencies in which costs are incurred, the variation of the interest rates and the risks associated to the investments of our available cash. We have established policies, procedures and internal processes

27

---

 

governing our management of market risks and the use of financial instruments to manage our exposure to such risks.

Our financial risk management is carried out by a central treasury department (Corporate Treasury). Additionally, a Treasury Committee, chaired by our CFO, steers treasury activities and ensures compliance with our corporate policies. Treasury activities are thus regulated by our policies, which define procedures, objectives and controls. The policies focus on the management of financial risk in terms of exposure to market risk, credit risk and liquidity risk. Treasury controls are subject to internal audits. Most treasury activities are centralized, with any local treasury activities subject to oversight from Corporate Treasury. Corporate Treasury identifies, evaluates and hedges financial risks in close cooperation with our operating units. It provides written principles for overall risk management, as well as written policies covering specific areas, such as foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, price risk, credit risk, use of derivative financial instruments, and investments of excess liquidity. The majority of cash and cash equivalents is held in U.S. dollars and Euros and is placed with financial institutions rated at least a single “A” long-term rating from two of the major rating agencies, meaning at least A3 from Moody’s Investor Service and A- from Standard & Poor’s and Fitch Ratings, or better. These ratings are closely and continuously monitored in order to manage exposure to the counterparty’s risk. Hedging transactions are performed only to hedge exposures deriving from operating, investing and financing activities conducted in the normal course of business.

Foreign exchange risk

We conduct our business on a global basis in various major international currencies. As a result, we are exposed to adverse movements in foreign currency exchange rates, primarily with respect to the Euro. Foreign exchange risk mainly arises from recognized assets and liabilities at our subsidiaries and future commercial transactions.

Cash flow and fair value interest rate risk

Our interest rate risk arises from long-term borrowings. Borrowings issued at variable rates expose us to cash flow interest rate risk. Borrowings issued at fixed rates expose us to fair value interest rate risk.

Credit risk

We select banks and/or financial institutions that operate with the group based on the criteria of long-term rating from at least two major Rating Agencies and keeping a maximum outstanding amount per instrument with each bank not to exceed 20% of the total.

We monitor the creditworthiness of our customers to which we grant credit terms in the normal course of business. If certain customers are independently rated, these ratings are used. Otherwise, if there is no independent rating, risk control assesses the credit quality of the customer, taking into account its financial position, past experience and other factors. Individual risk limits are set based on internal and external ratings in accordance with limits set by management. The utilization of credit limits is regularly monitored. Sales to customers are primarily settled in cash. At December 31, 2020 and 2019, no customer represented more than 10% of trade accounts receivable, net. Any remaining concentrations of credit risk with respect to trade receivables are limited due to the large number of customers and their dispersion across many geographic areas.

Liquidity risk

Prudent liquidity risk management includes maintaining sufficient cash and cash equivalents, short-term deposits and liquid financial assets, the availability of funding from committed credit facilities and the ability to close out market positions. Our objective is to maintain a significant cash position and a low debt-to-equity ratio, which ensures adequate financial flexibility. Our liquidity management policy is to finance our investments with net cash provided from operating activities.

28

---

 

3.3. Risk management and Internal control

3.3.1. Risk Management

3.3.1.1.        Our Risk Management approach

As a multi-national listed industrial semiconductor company we are exposed to risks, particularly in the current environment of increased uncertainty. Our embedded approach to Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) is formalized in a specific policy and is aligned with ISO 31000. It enables us to:

The three-year improvement roadmap defined in mid-2018, was further rolled out in 2020. This included, in particular, deploying our ERM framework which is based on the following principles:

 

Our ERM framework is described in the following chart:

ERM FRAMEWORK

 

 

Our ERM approach is managed by our Chief Audit & Risk Executive under the direct responsibility of our Managing Board and the oversight of our Supervisory Board. The content of this oversight role is detailed in our Supervisory Board Charter. Our ERM governance is described in the following chart:

 

 

 

 

 

29

---

 

ERM governance

 

 

 

ERM PROCESS

 

The ERM process is embedded in all ST organizations and Company key processes. It applies a holistic approach, combining both ‘top-down’ and ‘bottom-up’ perspectives, to ensure that risk identification, evaluation, and management are performed at the right level. It is built on a comprehensive risk universe, comprising generic risk areas that allow consolidated and comparative analysis across ST. The process is implemented as described in the following chart:

 

 

30

---

 

 

Each risk scenario is assessed against potential impact, likelihood of occurrence and room for improvement criteria, allowing us to select “Priority risk scenarios” to be treated through specific action plans monitored by our management and our Supervisory Board in the case of risks addressed at Corporate level.

3.3.1.2.        Risk Factors

Below is a list of the main risks factors we believe are related to the semiconductor industry and specifically related to our operations, which may affect our results and performance and the ability of our management to predict the future:

Risks Related to the Semiconductor Industry which Impact Us

We, and the semiconductor industry as a whole, may be impacted by changes in, or uncertainty about, global, regional and local economic, political, legal, regulatory and social environments as well as climate change

Changes in, and uncertainty about, economic, political, legal, regulatory and social conditions pose a risk as consumers and businesses may postpone spending in response to factors such as curtailment of trade and other business restrictions, financial market volatility, interest rate fluctuations, shifts in inflationary and deflationary expectations, lower capital and productivity growth, unemployment, negative news, declines in income or asset values and/or other factors. Such global, regional and local conditions could have a material adverse effect on customer and end-market demand for our products, thus materially adversely affecting our business and financial condition.

The institution of trade tariffs globally, as well as the threat thereof, could negatively impact economic conditions, which could have negative repercussions for our business. In particular, trade protection and national security policies of the U.S. and Chinese governments, including tariffs, trade restrictions, export restrictions and the placing of companies on restricted entity lists, have and may continue to limit or prevent us from transacting business with certain of our Chinese customers or suppliers; limit, prevent or discourage certain of our Chinese customers or suppliers from transacting business with us; or make it more expensive to do so. In addition, we could face increased competition as a result of China's programs to promote a domestic semiconductor industry and supply chains (including the Made in China 2025 campaign).

Trade policy changes could trigger retaliatory actions by affected countries, which could have a negative impact on our ability to do business in affected countries or lead to reduced purchases of our products by foreign customers, leading to increased costs of components contained in our products, increased manufacturing costs of our products, currency exchange rate volatility, and higher prices for our products in foreign markets. Further, protectionist measures, laws or governmental policies may encourage our customers to relocate their manufacturing capacity or supply chain to their own respective countries or require their respective contractors, subcontractors and relevant agents to do so, which could impair our ability to sustain our current level of productivity and manufacturing efficiency.

We, and the semiconductor industry as a whole, face greater risks due to the international nature of the semiconductor business, including in the countries where we, our customers or our suppliers operate, such as:

31

---

 

The semiconductor industry is cyclical and downturns in the semiconductor industry can negatively affect our results of operations and financial condition.

The semiconductor industry is cyclical and has been subject to significant downturns from time to time, as a result of global economic conditions, as well as industry-specific factors, such as built-in excess capacity, fluctuations in product supply, product obsolescence and changes in end-customer preferences. The COVID-19 pandemic has caused a significant contraction in the global economy, and there is considerable uncertainty as to its severity and duration.

Downturns are typically characterized by reduction in overall demand, accelerated erosion of selling prices, reduced revenues and high inventory levels, any of which could result in a significant deterioration of our results of operations. Such macroeconomic trends typically relate to the semiconductor industry as a whole rather than to the individual semiconductor markets to which we sell our products. To the extent that industry downturns are concurrent with the timing of new increases in production capacity or introduction of new advanced technologies in our industry, the negative effects on our business from such industry downturns may also be more severe. We have experienced revenue volatility and market downturns in the past and expect to experience them in the future, which could have a material adverse impact on our results of operations and financial condition.

The duration and the severity of the global outbreak of COVID-19 has impacted and may continue to impact the global economy and also could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

The COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in authorities imposing, and businesses and individuals implementing, numerous measures to try to contain the virus, including travel bans and restrictions, shelter-in-place and stay-at-home orders, quarantines and social distancing guidelines. While to date we have not seen a significant impact on our manufacturing facilities or our supply chain – the ability of our suppliers to deliver on their commitments to us, our ability to ship our products to our customers and general consumer demand for our products may be negatively impacted by the pandemic and/or government responses thereto.

Many of our products and services are considered to be essential under national and local guidelines. As such, we have generally continued to operate in each of the jurisdictions where we are present. However, certain of our facilities have not been able to operate at optimal capacity and any future restrictive measures may have negative impact on our operations, supply chain and transportation networks. In addition, our customers and suppliers have experienced, and may in the future experience, disruptions in their operations and supply chains, which can result in delayed, reduced, or cancelled orders, or collection risks, and which may adversely affect our results of operations.

The COVID-19 pandemic has adversely affected and may continue to adversely affect the economies and financial markets of many countries, and may result in a further prolonged period of regional, national, and global economic slowdown. In response to the COVID-19 pandemic, governments across the world have and are expected to spend significant amounts to fund disease control measures, support healthcare infrastructure, support businesses and revive their economies. Governments could look to re-direct resources and implement austerity measures in the future to balance public finances, which could result in reduced economic activity. Any further economic downturn could reduce overall demand for our products, accelerate the erosion of selling prices, lead to reduced revenues and higher inventory levels, any of which could result in a significant deterioration of our results of operations.

The COVID-19 pandemic has caused us to modify our business practices, including with respect to work-from home policies, employee travel, the cancellation of physical participation in meetings, events, and conferences, and social

32

---

 

distancing measures. Although these changes have not led to a significant impact on our business or results of operations, we could be negatively affected in the future if government policies further restrict the ability of our employees to perform their functions or if our employees contract or are exposed to COVID-19. In addition, work-from-home and other measures introduce additional operational risks, including cybersecurity risks. There is no certainty that such measures will be sufficient to mitigate the risks posed by the virus, and illness and workforce disruptions could lead to unavailability of key personnel and harm our ability to perform critical functions.

The pandemic has led to increased disruption and volatility in capital markets and credit markets. Unanticipated consequences of the pandemic and resulting economic uncertainty could adversely affect our liquidity and capital resources in the future. Due to uncertainty surrounding the COVID-19 pandemic, we suspended our stock repurchases during a portion of 2020.

The degree to which COVID-19 impacts our results will depend on future developments, which are highly uncertain and cannot be predicted, including, but not limited to, the duration and severity of the pandemic, the actions taken to contain the virus or treat its impact, other actions taken by governments, businesses, and individuals in response to the virus and resulting economic disruption, and how quickly and to what extent normal economic and operating conditions can resume. We are unable to predict the extent of the impact of the pandemic on our customers, suppliers, vendors, and other partners, and their financial conditions, but a material effect on these parties could also materially adversely affect us.

Given the continued and substantial economic uncertainty and volatility created by the pandemic, it is difficult to predict the nature and extent of impacts on demand for our products. For example, the increased demand for certain of our products that benefited as a result of work- and learn-from-home dynamics may not continue as the pandemic progresses or subsides. Similarly, even as the pandemic progresses or subsides, products for which sales have declined or where costs have increased could continue to experience lower sales or higher costs.

The impact of COVID-19 can also exacerbate other risks discussed herein, which could in turn have a material adverse effect on us. Developments related to COVID-19 have been unpredictable, and additional impacts and risks may arise that we are not aware of or able to respond to appropriately.

We may not be able to match our production capacity to demand.

As a result of the cyclicality and volatility of the semiconductor industry, it is difficult to predict future developments in the markets we serve, and, in turn, to estimate requirements for production capacity. If our markets, major customers or certain product designs or technologies do not perform as well as we have anticipated, or if demand is impacted by factors outside of our or our customers’ control, such as the COVID-19 pandemic, we risk unused capacity charges, write-offs of inventories and losses on products, and we could be required to undertake restructuring and transformation measures that may involve significant charges to our earnings. Furthermore, during certain periods, we have also experienced increased demand in certain market segments and product technologies, which has led to a shortage of capacity, an increase in the lead times of our delivery to customers and, in certain instances, being required to enter into agreements with our suppliers with onerous terms, such as take-or-pay arrangements.

Competition in the semiconductor industry is intense, and we may not be able to compete successfully if our product design technologies, process technologies and products do not meet market requirements. Furthermore, the competitive environment of the industry has resulted, and is expected to continue to result, in vertical and horizontal consolidation among our suppliers, competitors and customers, which may lead to erosion of our market share, impact our ability to compete and require us to restructure our operations.

We compete in different product lines to various degrees on certain characteristics, for example, price, technical performance, product features, product design, product availability, process technology, manufacturing capabilities and sales and technical support. Given the intense competition in the semiconductor industry, if our products do not meet market requirements based on any of these characteristics, our business, financial condition and results of operations could be materially adversely affected. Our competitors may have a stronger presence in key markets

33

---

 

and geographic regions, greater name recognition, larger customer bases, greater government support and greater financial, research and development, sales and marketing, manufacturing, distribution, technical and other resources than we do. These competitors may be able to adapt more quickly to changes in the business environment, to new or emerging technologies and to changes in customer requirements.

The semiconductor industry is intensely competitive and characterized by the high costs associated with developing marketable products and manufacturing technologies as well as high levels of investment in production capabilities. As a result, the semiconductor industry has experienced, and is expected to continue to experience, significant vertical and horizontal consolidation among our suppliers, competitors and customers. Consolidation in the semiconductor industry could erode our market share, negatively impact our ability to compete and require us to increase our R&D effort, engage in mergers and acquisitions and/or restructure our operations.

Risks Related to Our Operations

Our high fixed costs could adversely impact our results.

Our operations are characterized by high fixed or other costs which are difficult to reduce, including costs related to manufacturing, particularly as we operate our own manufacturing facilities, and the employment of our highly skilled workforce. When demand for our products decreases, competition increases or we fail to forecast demand accurately, we are driven to reduce prices and we are not always able to decrease our total costs in line with resulting revenue declines. As a result, the costs associated with our operations may not be fully absorbed, leading to unused capacity charges, higher average unit costs and lower gross margins, adversely impacting our results.

Our capital needs are high compared to those competitors who do not manufacture their own products and we may need additional funding in the coming years to finance our investments, to purchase other companies or technologies developed by third parties or to refinance our maturing indebtedness.

As a result of our choice to maintain control of a large portion of our manufacturing technologies and capabilities, we may require significant capital expenditure to maintain or upgrade our facilities in the event that our facilities become inadequate in terms of capacity, flexibility and location. We monitor our capital expenditures taking into consideration factors such as trends in the semiconductor market, customer requirements and capacity utilization. These capital expenditures may increase in the future if we decide to upgrade or expand the capacity of our manufacturing facilities, purchase or build new facilities or increase investments supporting key strategic initiatives. For instance, we may be unable to successfully maintain and operate large infrastructure projects. Such increased capital expenditures associated with large infrastructure projects and strategic initiatives might not achieve profitability or we may be unable to utilize infrastructure projects to full capacity. There can also be no assurance that future market demand and products required by our customers will meet our expectations. We also may need to invest in other companies, in IP and/or in technology developed either by us or by third parties to maintain or improve our position in the market or to reinforce our existing business. Failure to invest appropriately and in a timely manner or to successfully integrate any recent or future business acquisitions may prevent us from achieving the anticipated benefits and could have a material adverse effect on our business and results of operations.

The foregoing may require us to secure additional financing, including through the issuance of debt, equity or both. The timing and the size of any new share or bond offering would depend upon market conditions as well as a variety of other factors. In addition, the capital markets may from time to time offer terms of financing that are particularly favorable. We cannot exclude that we may access the capital markets opportunistically to take advantage of market conditions. Any such transaction or any announcement concerning such a transaction could materially impact the market price of our common shares. If we are unable to access capital on acceptable terms, this may adversely affect our business and results of operations.

 

 

34

---

 

Our operating results depend on our ability to obtain quality supplies on commercially reasonable terms. As we depend on a limited number of suppliers for materials, equipment and technology, we may experience supply disruptions if suppliers interrupt supply, increase prices or experience material adverse changes in their financial condition.

Our ability to meet our customers’ demand to manufacture our products depends upon obtaining adequate supplies of quality materials on a timely basis and on commercially reasonable terms. Certain materials are available from a limited number of suppliers or only from a limited number of suppliers in a particular region. We purchase certain materials whose prices on the world markets have fluctuated significantly in the past and may fluctuate significantly in the future. Although supplies for most of the materials we currently use are adequate, shortages could occur in various essential materials due to interruption of supply or increased demand in the industry. For instance, the COVID-19 outbreak could cause disruptions from the temporary closure of suppliers’ facilities or delays and reduced export or shipment of various materials. In addition, the costs of certain materials may increase due to market pressures and we may not be able to pass on such cost increases to our customers.

We also purchase semiconductor manufacturing equipment and third party licensed technology from a limited number of suppliers and providers and, because such equipment and technology are complex, it is difficult to replace one supplier or provider with another or to substitute one piece of equipment or type of technology for another. In addition, suppliers and providers may extend lead times, limit our supply, increase prices or change contractual terms related to certain manufacturing equipment and third party licensed technology, any of which could adversely affect our results. Furthermore, suppliers and technology providers tend to focus their investments on providing the most technologically advanced equipment, materials and technology and may not be in a position to address our requirements for equipment, materials or technology of older generations. Although we work closely with our suppliers and providers to avoid such shortages, there can be no assurance that we will not encounter these problems in the future.

Consolidation among our suppliers or vertical integration among our competitors may limit our ability to obtain sufficient quantities of materials, equipment and/or technology on commercially reasonable terms and engage in mergers and acquisitions. In certain instances, we may be required to enter into agreements with our suppliers with onerous terms, such as take-or-pay arrangements. If we are unable to obtain supplies of materials, equipment or technology in a timely manner or at all, or if such materials, equipment or technology prove inadequate or too costly, our results of operations could be adversely affected.

Our financial results can be affected by fluctuations in exchange rates, principally in the value of the U.S. dollar.

Currency exchange rate fluctuations affect our results of operations because our reporting currency is the U.S. dollar, in which we receive the major portion of our revenues, while, more importantly, we incur a limited portion of our revenue and a significantly higher portion of our costs in currencies other than the U.S. dollar. A significant variation of the value of the U.S. dollar against the principal currencies that have a material impact on us (primarily the Euro, but also certain other currencies of countries where we have operations, such as the Singapore dollar) could result in a favorable impact, net of hedging, on our net income in the case of an appreciation of the U.S. dollar, or a negative impact, net of hedging, on our net income if the U.S. dollar depreciates relative to these currencies, in particular with respect to the Euro.

In order to reduce the exposure of our financial results to the fluctuations in exchange rates, our principal strategy has been to balance as much as possible the proportion of sales to our customers denominated in U.S. dollars with the amount of purchases from our suppliers denominated in U.S. dollars and to reduce the weight of the other costs, including depreciation, denominated in Euros and in other currencies. In order to further reduce our exposure to U.S. dollar exchange rate fluctuations, we have hedged certain line items on our Consolidated Statements of Income, in particular with respect to a portion of the cost of sales, the majority of the R&D expenses and certain SG&A expenses located in the Euro zone. We also hedge certain manufacturing costs, included within the cost of sales, denominated in Singapore dollars. There can be no assurance that our hedging transactions will prevent us from

35

---

 

incurring higher Euro-denominated manufacturing costs and/or operating expenses when translated into our U.S. dollar-based accounts.

Our operating results may vary significantly from quarter to quarter and annually and may also differ significantly from our expectations or guidance.

Our operating results are affected by a wide variety of factors that could materially and adversely affect revenues and profitability or lead to significant variability of our operating results from one period to the next. These factors include changes in demand from our key customers, capital requirements, inventory management, availability of funding, competition, new product developments, start of adoption of our new products by customers, technological changes, manufacturing or supplier issues and effective tax rates. In addition, in periods of industry overcapacity or when our key customers encounter difficulties in their end-markets or product ramps, orders are more exposed to cancellations, reductions, price renegotiation or postponements, which in turn reduce our ability to forecast the next quarter or full year production levels, revenues and margins. As a result, we may not meet our financial targets, which could in turn have an impact on our reputation or brand. For these reasons and others that we may not yet have identified, our revenues and operating results may differ materially from our expectations or guidance as visibility is reduced.

If our external silicon foundries or back-end subcontractors fail to perform, this could adversely affect our business prospects.

We currently use external silicon foundries and back-end subcontractors for a portion of our manufacturing activities. If our external silicon foundries or back-end subcontractors are unable to satisfy our demand, or experience manufacturing difficulties, delays or reduced yields, our results of operations and ability to satisfy customer demand could suffer. Likewise, if we are unable to meet our commitments to silicon foundries and back-end subcontractors, our results of operations could suffer. Prices for these services also vary depending on capacity utilization rates at our external silicon foundries and back-end subcontractors, quantities demanded and product and process technology. Such outsourcing costs can vary materially and, in cases of industry shortages, they can increase significantly, negatively impacting our business prospects.

Our manufacturing processes are highly complex, costly and potentially vulnerable to impurities, disruptions or inefficient implementation of production changes or interruptions that can significantly increase our costs and delay product shipments to our customers.

Our manufacturing processes are highly complex, require advanced and increasingly costly equipment and are continuously modified or maintained in an effort to improve yields and product performance and lower the cost of production.

Furthermore, impurities or other difficulties in the manufacturing process can lower yields, interrupt production or result in scrap. As system complexity and production changes have increased and sub-micron technology has become more advanced, manufacturing tolerances have been reduced and requirements for precision have become even more demanding. We have from time to time experienced bottlenecks and production difficulties that have caused delivery delays and quality control problems. There can be no assurance that we will not experience bottlenecks or production, transition or other difficulties in the future.

In addition, we are exposed to risks related to interruptions of our manufacturing processes. If any of our property or equipment is damaged or otherwise rendered unusable or inoperable due to accident, cyberattack or otherwise this could result in interruptions which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

36

---

 

We may experience quality problems from time to time that can result in decreased sales and operating margin and product liability or warranty claims.

We sell complex products that may not in each case comply with specifications or customer requirements, or may contain design or manufacturing defects, that could cause personal injury, property damage or security risks that could be exploited by unauthorized third parties hacking, corrupting or otherwise obtaining access to our products, including the software loaded thereon by us, our suppliers or our customers. Although our general practice is to contractually limit our liability to the repair, replacement or refund of defective products, we occasionally agree to contractual terms with key customers in which we provide extended warranties and accordingly we may face product liability, warranty, delivery failure, and/or other claims relating to our products that could result in significant expenses relating to compensation payments, product recalls or other actions related to such extended warranties and/or to maintain good customer relationships, which could result in decreased sales and operating margin and other material adverse effects on our business. Costs or payments we may make in connection with warranty and other claims or product recalls may adversely affect our results of operations. There can be no assurance that we will be successful in maintaining our relationships with customers with whom we incur quality problems. Furthermore, if litigation occurs we could incur significant costs and liabilities to defend ourselves against such claims and, if damages are awarded against us, there can be no assurance that our insurance policies will be available or adequate to protect us against such claims.

 

Disruptions in our relationships with any one of our key customers or distributors, and/or material changes in their strategy or financial condition or business prospects, could adversely affect our results of operations.

A substantial portion of our sales is derived from a limited number of customers and distributors. There can be no assurance that our customers or distributors will continue to book the same level of sales with us that they have in the past, will continue to succeed in the markets they serve and will not purchase competing products over our products. Many of our key customers and distributors operate in cyclical businesses that are also highly competitive, and their own market positions may vary considerably. In recent years, some of our customers have vertically integrated their businesses. Such vertical integrations may impact our business. Our relationships with the newly formed entities could be either reinforced or jeopardized by the integration. If we are unable to maintain or increase our market share with our key customers or distributors, or if they were to increase product returns or fail to meet payment obligations, our results of operations could be materially adversely affected. Certain of our products are customized to our customers’ specifications. If customers do not purchase products made specifically for them, we may not be able to recover a cancellation fee from our customers or resell such products to other customers. In addition, the occurrence of epidemic or pandemic outbreaks such as COVID-19 could affect our customers. While the geographic spread of COVID-19 cannot be predicted and its future developments are uncertain, if its severity increases, the adverse public health impact on our customers could negatively affect our results.

We may experience delays in delivering our product and technology roadmaps as well as transformation initiatives.

Our industry adapts to technological advancements and it is likely that new products, equipment, processes and service methods, including transformation initiatives related to digitalization, are in the process of being implemented. Any failure by us to react to changes or advances in existing technologies and processes as we develop and invest in our product, technology and transformation roadmaps could materially delay the introduction of new solutions. If we are not able to execute on these roadmaps on a timely basis or at an acceptable cost this could result in loss of competitiveness of our solutions, decreased revenue and a loss of market share.

 

Our computer systems, including hardware, software, information and cloud-based initiatives, are subject to attempted security breaches and other cybersecurity threats, which, if successful, could adversely impact our business.

We have, from time to time, detected and experienced attempts by others to gain unauthorized access to our computer systems and networks. The reliability and security of our information technology infrastructure and

37

---

 

software, and our ability to expand and continually update technologies, including to transition to cloud-based technologies, in response to our changing needs is critical to our business. In the current environment, there are numerous and evolving risks to cybersecurity, including criminal hackers, state-sponsored intrusions, terrorism, industrial espionage, employee malfeasance, vandalism and human or technological error. Computer hackers and others routinely attempt to breach the security of technology products, services, and systems, and those of our customers, suppliers and providers of third party licensed technology, and some of those attempts may be successful. Such breaches could result in, for example, unauthorized access to, disclosure, modification, misuse, loss, or destruction of our, our customer, or other third party data or systems, theft of our trade secrets and other sensitive or confidential data, including personal information and intellectual property, system disruptions, and denial of service.

The attempts to breach our systems, including cloud-based systems, and gain unauthorized access to our information technology systems are becoming increasingly more sophisticated. These attempts may include covertly introducing malware to our computers, including those in our manufacturing operations, and impersonating unauthorized users, among others. For instance, employees and former employees, in particular former employees who become employees of our competitors or customers, may misappropriate, use, publish or provide to our competitors or customers our intellectual property and/or proprietary or confidential business information. Also, third parties may attempt to register domain names similar to our brands or website, which could cause confusion and divert online customers away from our products. In the event of such breaches, we, our customers or other third parties could be exposed to potential liability, litigation, and regulatory action, as well as the loss of existing or potential customers, damage to our reputation, and other financial loss and such breaches could also result in losing existing or potential customers in connection with any actual or perceived security vulnerabilities in our systems. In addition, the cost and operational consequences of responding to breaches and implementing remediation measures could be significant. As these threats continue to develop and grow, we have been adapting and strengthening our security measures.

As a result of the social distancing measures and regulations enforced by governments in connection with the COVID-19 pandemic, and the resulting work-from-home policies that we have undertaken, there has been additional reliance placed on our IT systems and resources. The resulting reliance on these resources, and the added need to communicate by electronic means, could increase our risk of cybersecurity incidents.

We continue to increase the resources we allocate to implementing, maintaining and/or updating security systems to protect data and infrastructure and to raising security awareness among those having access to our systems. However, these security measures cannot provide absolute security and there can be no assurance that our employee training, operational, and other technical security measures or other controls will detect, prevent or remediate security or data breaches in a timely manner or otherwise prevent unauthorized access to, damage to, or interruption of our systems and operations.

We regularly evaluate our IT systems and business continuity plan to make enhancements and periodically implement new or upgraded systems, as for instance the transition and migration of our data systems to cloud-based platforms and critical system migration. Any delay in the implementation of, or disruption in the transition to different systems could adversely affect our ability to record and report financial and management information on a timely and accurate basis and could impact our operations and financial position. In addition, a miscalculation of the level of investment needed to ensure our technology solutions are current and up-to-date as technology advances and evolves could result in disruptions in our business should the software, hardware or maintenance of such items become out-of-date or obsolete and the costs of upgrading our cybersecurity systems and remediating damages could be substantial.

We may also be adversely affected by security breaches related to our equipment providers and providers of third party licensed technology. As a global enterprise, we could also be impacted by existing and proposed laws and regulations, as well as government policies and practices related to cybersecurity, privacy and data protection. Additionally, cyberattacks or other catastrophic events resulting in disruptions to or failures in power, information technology, communication systems or other critical infrastructure could result in interruptions or delays to us, our customers, or other third party operations or services, financial loss, potential liability, and damage our reputation and affect our relationships with our customers and suppliers.

38

---

 

We may be subject to theft, loss, or misuse of personal data about our employees, customers, or other third parties, which could increase our expenses, damage our reputation, or result in legal or regulatory proceedings.

The theft, loss, or misuse of personal data collected, used, stored, or transferred by us to run our business could result in significantly increased security costs or costs related to defending legal claims. Global privacy legislation, including various EU regulations and directives regulating data privacy and security, such as the General Data Protection Regulation (“GDPR”) and the transmission of content using the Internet involving residents of the EU, enforcement, and policy activity in this area are rapidly expanding and creating a complex compliance regulatory environment.

In particular, the requirements of the GDPR impose a higher compliance burden on us and materially increase the maximum level of fines for compliance failures from their current levels relating to, among other things, consent to process personal data of individuals, the information provided to individuals regarding the processing of their personal data, the security and confidentiality of personal data, and notifications in the event of data breaches and use of third party processors. Costs to comply with and implement these privacy-related and data protection measures may increase and may necessitate changes to our business. In addition, our failure to comply with local and international privacy or data protection laws and regulations could result in proceedings against us by governmental entities or others. Failure to comply with the GDPR or other data privacy regimes could subject us to significant fines and reputational harm.

Further, privacy-related legislation is rapidly evolving which may have a negative impact on our business if interpreted or implemented in a manner that is inconsistent from country to country and inconsistent with the current policies and practices of our customers or business partners. We may also have to change the manner in which we contract with our business partners, store and transfer information and otherwise conduct our business, which could increase our costs and reduce our revenues. In particular, the requirements of the GDPR will impose a higher compliance burden on us and materially increase the maximum level of fines for compliance failures from their current levels. Costs to comply with and implement these privacy-related and data protection measures could be significant. In addition, our failure to comply with local and international privacy or data protection laws and regulations could result in proceedings against us by governmental entities or others.

Our business is dependent in large part on continued growth in the industries and segments into which our products are sold and on our ability to retain existing customers and attract new ones. A market decline in any of these industries, our inability to retain and attract customers, or customer demand for our products which differs from our projections, could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.

The demand for our products depends significantly on the demand for our customers’ end products. Growth of demand in the industries and segments into which our products are sold fluctuates significantly and is driven by a variety of factors, including consumer spending, consumer preferences, the development and acceptance of new technologies and prevailing economic conditions. Changes in our customers’ markets and in our customers’ respective shares in such markets could result in slower growth and a decline in demand for our products.  In addition, if projected industry growth rates do not materialize as forecasted, our spending on process and product development ahead of market acceptance could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our business is dependent upon our ability to retain existing customers. In 2020 our largest customer, Apple, accounted for 23.9% of our revenues. While we do not believe to be dependent on any one customer or group of customers, the loss of key customers or important sockets at key customers could have an adverse effect on our results of operations.

Our existing customers’ product strategy may change from time to time and/or product specifications may change on short-time product life cycles and we have no certainty that our business, financial position and results of operations will not be affected. Our business is also dependent upon our ability to attract new customers. There can be no assurance that we will be successful in attracting and retaining new customers, or in adequately projecting

39

---

 

customer demand for our products. Our failure to do so could materially adversely affect our business, financial position and results of operations.

Market dynamics have driven, and continue to drive us, to a strategic repositioning.

In recent years, we have undertaken several initiatives to reposition our business. Our strategies to improve our results of operations and financial condition have led us, and may in the future lead us, to acquire businesses that we believe to be complementary to our own, or to divest ourselves of or wind down activities that we believe do not serve our longer term business plans. Our potential acquisition strategies depend in part on our ability to identify suitable acquisition targets, finance their acquisition, obtain approval by our shareholders and obtain required regulatory and other approvals. Our potential divestiture strategies depend in part on our ability to compete and to identify the activities in which we should no longer engage, obtain the relevant approvals pursuant to our governance process and then determine and execute appropriate methods to divest of them.

We are constantly monitoring our product portfolio and cannot exclude that additional steps in this repositioning process may be required. Furthermore, we cannot assure that any strategic repositioning of our business, including executed and possible future acquisitions or dispositions, will be successful and will not result in impairment, restructuring charges and other related closure costs.

Acquisitions and divestitures involve a number of risks that could adversely affect our operating results and financial condition, including: we may be unable to successfully integrate businesses or teams we acquire with our culture and strategies on a timely basis or at all; and we may be required to record charges related to the goodwill or other long-term assets associated with the acquired businesses. There can be no assurance that we will be able to achieve the full scope of the benefits we expect from a particular acquisition, divestiture or investment. Our business, financial condition and results of operations may suffer if we fail to coordinate our resources effectively to manage both our existing businesses and any acquired businesses. In addition, the financing of future acquisitions or divestitures may negatively impact our financial position, including our ability to pay a dividend and/or repurchase our shares, and credit rating and we could be required to raise additional funding.

Other risks associated with acquisitions include: assumption of potential liabilities, disclosed or undisclosed, associated with the business acquired, which liabilities may exceed the amount of indemnification available from the seller; potential inaccuracies in the financials of the business acquired; and our ability to retain customers of an acquired entity, its business or industrialize an acquired process or technology. Identified risks associated with divestitures include: loss of activities and technologies that may have complemented our remaining businesses or operations; and loss of important services provided by key employees that are assigned to divested activities.

We depend on collaboration with other semiconductor industry companies, research organizations, universities, customers and suppliers to further our R&D efforts, and our business and prospects could be materially adversely affected by the failure or termination of such alliances.

Our success depends on our ability to introduce innovative new products and technologies to the marketplace on a timely basis. In light of the high levels of investment required for R&D activities, we depend in certain instances on collaborations with other semiconductor industry companies, research organizations, universities, customers and suppliers to develop or access new technologies.

40

---

 

Such collaboration provides us with a number of important benefits, including the sharing of costs, reductions in our own capital requirements, acquisitions of technical know-how and access to additional production capacities. However, there can be no assurance that our collaboration efforts will be successful and allow us to develop and access new technologies in due time, in a cost-effective manner and/or to meet customer demands. If a particular collaboration terminates before our intended goals are accomplished we may incur additional unforeseen costs, and our business and prospects could be adversely affected. Furthermore, if we are unable to develop or otherwise access new technologies, whether independently or in collaboration with another industry participant, we may fail to keep pace with the rapid technology advances in the semiconductor industry, our participation in the overall semiconductor industry may decrease and we may also lose market share.

We depend on patents to protect our rights to our technology and may face claims of infringing the IP rights of others.

We depend on patents and other IP rights to protect our products and our manufacturing processes against misappropriation by others. The process of seeking patent protection can be long and expensive, and there can be no assurance that that we will receive patents from currently pending or future applications. Even if patents are issued, they may not be of sufficient scope or strength to provide meaningful protection or any commercial advantage. In addition, effective IP protection may be unavailable or limited in some countries. Our ability to enforce one or more of our patents could be adversely affected by changes in patent laws, laws in certain foreign jurisdictions that may not effectively protect our intellectual property rights or by ineffective enforcement of laws in such jurisdictions. Competitors may also develop technologies that are protected by patents and other IP and therefore either be unavailable to us or be made available to us subject to adverse terms and conditions. We have in the past used our patent portfolio to negotiate broad patent cross-licenses with many of our competitors enabling us to design, manufacture and sell semiconductor products, without concern of infringing patents held by such competitors. We may not in the future be able to obtain such licenses or other rights to protect necessary IP on favorable terms for the conduct of our business, and such failure may adversely impact our results of operations. Such cross-license agreements expire from time to time and there is no assurance that we can or we will extend them.

We have from time to time received, and may in the future receive, communications alleging possible infringement of third party patents and other IP rights. Some of those claims are made by so-called non-practicing entities against which we are unable to assert our own patent portfolio to lever licensing terms and conditions. Competitors with whom we do not have patent cross-license agreements may also develop technologies that are protected by patents and other IP rights and which may be unavailable to us or only made available on unfavorable terms and conditions. We may therefore become involved in costly litigation brought against us regarding patents and other IP rights. IP litigation may also involve our customers who in turn may seek indemnification from us should we not prevail and/or who may decide to curtail their orders for those of our products over which claims have been asserted. Such lawsuits may therefore have a material adverse effect on our business. We may be forced to stop producing substantially all or some of our products or to license the underlying technology upon economically unfavorable terms and conditions or we may be required to pay damages for the prior use of third party IP and/or face an injunction.

The outcome of IP litigation is inherently uncertain and may divert the efforts and attention of our management and other specialized technical personnel. Such litigation can result in significant costs and, if not resolved in our favor, could materially and adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We operate in many jurisdictions with highly complex and varied tax regimes. Changes in tax rules, new or revised legislation or the outcome of tax assessments and audits could cause a material adverse effect on our results.

We operate in many jurisdictions with highly complex and varied tax regimes. Changes in tax rules, new or revised legislation or the outcome of tax assessments and audits could have a material adverse effect on our results. Our tax rate is variable and depends on changes in the level of operating results within various local jurisdictions and on changes in the applicable taxation rates of these jurisdictions, as well as changes in estimated tax provisions due to new events. We currently receive certain tax benefits or benefit from net operating losses cumulated in prior years

41

---

 

in some countries, and these benefits may not be available in the future due to changes in the local jurisdictions or credits on net operating losses being no longer available due to either full utilization or expiration of the statute of limitations in such jurisdictions. As a result, our effective tax rate could increase and/or our benefits from carrying forward net operating losses could affect our deferred tax assets in certain countries in the coming years. In addition, the acquisition or divestiture of businesses in certain jurisdictions could materially affect our effective tax rate.

We evaluate our deferred tax asset position and the need for a valuation allowance on a regular basis. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets is dependent upon, among other things, our ability to generate future taxable income that is sufficient to utilize in certain jurisdictions loss carry-forwards or tax credits before their expiration or our ability to implement prudent and feasible tax optimization strategies. The recorded amount of total deferred tax assets could be reduced, which could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial position, if our estimates of projected future taxable income and benefits from available tax strategies are reduced as a result of a change in business condition or in management’s plans or due to other factors, such as changes in tax laws and regulations.

We are subject to the possibility of loss contingencies arising out of tax claims, assessment of uncertain tax positions and provisions for specifically identified income tax exposures. We are also subject to tax audits in certain jurisdictions. There can be no assurance that we will be successful in resolving potential tax claims that result from these audits, which could result in material adjustments in our tax positions. We record provisions on the basis of the best current understanding; however, we could be required to record additional provisions in future periods for amounts that cannot currently be assessed. Our failure to do so and/or the need to increase our provisions for such claims could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and our financial position.

Our operating results can also vary significantly due to impairment of goodwill and other intangible assets incurred in the course of acquisitions and equity investments, as well as to impairment of tangible assets due to changes in the business environment.

Our operating results can vary significantly due to impairment of goodwill, other intangible assets and equity investments booked pursuant to acquisitions, joint venture agreements and the purchase of technologies and licenses from third parties, as well as to impairment of tangible assets due to changes in the business environment. Because the market for our products is characterized by rapidly changing technologies, significant changes in the semiconductor industry, and the potential failure of our business initiatives, our future cash flows may not support the value of goodwill, tangible assets and other intangibles registered in our Consolidated Balance Sheets.

We receive public funding, and a reduction in the amount available to us or demands for repayment could increase our costs and impact our results of operations.

To support our proprietary R&D for technology investments and investments in cooperative R&D ventures, we have in the past obtained public funding and expect to obtain public funding in the future, mainly from French, Italian and EU governmental entities. The public funding we receive is subject to periodic review by the relevant authorities and there can be no assurance that we will continue to benefit from such programs at current levels or that sufficient alternative funding will be available if we lose such support. If any of the public funding programs we participate in are curtailed or discontinued and we do not reduce the relevant R&D costs, this could have a material adverse effect on our business. Furthermore, to receive public funding, we enter into agreements which require compliance with extensive regulatory requirements and set forth certain conditions relating to the funded programs. If we fail to meet the regulatory requirements or applicable conditions, we may, under certain circumstances, be required to refund previously received amounts, which could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations. If there are changes in the public funding we receive this could increase the net costs for us to continue investing in R&D at current levels and could result in a material adverse effect on our results of operations.

42

---

 

Some of our production processes and materials are environmentally sensitive, which could expose us to liability and increase our costs due to environmental, health and safety laws and regulations or because of damage to the environment.

We are subject to environmental, health and safety laws and regulations that govern various aspects, including the use, storage, discharge and disposal of chemicals, gases and other hazardous substances used in our operations. Compliance with such laws and regulations could adversely affect our manufacturing costs or product sales by requiring us to acquire costly equipment, materials or greenhouse gas allowances, or to incur other significant expenses in adapting our manufacturing processes or waste and emission disposal processes. Furthermore, environmental claims or our failure to comply with present or future regulations could result in the assessment of damages or imposition of fines against us, suspension of production or a cessation of operations. Failure by us to control the use of, or adequately restrict the discharge of, chemicals or hazardous substances could subject us to future liabilities.

Climate change and related sustainability initiatives, including our commitment to be carbon neutral by 2027, could place additional burden on us and our operations.

As climate change issues become more pronounced, we may correspondingly face increased expectations from our stakeholders to take actions beyond existing regulatory requirements to minimize our impact on the environment and mitigate climate change related effects. On December 9, 2020, we announced our goal to become carbon neutral by 2027. Our comprehensive roadmap to carbon neutrality includes two specific targets: compliance with the 1.5°C scenario defined at the Paris COP21 by 2025, which implies a 50% reduction of direct and indirect emissions compared to 2018, and the sourcing of 100% renewable energy by 2027.

To meet these additional requirements, we will need to continue to deploy additional equipment, introduce process changes, utilize alternative suppliers and materials, and take other similar actions, some or all of which may require us to incur additional costs which could result in a material adverse effect on our results of operations and our financial position. In addition, if we fail to meet these expectations, or foster additional sustainability initiatives, we may experience reputational risk which could impact our ability to attract and retain customers, employees, and investors.

Loss of key employees and the inability to continuously recruit and retain qualified employees could hurt our competitive position.

Our success depends to a significant extent upon our key executives and R&D, engineering, marketing, sales, manufacturing, support and other personnel. Our success also depends upon our ability to continue to identify, attract, retain and motivate highly trained and skilled engineering, technical and professional personnel in a competitive recruitment environment, as well our ability to ensure the smooth succession and continuity of business with newly hired and promoted personnel. For instance, in highly specialized areas, it may become more difficult to retain employees.

Our employee hiring and retention also depend on our ability to build and maintain a diverse and inclusive workplace culture and be viewed as an employer of choice. We intend to continue to devote significant resources to recruit, train and retain qualified employees, however, we may not be able to attract, obtain and retain these employees, which may affect our growth in future years and the loss of the services of any of these key personnel without adequate replacement or the inability to attract new qualified personnel could have a material adverse effect on us.

The interests of our controlling shareholder, which is in turn indirectly controlled by the French and Italian governments, may conflict with other investors’ interests. In addition, our controlling shareholder may sell our existing common shares or issue financial instruments exchangeable into our common shares at any time.

We have been informed that as at December 31, 2020, STMicroelectronics Holding N.V. (“ST Holding”), owned 250,704,754 shares, or approximately 27.5%, of our issued common shares. ST Holding may therefore be in a position to effectively control the outcome of decisions submitted to the vote at our shareholders’ meetings, including but not limited to the appointment of the members of our Managing and Supervisory Boards.

43

---

 

We have been informed that ST Holding’s shareholders, each of which is ultimately controlled by the French or Italian government, are party to a shareholders agreement (the “STH Shareholders Agreement”), which governs relations between them. We are not a party to the STH Shareholders Agreement. The STH Shareholders Agreement includes provisions requiring the unanimous approval by the shareholders of ST Holding before ST Holding can vote its shares in our share capital, which may give rise to a conflict of interest between our interests and investors’ interests, on the one hand, and the (political) interests of ST Holding’s shareholders, on the other hand. Our ability to issue new shares or other securities giving access to our shares may be limited by ST Holding’s desire to maintain its shareholding at a certain level and our ability to buy back shares may be limited by ST Holding due to a Dutch law requiring one or more shareholders acquiring 30% or more of our voting rights to launch a tender offer for our outstanding shares.

The STH Shareholders Agreement also permits our respective French and Italian indirect shareholders to cause ST Holding to dispose of its stake in us at any time, thereby reducing the current level of their respective indirect interests in our common shares. Sales of our common shares or the issuance of financial instruments exchangeable into our common shares or any announcements concerning a potential sale by ST Holding could materially impact the market price of our common shares depending on the timing and size of such sale, market conditions as well as a variety of other factors.

Our shareholder structure and our preference shares may deter a change of control.

We have an option agreement in place with an independent foundation, whereby the foundation can acquire preference shares in the event of actions which the board of the independent foundation determines would be contrary to our interests, our shareholders and our other stakeholders and which in the event of a creeping acquisition or offer for our common shares are not supported by our Managing Board and Supervisory Board. In addition, our shareholders have authorized us to issue additional capital within the limits of the authorization by our General Meeting of Shareholders (“AGM”), subject to the requirements of our Articles of Association, without the need to seek a specific shareholder resolution for each capital increase. Accordingly, an issue of preference shares or new shares may make it more difficult for a shareholder to obtain control over our General Meeting of Shareholders. These anti-takeover provisions could substantially impede the ability of our shareholders to benefit from a change in control and, as a result, may materially adversely affect the market price of our ordinary shares and our investors’ ability to realize any potential change of control premium.

Any decision to reduce or discontinue paying cash dividends to our shareholders could adversely impact the market price of our common shares.

On an annual basis, our Supervisory Board, upon the proposal of the Managing Board, may propose the distribution of a cash dividend to the General Meeting of Shareholders. Any reduction or discontinuance by us of the payment of cash dividends at historical levels could cause the market price of our common shares to decline.

We are required to prepare financial statements under IFRS and we also prepare Consolidated Financial Statements under U.S. GAAP, and such dual reporting may impair the clarity of our financial reporting.

We use U.S. GAAP as our primary set of reporting standards. Applying U.S. GAAP in our financial reporting is designed to ensure the comparability of our results to those of our competitors, as well as the continuity of our reporting, thereby providing our stakeholders and potential investors with a clear understanding of our financial performance. As we are incorporated in The Netherlands and our shares are listed on Euronext Paris and on the Borsa Italiana, we are subject to EU regulations requiring us to also report our results of operations and financial statements using IFRS.

As a result of the obligation to report our financial statements under IFRS, we prepare our results of operations using both U.S. GAAP and IFRS, which are currently not consistent. Such dual reporting can materially increase the complexity of our financial communications. Our financial condition and results of operations reported in accordance with IFRS will differ from our financial condition and results of operations reported in accordance with U.S. GAAP, which could give rise to confusion in the marketplace.

44

---

 

There are inherent limitations on the effectiveness of our controls.

There can be no assurance that a system of internal control over financial reporting, including one determined to be effective, will prevent or detect all misstatements. A control system, no matter how well designed and operated, can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurance regarding financial statement preparation and presentation. Projections of the results of any evaluation of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting into future periods are subject to inherent risk. The relevant controls may become inadequate due to changes in circumstances or the degree of compliance with the underlying policies or procedures may deteriorate.

Because we are subject to the corporate law of The Netherlands, U.S. investors might have more difficulty protecting their interests in a court of law or otherwise than if we were a U.S. company.

Our corporate affairs are governed by our Articles of Association and by the laws governing corporations incorporated in The Netherlands. Therefore, U.S. investors may have more difficulty in protecting their interests in the face of actions by our management, members of our Managing and Supervisory Boards or our controlling shareholders than U.S. investors would have if we were incorporated in the United States.

Our executive offices and a substantial portion of our assets are located outside the United States. In addition, ST Holding and most members of our Managing and Supervisory Boards are residents of jurisdictions other than the United States. As a result, it may be difficult or impossible for shareholders to effect service within the United States upon us, ST Holding, or members of our Managing or Supervisory Boards. It may also be difficult or impossible for shareholders to enforce outside the United States judgments obtained against such persons in U.S. courts, or to enforce in U.S. courts judgments obtained against such persons in courts in jurisdictions outside the United States. This could be true in any legal action, including actions predicated upon the civil liability provisions of U.S. securities laws. In addition, it may be difficult or impossible for shareholders to enforce, in original actions brought in courts in jurisdictions located outside the United States, rights predicated upon U.S. securities laws.

We have been advised by Dutch counsel that the United States and The Netherlands do not currently have a treaty providing for reciprocal recognition and enforcement of judgments (other than arbitration awards) in civil and commercial matters. With respect to choice of court agreements in civil or commercial matters, it is noted that the Hague Convention on Choice of Court Agreements entered into force in the Netherlands, but has not entered into force in the United States. As a consequence, a final judgment for the payment of money rendered by any federal or state court in the United States based on civil liability, whether or not predicated solely upon the federal securities laws of the United States, will not be enforceable in The Netherlands. However, if the party in whose favor such final judgment is rendered brings a new suit in a competent court in The Netherlands, such party may submit to The Netherlands court the final judgment that has been rendered in the United States. If The Netherlands court finds that the jurisdiction of the federal or state court in the United States has been based on grounds that are internationally acceptable and that proper legal procedures that are in accordance with the Dutch standards of proper administration of justice including sufficient safeguards (behoorlijke rechtspleging) have been observed, the court in The Netherlands would, under current practice, in principle give binding effect to the final judgment that has been rendered in the United States unless such judgment contradicts The Netherlands’ public policy and provided that the judgment by the foreign court is not incompatible with a decision rendered between the same parties by a Dutch court, or with a previous decision rendered between the same parties by a foreign court in a dispute that concerns the same subject and is based on the same cause, provided that the previous decision qualifies for acknowledgment in the Netherlands. Even if such a foreign judgment is given binding effect, a claim based thereon may, however, still be rejected if the foreign judgment is not or no longer formally enforceable.

3.3.1.3.        Risk appetite strategy

Risk management activities conducted as part of the ERM process are governed by our risk appetite, which has been discussed at the Supervisory Board and Audit Committee levels.

Our risk appetite strategy depends on the nature of risks. We determine, on a regular basis, the amount of risk we are willing to pursue or retain, depending on associated expected rewards, opportunities, and costs.

45

---

 

As an illustration, we strive to eliminate or mitigate to the lowest possible level through well-designed and effective internal controls risks pertaining to the following categories:

3.3.1.4.        Illustrative risk management measures

Corporate governance

Our commitment to the good principles of corporate governance is outlined in section 5.1. The Supervisory Board and its committees, and the Managing Board, through their structures, charters and activities ensure proper corporate governance as described in chapter 5.

Product quality

Quality is a key priority in ST and our vision is to elevate ST to the highest level of quality as an asset for our customers. We can achieve a high level of quality because our employees and management are committed to quality, focused on customer’s targets, and improvement programs are effective.

Product Quality & Reliability (PQR) is organized at a Company- level, and embedded in all our organizations. The PQR leadership team brings together quality directors from across our entire business operations: front-end and back-end manufacturing, product groups, sales regions and corporate organizations to deploy our quality strategy and quality programs throughout the Company.

ST is continuously adapting to have the necessary infrastructure and organization to ensure ST products meet the highest quality and reliability requirements of customers in the markets we address.

Our quality governance is based on our Quality Management System (QMS), as documented in our Quality Manual. Our manual details how we implement processes to guarantee that our products and processes meet the highest customer and standards requirements.

We adhere to internationally recognized quality management standards. We received our first company-wide ISOTS16949 certification in 2003 and this certification was renewed every three years since that time. Since 2018, we are certified IATF 16949:2016 and ISO 9001:2015 demonstrating our robust quality governance, effective QMS and quality compliance across the Company.

Operations resilience

Our ERM approach explicitly addresses resilience topics.  A dedicated “Corporate resilience competence center” drives a global network of resilience champions in our main sites and critical functions.  

We have deployed a structured Business Continuity Management System (BCMS) across our main sites and selected organizations. It provides a consistent and structured methodology to address potential business disruptions that may affect our sites and operations.  ST is ISO 22301 certified.

Protection of intellectual property and other sensitive information

We have processes and procedures in place to protect our intellectual property and other sensitive information. This includes a dedicated team of global patent attorneys and patent engineers who harvest and collect inventions generated through our R&D efforts, chair and manage patent committees to determine patent filing strategies, and oversee the filing and issuance of our approximately 18,000 patents and patent applications around the world. As part of this process, we offer incentive awards to our inventor community to help ensure their active and on-going

46

---

 

participation in protecting this innovation. The patent committees also regularly make decisions on which inventions are better maintained as our confidential or sensitive information. For any information which we deem as confidential or sensitive, we have processes and procedures which restrict any disclosure of such information to any third party without having in place appropriate measures such as a non-disclosure agreement. We further secure our intellectual property and sensitive information through the administration of our corporate IT security policies and procedures.

People health & safety

We listen to customers, investors, partners, employees and management’s feedback before identifying, prioritizing and managing our Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) risks. Based on feedback from all stakeholders, we maintain a regular materiality exercise on all related topics, and update our sustainability strategy accordingly. For each sustainability domain, we define precise ambitions and long-term goals, and deploy the relevant programs to manage the related risks.

We have a Company sustainability council that reviews the progress of these programs and related KPIs together with our stakeholders’ continuous feedback. EHS risks are reviewed annually through our Enterprise Risk Management and business continuity processes. All our plants run their own EHS specific risk analyses and follow-up both on Company and local programs.

Our aim is to prevent employee and environmental risks, including social, chemicals, fire, ergonomics, mechanical, handling, radiation, movements and work at height, nanomaterials, wastes, water or air emission. We take a precautionary approach when assessing new processes, chemicals and products, as set out in Principle 15 of the Rio Declaration.

We constantly review our policies and rules, deploy certified management systems such as OHSAS18001 and ISO140001, reinforce our culture, strengthen job hazard analysis and training plans, deploy industry standards such as RBA, and audit all of our sites. Our EHS performance and management systems are regularly evaluated and certified through internal and third-party audits. Moreover, to limit any risks related to our license to operate, we have a three-year program to conduct third-party EHS legal compliance audits. This program covers all our manufacturing sites, all our warehouses and all our sites with more than 150 employees.

We promote and recognize shared vigilance and drive continuous improvements in behaviors. Everywhere we practice early detection of hazards, unsafe acts and conditions. We systematically implement adequate actions to address weak points and avoid recurrence of near misses. We share all data transparently and adapt our prevention and practices to the highest standards.

Compliance with ethics / environmental rules, applicable laws & regulations

We believe that conducting our business with the highest standard of integrity is essential to our long term success, and that compliance and ethics is everyone’s job and responsibility.

Our Code of Conduct is all about our values and the principles contained therein, which are shared throughout the Company, are the top level reference for guiding our behavior, decision making and activities.

47

---

 

In 2020, we continued to push forward and refreshed our Compliance & Ethics awareness and communication campaign (branded “Building Trust Together”), focusing on the importance of integrity and ethical conduct. This initiative establishes clear expectations throughout the Company and invites all employees to speak up without fear of retaliation.

We use a variety of tools to engage with employees, managers and third parties, such as: face-to-face and town-hall meetings, e-learning modules, dedicated intranet webpage, articles, posters, targeted emails and short videos (available in 10 languages). We have also developed a dedicated mobile application, our “ST Integrity App”, which we use to provide our employees with quick and easy access to important and useful information, push notifications, fun quizzes, training materials, and a link to our misconduct reporting hotline and other useful contact information.

We have a zero-tolerance approach to bribery and corruption, regardless of the identity or position of the originator or recipient of any bribe. It is also strictly forbidden for anybody to use Company funds or assets to make a political contribution.

Our Code of Conduct and Anti-Bribery and Corruption policy, which are also available in the corporate governance section of our website at http://investors.st.com, provide clear definitions regarding instances of bribery and corruption, and include detailed descriptions of the Company’s rules for engaging with third-parties. They also explain how to report actual or suspected violations and outline the potential disciplinary actions and legal consequences of any non-compliance.

We encourage everyone, including external business partners, to express, in good faith, any concerns they might have regarding possible violations of our Code of Conduct, the Company’s policies, or the law. Managers are accountable for maintaining a working atmosphere where employees are comfortable about speaking up and expressing their concerns freely.

Our misconduct reporting process is communicated to all employees through, inter alia, our Code of Conduct, dedicated intranet web page and our ST Integrity App. In addition to Company reporting channels, we have an independent multilingual misconduct reporting hotline.

The Company applies a high standard of confidentiality when handling reports of misconduct (received either through management or through the hotline) to ensure that no employee who reports a concern in good faith suffers retaliation in the form of harassment, adverse employment or career consequences.

Protection against cyber threats

Information security risk management is aligned to the overarching enterprise risk management (ERM) process, ensuring Executive Committee governance and Audit Committee oversight.

We have an information security organization (“InfoSec”) which has defined a dedicated comprehensive framework and covers the following:

 

48

---

 

3.3.1.5.        Risks having had a significant impact during 2020

 

In 2020, our activities were impacted by some risks.  This included in particular:

Overall, those risks were offset and did not have a material impact on the Company’s financial results.

3.3.2. Internal Control

Our Managing Board is responsible for ensuring that we comply with all applicable legislation and regulations. As such, under the guidance of our CFO, we have established and implemented internal financial risk management and control systems. These controls and procedures are based on identified risk factors that could potentially influence our operations and financial objectives and contain a system of monitoring, reporting and operational reviews.

We regularly evaluate the effectiveness of our internal controls and procedures and correspondingly advise our Audit Committee on the results of such evaluations, any changes to such internal controls and procedures, as well as any significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting, which are reasonably likely to affect our ability to record, process or summarize and report financial information to our auditors and to our Audit Committee. Likewise, any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management, or other employees who have a significant role in our internal control over financial reporting, are disclosed to our external auditors and to our Audit Committee and approved by our Supervisory Board.

We have established policies and procedures which set forth principles, business rules of behavior and conduct which are considered to be consistent with proper business management, in line with our mission and strategic objectives.

We have adopted policies and procedures to describe the operational flow of actions to perform a task or activity, or to implement a policy within a given functional field. We have over two hundred standard operating procedures which cover a wide range of activities such as approvals, authorizations, verifications, reconciliations, review of operating performance, security of assets and segregation of duties, which are deployed throughout the Company.

Our Corporate Audit organization is strictly independent of corporate and local management. Its primary objective is to enhance and protect organizational value by providing risk-based and objective assurance, advice, and insights.

The internal audit plan is developed by our Corporate Audit organization and applies a risk-based approach. It is reviewed annually by our Audit Committee and approved by our Supervisory Board. Each year, the internal audit plan includes audit assignments covering a variety of organizational units, processes and risks.

Our Corporate Audit organization performs its activities in accordance with the International Standards for the Professional Practice of Internal Auditing, published by the Institute of Internal Auditors.

Based on the outcome of the aforementioned measures, the Managing Board states that to the best of its knowledge: (i) the internal risk management and control systems in place provide a reasonable assurance that STMicroelectronics’ financial reporting does not include any errors of material importance as of and for the 2020 financial year; (ii) in relation to STMicroelectronics’ financial reporting these systems operated effectively during 2020; (iii) it is justified that the financial reporting is prepared on a going concern basis; and (iv) the report states those material risks and uncertainties that are relevant to the expectation of the Company’s continuity for the period of twelve months after the preparation of the report.

Our internal risk management and control systems, including the structure and operation thereof, were discussed and evaluated on several occasions with our Audit Committee, and also discussed by our Supervisory Board, during 2020 (in accordance with best practice provision 1.4.1 of the 2016 Dutch Corporate Governance Code).

49

---

 

4.    Report of the Supervisory Board

The supervision of the policies and actions of our Managing Board is entrusted to our Supervisory Board, which, in a two-tier corporate structure under Dutch law, is a separate body and fully independent from our Managing Board. In fulfilling their duties under Dutch law, our Supervisory Board members serve the best interests of ST and its business, taking into consideration the interests of all ST shareholders and other stakeholders.

Our Supervisory Board supervises and advises our Managing Board in performing its management tasks and setting the direction of our affairs and business. Among other matters our Supervisory Board supervises the structure and management of systems of internal business controls, risk management, strategy and the financial reporting process. In addition, it determines the remuneration of the sole member of the Managing Board within the remuneration policy adopted by the General Meeting of Shareholders.

The members of our Supervisory Board are carefully selected based on their combined experience, expertise, knowledge, as well as the business in which we operate. Our Supervisory Board is empowered to recommend to the General Meeting of Shareholders people to be appointed as members of our Supervisory Board and our Managing Board.

In performing its duties, our Supervisory Board is advised and assisted by the following committees: the Strategic Committee, the Audit Committee, the Compensation Committee and the Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee. The committees all report to our Supervisory Board. Only members of the Supervisory Board can be committee members.

Our Supervisory Board has determined, based on the evaluation of an ad-hoc committee, the following independence criteria for its members: Supervisory Board members must not have any material relationship with STMicroelectronics N.V., or any of its consolidated subsidiaries, or its management. A “material relationship” can include commercial, industrial, banking, consulting, legal, accounting, charitable and familial relationships, among others, but does not include a relationship with direct or indirect shareholders. As a result, we have deviated from the independence criteria as included in best practice provision 2.1.8 of the 2016 Dutch Corporate Governance Code, specifically item vii. of such best practice provision, which states that a supervisory board member is not independent if he/she (or his/her registered partner or other life companion, foster child or relative by blood or marriage up to the second degree as defined under Dutch law) is a member of the management board — or is a representative in some other way — of a legal entity which holds at least 10% of our shares, unless such entity is a member of our Group. We do however comply with corporate governance listing standards of the NYSE.

Our Supervisory Board also adopted specific bars to independence. On that basis, our Supervisory Board concluded that all members qualify as independent based on the criteria set forth above.

The Supervisory Board is pleased to report on its Committees and its various activities in 2020.

4.1. Composition of the Supervisory Board

Our Supervisory Board advises our Managing Board and is responsible for supervising the policies pursued by our Managing Board, the manner in which the Managing Board implements the long-term value creation strategy and the general course of our affairs and business. Our Supervisory Board consists of such number of members as is resolved by our AGM upon a non-binding proposal of our Supervisory Board, with a minimum of six members. Decisions by our AGM concerning the number and the identity of our Supervisory Board members are taken by a simple majority of the votes cast at a meeting, provided quorum conditions are met.

50

---

 

Our Supervisory Board was composed of the following nine members as of December 31, 2020:

 

 

Resolutions of our Supervisory Board require the approval of at least three-quarters of its members in office, with each member being entitled to one vote. Our Supervisory Board must meet upon request by two or more of its members or by our Managing Board. Our Supervisory Board meets at least five times a year, including once per quarter to approve our quarterly, semi-annual and annual accounts and their release. In 2020, the average attendance rate for the meetings of our Supervisory Board was 97%. Our Supervisory Board has adopted a Supervisory Board Charter, which is available on our website (www.st.com).

Our Supervisory Board may make a proposal to our AGM for the suspension or dismissal of one or more of its members. Each member of our Supervisory Board must resign no later than three years after appointment, as described in our Articles of Association, but may be reappointed following the expiration of his/her term of office. Pursuant to Dutch law, there is no mandatory retirement age for members of our Supervisory Board. Members of the Supervisory Board may be suspended or dismissed by our AGM. Certain of our Supervisory Board members are proposed by and may retain certain relationships with our direct or indirect shareholders represented through our major shareholder.

Biographies

Maurizio Tamagnini has been a member since June 2014 and has been the Chairman of our Supervisory Board since June 2020.  He was the Supervisory Board's Chairman from June 2014 to June 2017 and Vice Chairman from June 2017 to June 2020. He also serves on our Supervisory Board’s Nomination and Corporate Governance Committee and chairs its Compensation Committee and Strategic Committee. Mr. Tamagnini is currently chief executive officer of FSI Sgr Spa, an asset management company participated, with a significant stake (39%), among others, by Cassa depositi e prestiti Spa (CDP), which is 82.7% controlled by the Italian Government. FSI Sgr Spa manages “FSI I”, a private equity closed-end fund with approximately €1.4 billion capital endowment, specialized on growth equity investments in Italian midmarket companies with development potential.  He was, until April 2019, non-executive chairman of FSI Investimenti Spa, which is controlled 77% by CDP.  Until March 2016, Mr. Tamagnini was chief executive officer and chairman of the Investment Committee of Fondo Strategico Italiano Spa (now CDP Equity Spa), an investment company controlled by CDP.  Until April 2016, he was chairman of the joint venture between Fondo Strategico Italiano Spa and Qatar Holding (IQ Made in Italy Investment Company Spa) with capital endowment of up to €2 billion in total for investments in the food, brands, furniture & design and tourism sectors.  He was previously Southern European Manager of the Corporate & Investments Banking division of Bank of America Merrill Lynch and a member of the Executive Committee of Bank of America Merrill Lynch for the EMEA region.  Mr. Tamagnini has gained over 25 years of experience in the financial sector specializing in the areas of Corporate Finance, Private Equity, Debt and Equity.  Mr. Tamagnini is also a member of the International Advisory Board of BIDMC Harvard Medical School.  He holds a degree in International Monetary Economics from Bocconi University in Milan and has also studied at the Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute — Troy in New York, USA.

Nicolas Dufourcq has been a member of our Supervisory Board since May 2015, its Chairman from June 2017 to June 2020 and its Vice-Chairman since June 2020.  He serves on our Supervisory Board’s Nomination and Corporate Governance Committee, Compensation Committee and Strategic Committee.  Mr. Dufourcq is a graduate of HEC

51

---

 

(Hautes Etudes Commerciales) and ENA (Ecole Nationale d’Administration).  He began his career at the French Ministry of Finance and Economics before joining the Ministry of Health and Social affairs in 1992.  In 1994, he joined France Telecom, where he created the Multimedia division, before going on to chair Wanadoo, the firm’s listed Internet and Yellow Pages subsidiary.  After joining the Capgemini Group in 2003, he was made responsible for the Central and Southern Europe region, successfully leading their financial turnaround.  He was appointed Chief Financial Officer of the Group and member of the Executive Committee in September 2004.  In 2005, he was named deputy Chief Executive Officer in charge of finance, risk management, IT, delivery, purchases and LEAN program and, in 2007, also in charge of the follow-up of the group’s major contracts.  On February 7, 2013, Mr. Dufourcq was appointed Chief Executive Officer of Bpifrance (Banque Publique d’Investissement), which is indirectly controlled by the French Government and is one of the shareholders of ST Holding.  Until January 2021, he was the permanent representative of Bpifrance Participations as a member of the board of directors of Orange. Mr. Dufourcq is also a member of the strategic advisory board of Euler Hermes, a member of the board of directors of Doctolib (since April 2020) and Stellantis (since January 2021).

Janet Davidson has been a member of our Supervisory Board since June 2013.  She serves on our Supervisory Board’s Audit Committee and Strategic Committee.  She began her career in 1979 as a member of the Technical Staff of Bell Laboratories, Lucent Technologies (as of 2006 Alcatel Lucent), and served from 1979 through 2011 in several key positions, most recently as Chief Strategy Officer (2005 – 2006), Chief Compliance Officer (2006 – 2008) and EVP Quality & Customer Care (2008 – 2011).  From 2005 through 2012, Ms. Davidson was a member of the Lehigh University Board of Trustees.  In 2007 she served on the Riverside Symphonia Board of Trustees and in 2005 and 2006, Ms. Davidson was a member of the Liberty Science Center Board of Trustees.  Ms. Davidson was a member of the board of the Alcatel Lucent Foundation from 2011 until 2014 and a member of the board of directors of Millicom from April 2016 until June 2020. Ms. Davidson is also a member of the board of the AES Corporation, since February 2019.  Ms. Davidson is a graduate of the Georgia Institute of Technology (Georgia Tech), Atlanta, GA, USA, and Lehigh University, Bethlehem, PA, USA and holds a Master’s degree in Electrical Engineering.

Ana de Pro Gonzalo has been a member of our Supervisory Board since June 2020. She chairs our Supervisory Board’s Audit Committee. Since June 2019, Ms. de Pro Gonzalo is an independent member of the Global Steering Group for Impact Assessment (Consejo Asesor Nacional Español); since October 2019, she has been an independent non-executive director for National Express Group PLC and a member of its safety and security committee, audit committee and nominations committee; and since December 2020, she has also been an independent non-executive director for Indra Sistemas S.A. and member of its audit committee. She was until December 2020 chief financial officer of Amadeus IT Holding (a world leading technology provider and transaction processor for the global travel and tourism industry), with global responsibility for financial management and control for the Amadeus group. She was appointed in this role in February 2010 and was also a member of the Amadeus executive management team. From 2002 to 2010, Ms. de Pro Gonzalo was corporate general manager at Sacyr Vallehermoso and was instrumental in leading the international expansion of one of the major construction groups in the world. From 1994 to 2002, Ms. de Pro Gonzalo was deputy general manager and finance director at Metrovacesa, and from 1990 to 1994 she was a senior auditor at Arthur Andersen. Ms. de Pro Gonzalo holds a BSc in Business Studies, specializing in Auditing, from Universidad Complutense de Madrid, and completed IESE Business School’s general management executive program.

Yann Delabrière has been a member of our Supervisory Board since June 2020. He serves on our Supervisory Board’s Audit Committee. Mr. Delabrière began his career with the French Court of Auditors before working in the French Foreign Trade Ministry from 1981 to 1983. He served as chief financial officer for COFACE, from 1983 to 1987, and for Printemps (a retail group, now Kering) as group CFO from 1987 to 1990. In 1990, he joined PSA Peugeot Citroën as chief finance officer and, in 1998, he joined the newly created executive committee of the group and, in parallel of his position as CFO, became chairman and chief executive officer of PSA’s consumer finance unit, Banque PSA Finance. From February 2007 until July 2016, Mr Delabrière was the chief executive officer of Faurecia, and the chairman of its board of directors until May 2017. He was appointed in April 2017 advisor to the board and then in June 2017 chief executive officer of Zodiac Aerospace and oversaw the sale to Safran group in February 2018. Since July 2020, Mr. Delabrière has been the chairman of the board of Idemia, a global leader in augmented reality, where he previously served as president and CEO (between October 2018 and July 2020). He has been appointed as non-executive member of the board of directors of Leddar Tech in February 2021 and has been the lead independent

52

---

 

director of Alstom since March 2017. Mr. Delabrière also served as non-executive director and chairman of the audit committee of Cap Gemini from 2004 to May 2018, and as non-executive director of Société Générale from 2012 to 2016. Mr. Delabrière holds a PhD in Mathematics having graduated from the École Normale Supérieure and the École Nationale d’Administration. He is also a Chevalier de la Légion d’Honneur (Knight of the Legion of Honor) and Officier de l’Ordre National du Mérite (Officer of the National Order of Merit).

Heleen Kersten has been a member of our Supervisory Board since June 2014.  She serves on our Supervisory Board’s Audit Committee and Compensation Committee and chairs its Nomination and Corporate Governance Committee.  Ms. Kersten is a partner at Stibbe in Amsterdam, where she held the position of managing partner from 2008 to 2013.  Stibbe is a Benelux law firm with offices in Amsterdam, Brussels, Luxembourg, London, New York and Dubai.  She began her career in 1989 with Stibbe before joining Davis Polk in New York and London (1992-1993).  After her return to Stibbe Amsterdam, she rose through the ranks to become a partner in 1997.  As a member of the Bar of Amsterdam since 1989, Ms. Kersten specializes in mergers and acquisitions, equity capital markets, corporate law and corporate governance.  Ms. Kersten was a supervisory board member of the Dutch listed Bank Van Lanschot N.V. until May 2015 and the chairman of the supervisory board of Egeria Investment B.V. until April 2016.  She is currently chairman of the board of the Dutch Red Cross (Vereniging Het Nederlandse Rode Kruis), since January 2020, and a supervisory board member of the Rijksmuseum (Stichting Het Rijksmuseum), since 2015.  She is also a board member of the Foundation Concertgebouworkest since 2010.  Ms. Kersten holds master’s degrees in Dutch law and tax law, both from Leiden University in the Netherlands.

Lucia Morselli has been a member of our Supervisory Board since May 2019.  She serves on our Supervisory Board’s Audit Committee and Compensation Committee.  Ms. Morselli is a member of the board of directors and President of the Related Party Committee and member of the Audit Committee of Telecom Italia. She is a member of the board of directors of EssilorLuxottica (Paris), of Sisal S.p.A., and member of the advisory board of Veneranda Fabbrica del Duomo di Milano.  She is also in charge of the degree course in Economics of the Link Campus University (Rome).  Ms. Morselli graduated with the highest grades in Mathematics at the University of Pisa.  She completed a PhD in Mathematical Physics at the University of Rome and she holds two master degrees, the first one in Business Administration at the University of Turin and the second one in European Public Administration at the University of Milan.  She started her career at Olivetti as an assistant to the CFO; from 1985 to 1990 she was senior manager Strategic and Manufacturing Service with Accenture; from 1990 to 1995 she was CFO of the Aircraft Division at Finmeccanica S.p.A. Subsequently she was CEO of Telepiù Group (1995-1998), of News Corporate Europe and Stream (Sky) S.p.A. (1998-2003), of Tecnosistemi S.p.A. (2004), of Mikado S.p.A. and Compagnia Finanziaria S.p.A. (2009), of Bioera S.p.A. (2010-2011), of Berco Group (2013-2014), of Acciai Speciali Terni (2014-2016) and of Acciaitalia spa (2016). She also served as chairman of the board and CEO of Magiste International SA (2006), and of Scorpio Shipping Group Ltd (2011-2013).  She was a member of the board of directors of NDS (2004-2005) and IPI S.p.A. (2007-2008).  In 2003 she funded the consulting firm Franco Tatò & Partner.  Since 2009 she has been a member of the advisory board (restructuring fund) of DGPA & TATO’ Investment Fund.  In October 2019 Ms. Morselli was appointed chairman of the board of directors and CEO of ArcelorMittal Italia.

Alessandro Rivera has been a member of our Supervisory Board since May 2011. Mr. Rivera serves on our Supervisory Board’s Strategic Committee and Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee. He was appointed as the Director General of the Treasury in August 2018. He is the representative for Finance Deputies meetings of the G7, G20, and the IMF, and a member of the Economic and Financial Committee and the Euro Working Group of the European Union, and of the Board of Directors of the European Stability Mechanism. He chairs the EFC Sub-Committee on IMF related issues. Prior to his appointment as Director General of the Treasury, Mr. Rivera was the Head of Directorate IV “Financial Sector Policy and Regulation Legal Affairs” at the Department of the Treasury, Ministry of Economy and Finance from 2008 to 2018. He served as Head of Unit in the Department of the Treasury from 2000 to 2008 and was responsible for a variety of policy matters: financial services and markets, banking foundations, accounting, finance, corporate governance and auditing. Since 2013, he has been a member of the Board of Directors of Cassa Depositi e Prestiti. He was the Chairman of the Board of Directors of AMCO S.p.A. (formerly SGA S.p.A.) (2017-2020). He was a member of the Boards of Directors and Compensation Committees of: Poste Italiane S.p.A. (2011-2014); Italia Lavoro S.p.A. (2005-2008); Mediocredito del Friuli-Venezia Giulia S.p.A (2001-2003).

53

---

 

Frédéric Sanchez has been a member of our Supervisory Board since June 2017.  He serves on our Supervisory Board’s Compensation Committee, Strategic Committee and Nomination and Corporate Governance Committee. Mr. Sanchez is the chairman of the executive board of Fives, an industrial engineering group with heritage of over 200 years of engineering excellence and expertise.  Fives designs and supplies machines, process equipment and production lines for the world’s largest industrial groups in various sectors such as aluminum, steel, glass, automotive, logistics, aerospace, cement and energy, in both developing and developed countries.  Mr. Sanchez started his career in 1985 with Renault in Mexico, then in the USA.  In 1987 he became a mission manager at Ernst & Young.  In 1990 he joined Fives-Lille group, in which he held various positions before being appointed chief financial officer in 1994 and becoming chief operating officer in 1997.  In 2002, the “Compagnie de Fives-Lille” (renamed Fives in 2007) became a company with a management board and supervisory board chaired by Mr. Sanchez.  In 2018, Fives became a French simplified joint stock company (société par actions simplifiéee) and Mr. Sanchez its chairman and CEO.  Within MEDEF (French Business Confederation), Mr. Sanchez is President of MEDEF International, President of the Council of Entrepreneurs France-Saudi Arabia, France-United Arab Emirates and France-Barhein.  Mr. Sanchez is an administrator of Primagaz, Orange, Thea and Bureau Veritas and he is honorary co-president of the Alliance Industrie du Futur.  Mr. Sanchez graduated from HEC Business School (1983) and Sciences-Po Paris (1985) and he also holds a Master Degree in Economics from Université Paris-Dauphine (1984).

4.2. Meetings and activities of the Supervisory Board

Activities of the Supervisory Board

Our Supervisory Board held twelve meetings in 2020, of which all were held in the presence of the sole member of the Managing Board and other select members of our Senior Management, with the exception of the evaluation of the functioning of our Managing Board, Supervisory Board, its Committees and its individual members as described below.

The items discussed in those meetings included recurring subjects such as our annual budget, financial performance, Annual Report on Form 20-F as well as its statutory annual accounts, objectives and results, strategy and long term value creation, operations review, reports of the various Committees of our Supervisory Board, the convocation of our AGM, the risks of our business and the assessment by our Managing Board of the structure of our internal risk management and control systems, as well as any significant changes thereto, corporate governance requirements and developments and the compensation of the sole member of our Managing Board. Certain Supervisory Board meetings also included presentations by senior executive management.

Outside the Supervisory Board meetings, the Chairman and other members of our Supervisory Board had regular contact with the sole member of the Managing Board, and other members of our Senior Management.

In accordance with the best practice provisions 2.2.6 and 2.2.7 of the 2016 Dutch Corporate Governance Code, on an annual basis our Supervisory Board undertakes to perform an evaluation of the functioning of the Managing Board and the Supervisory Board (which also includes an evaluation of the functioning of the Supervisory Board’s committees and its members).  Once every three years, this evaluation is conducted by an independent external expert, whose mission is to assist the Supervisory Board in this evaluation through, inter alia, conducting interviews with individual members of the Supervisory Board and Managing Board and facilitating discussions within the Supervisory Board on the functioning of the board’s, its committees and its members, including an evaluation of the involvement of each member, the culture within the Supervisory Board and the relationship between the Supervisory Board and the Managing Board.  The evaluation for the year ended December 31, 2020 was conducted by an independent external expert from November 2020 – January 2021 and was completed on January 27, 2021. The independent external expert and the Supervisory Board concluded that both our Supervisory Board and our Managing Board are functioning adequately and acknowledged material improvements from the recommendations made during the prior independent evaluation completed in 2017 and noted opportunities for further improvements including but not limited to streamlining and simplifying meetings, diversity and succession planning, and strategic initiatives.

Membership and Attendance

As at December 31, 2020, the composition of the four standing committees of our Supervisory Board was as follows: (i) Ms. Ana de Pro Gonzalo is the Chair of the Audit Committee, and Ms. Janet Davidson, Mr. Yann Delabrière, Ms. Heleen Kersten and Ms. Lucia Morselli are members of the Audit Committee; (ii) Mr. Maurizio Tamagnini is the Chair

54

---

 

of the Compensation Committee, and Mr. Nicolas Dufourcq, Ms. Heleen Kersten, Ms. Lucia Morselli and Mr. Frédéric Sanchez are members of the Compensation Committee; (iii) Ms. Heleen Kersten is the Chair of the Nomination and Corporate Governance Committee, and Messrs. Nicolas Dufourcq, Alessandro Rivera, Frédéric Sanchez and Maurizio Tamagnini are members of the Nomination and Corporate Governance Committee; and (iv) Mr. Maurizio Tamagnini is the Chair of the Strategic Committee, and Ms. Janet Davidson , and Messrs. Nicolas Dufourcq, Alessandro Rivera and Frédéric Sanchez are members of the Strategic Committee.

Detailed information on attendance at full Supervisory Board and Supervisory Board Committee meetings during 2020 is as follows:

 

 

55

---

 

4.3. Audit Committee

Our Audit Committee assists the Supervisory Board in fulfilling its oversight responsibilities relating to corporate accounting, reporting practices, and the quality and integrity of our financial reports as well as our auditing practices, legal and regulatory related risks, execution of our auditors’ recommendations regarding corporate auditing rules and the independence of our external auditors.

Our Audit Committee met ten times during 2020. At many of the Audit Committee’s meetings, the committee received presentations on current financial and accounting issues and had the opportunity to discuss with our Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Chief Accountant, Chief Audit and Risk Executive, Legal Counsel, Chief Compliance Officer and external auditors. Our Audit Committee also proceeded with its annual review of our internal audit function. Our Audit Committee reviewed our annual Consolidated Financial Statements in U.S. GAAP for the year ended December 31, 2020, and the results press release was published on January 28, 2021. Furthermore, our Audit Committee also reviewed our annual Consolidated Financial Statements in IFRS, as adopted by the European Union, for the year ended December 31, 2020.

Our Audit Committee approved the compensation of our external auditors for 2020 and discussed the scope of their audit, audit related and non-audit related services for 2020.

Our Audit Committee regularly reviewed management’s conclusions as to the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting and supervised the implementation of our corporate ERM process.

As part of each of its quarterly meetings, our Audit Committee also reviewed our financial results as presented by Management/ and whistleblowing reports, including independent investigative reports provided in relation thereto.

4.4. Compensation Committee

Our Compensation Committee advises our Supervisory Board in relation to the compensation of our President and Chief Executive Officer and sole member of our Managing Board, including the variable portion of such compensation based on performance criteria recommended by our Compensation Committee. Our Compensation Committee also reviews the stock-based compensation plans for our senior managers and key employees. Our Compensation Committee met twice in 2020 as well as twice in January 2021 to discuss amendments to the remuneration structure.

Among its main activities, in 2020 our Compensation Committee:  (i) reviewed the objectives met as compared to the performance criteria relating to the bonus of our President and Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Jean-Marc Chery, for the fiscal year ended on December 31, 2019; (ii) defined the performance targets relating to the bonus of our President and Chief Executive Officer for the fiscal year ending on December 31, 2020 (which targets are based on, inter alia, two external criteria including the evolution of our market share and the share price evolution versus PHLX Semiconductor Sector Index^SM (SOX^SM), and three internal criteria including total company revenue, operating income and net operating cash flow and a list of special programs (as further detailed in 4.8.3 below); (iii) reviewed, on behalf and with the approval of the entire Supervisory Board,  the objectives met as compared to the performance criteria relating to the management and key employee unvested stock award plan for the fiscal year ended on, December 31, 2019; and (iv) established, on behalf and with the approval of the entire Supervisory Board, the applicable performance criteria, which must be met by senior managers and selected key employees participating in the employee stock award plans to benefit from such awards. For the 2020 unvested stock awards plan, these performance criteria are based on sales evolution and operating income evolution, both as compared against a panel of ten semiconductor companies, and the return on net assets targets.

4.5. Strategic Committee

Our Strategic Committee advises the Supervisory Board on and monitor key developments within the semiconductor industry and our overall strategy, and is, in particular, involved in supervising the execution of corporate strategies and in reviewing long-term planning and budgeting. Our Strategic Committee met three times in 2020. In addition, there were strategic discussions, many of which occurred at extended Supervisory Board meetings and involved all Supervisory Board members.

56

---

 

4.6. Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee

Our Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee advises the Supervisory Board on the selection criteria and procedures relating to the appointment of members to our Supervisory Board and Managing Board, and the review of principles relating to corporate governance.  Our Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee met twice times during 2020 to discuss succession planning for our Supervisory Board and Managing Board, best practices regarding corporate governance, and the update of our corporate governance documents.

4.7. Secretariat and Controllers

Our Supervisory Board appoints a Secretary and Vice Secretary. Furthermore, the Managing Board makes an Executive Secretary available to our Supervisory Board, who is also appointed by the Supervisory Board. The Secretary, Vice Secretary and Executive Secretary constitute the Secretariat of the Supervisory Board. The mission of the Secretariat is primarily to organize meetings, to ensure the continuing education and training of our Supervisory Board members and to maintain record keeping. Our Chief Compliance Officer, Philippe Dereeper, serves as Executive Secretary for our Supervisory Board, and for each of the four standing committees of our Supervisory Board. Mr. Gabriele Pagnotta serves as Secretary and Ms. Charlotte Fadlallah serves as Vice Secretary. Mr. Pagnotta and Ms. Fadlallah serve as a Managing Director of ST Holding.

Our Supervisory Board also appoints two financial experts (“Controllers”). The mission of the Controllers is primarily to assist our Supervisory Board in evaluating our operational and financial performance, business plan, strategic initiatives and the implementation of Supervisory Board decisions, as well as to review the operational reports provided under the responsibility of the Managing Board. The Controllers generally meet once a month with the management of the Company and report to our full Supervisory Board. The current Controllers are Messrs. Samuel Dalens and Marco Zizzo. Mr. Samuel Dalens serves as a member of the supervisory board of ST Holding. The STH Shareholders Agreement between our principal indirect shareholders contains provisions with respect to the appointment of the Secretary, Vice Secretary and Controllers.

4.8. Remuneration report

On December 1, 2019, a Dutch act implementing the revised EU Shareholders’ Rights Directive (2017/828/EU (“SRDII”) took effect in The Netherlands.  As we are incorporated under the laws of The Netherlands and our common shares are admitted to trading on regulated markets in the European Union, we are required, inter alia, to update the remuneration policy with respect to the compensation of the Supervisory Board members and the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer and to comply with the respective disclosure requirements introduced to the Dutch Civil Code.  In connection therewith, we present in this section certain comparative information on our performance relative to the compensation of the Supervisory Board members and the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer.  In addition, we provide information on the ratio of fixed to variable compensation of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer.

Following the results of the 2020 AGM, where our proposed new remuneration policy for our Managing Board and remuneration report were rejected by the AGM and after review of the related comments received by proxy advisors, we conducted a thorough review of our current compensation structure with the support of an external consulting firm. We have also conducted a comprehensive qualitative and quantitative benchmark against our industry peers and best-in-class market practices – in particular, regarding the level of transparency and disclosure of compensation information as well as the inclusion of corporate social responsibility criteria into the senior management’s set of performance criteria. As a result, we have increased the level of disclosure and transparency in our 2020 annual reports in relation to the remuneration of the sole member of our Managing Board, President

57

---

 

and Chief Executive Officer and prepared a revised remuneration policy for the Managing Board which will be submitted to the AGM in 2021.

4.8.1. Supervisory board remuneration

Our Articles of Association provide that the compensation of our Supervisory Board members is determined by our General Meeting of Shareholders. Our proposal for adoption of a remuneration policy for the Supervisory Board members to ensure compliance with the new requirements under the Dutch Civil Code following the implementation of SRDII, was approved by the AGM on June 17, 2020.

The Supervisory Board Members are only awarded a fixed remuneration (including an attendance fee), promoting effective and independent supervision in the interest of the Company and the long-term success of the Company. The aggregate compensation for current and former members of our Supervisory Board with respect to service in 2020 was €891,500 before any applicable withholding taxes, as set forth in the following table:

 

 

 

Set forth in the following table is the annual change over the last five years of (i) the average remuneration of our Supervisory Board Members, (ii) the performance of the Company and (iii) the average remuneration of our global indirect employees (i.e., all employees other than those directly manufacturing our products), excluding the compensation of our Senior Management and Managing Board and President and Chief Executive Officer):

 

58

---

 

 

 

In connection with the above table and to provide insight in the correlation between the remuneration of each Supervisory Board member and the Company performance as well as the average remuneration of all global indirect employees (FTE basis) over the past five years, the table below sets forth the remuneration (including an attendance fee) of each Supervisory Board member for the past five years:

 

 

We do not have any service agreements with members of our Supervisory Board. We did not extend any loans or overdrafts to any of our Supervisory Board members. Furthermore, we have not guaranteed any debts or concluded any leases with any of our Supervisory Board members or their families. No share awards or stock options were granted to Supervisory Board Members.

For further details on the compensation of the members of our Supervisory Board we refer to Note 7.6.34 to our consolidated financial statements.

4.8.2. Senior Management remuneration

Our Senior Management, including the sole member of our Managing Board and our President and Chief Executive Officer, received a combination of fixed, short-term and long-term compensation, based on performance.

In relation with the COVID-19 pandemic and related economic disruptions, the sole member of our Managing Board and our President and Chief Executive Officer, voluntarily agreed to decrease his base salary by 25%, the Members of the Executive Committee voluntarily agreed to decrease their base salary by 15% and the Executive Vice Presidents voluntarily agreed to decrease their base salary by 10%, each for a period of six months in 2020. In addition, other senior managers of the Company voluntarily agreed to decrease their base salary by 5% for a period of six months in 2020.

The following table sets forth the total cash amount paid as compensation in 2020, 2019 and 2018 to the 22 members, of our Senior Management (including the sole member of our Managing Board, our President and Chief Executive Officer) on duty on December 31st of each year, before applicable withholding taxes and social contributions (amounts in millions):

 

59

---

 

 

 

The total remuneration of our Senior Management (including the Sole Member of our Managing Board and President and Chief Executive Officer) takes into consideration factors such as the size and complexity of our Company, our global presence and that of our customers, the pace of change in our industry, our strategy and goal of long-term value creation, and the need to recruit and retain key personnel. For a further detailed description on these factors and how they are applied, please refer to paragraph 4.8.3 below on the key principles that are considered to determine the remuneration of our Senior Management (including the Sole Member of our Managing Board and President and Chief Executive Officer).

For the year 2020, the Senior Management pay ratio is 27.5 (2019: 19.9).  The increase of the 2020 pay ratio compared to the 2019 pay ratio was primarily due to an increase in non-cash amounts paid as compensation, resulting from an increase in the share price of the USAs.  This ratio is based on:

(i) the average remuneration of our Senior Management, including the Sole Member of our Managing Board and President and Chief Executive Officer (for 2019: including the compensation of Philippe Brun);

compared to

(ii) the average remuneration of our global indirect employees (i.e., all employees other than those directly manufacturing our products), excluding the compensation of our Senior Management and Managing Board and President and Chief Executive Officer.

The annual cash bonus incentive, which we call Corporate Executive Incentive Program (“EIP”), entitles selected executives to a yearly bonus based upon the assessment of the achievement of individual, organizational and company objectives that are set on an annual basis and focused, inter alia, on return on net assets, customer service, profit, cash flow and market share.  The maximum bonus awarded under the EIP is based upon a percentage of the executive’s salary and the overall achievement of the above objectives on an annual basis.

The 2020 EIP includes a sustainability index for Senior Management, as part of our effort to include corporate social responsibility into the performance framework of our Senior Management. The sustainability index has a weighting of 1/3 of personal objectives and is divided into four criteria related to health and safety, environment, diversity & inclusion, and people engagement.

The amounts paid in 2020 to our Senior Management (including the sole member of our Managing Board, our President and Chief Executive Officer) pursuant to the EIP represented approximately 43.15% of the total compensation paid to our Senior Management.

 

 

 

60

---

 

Our Supervisory Board has approved the establishment of a complementary pension plan for certain members of our Senior Management, comprising the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, and certain other key executives as selected by the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, according to the general criteria of eligibility and service set up by the Supervisory Board upon the proposal of its Compensation Committee. With respect to such plan, we have set up an independent foundation under Swiss law which manages the plan and to which we make contributions. Pursuant to this plan, in 2020, we made a contribution of approximately $0.5 million to the plan of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, and $0.3 million to the plan for all other beneficiaries. The amount of pension plan payments made for other beneficiaries, such as former employees retired in 2020 and/or no longer salaried in 2020, was $1.1 million.

We did not extend any loans or overdrafts to the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, nor to any other member of our Senior Management. Furthermore, we have not guaranteed any debts or concluded any leases with the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, nor with any other member of our Senior Management or their families.

 

The members of our Senior Management, including the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, were covered in 2020 under certain group life and medical insurance programs provided by us. The aggregate additional amount set aside by us in 2020 to provide pension, retirement or similar benefits for our Senior Management, including the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, as a group is including the amounts allocated to the complementary pension plan described above and is estimated to have been approximately $5.5 million, which includes statutory employer contributions for state run retirement, similar benefit programs and other miscellaneous allowances.

For further details on the compensation of our Senior Management we also refer to Note 7.6.34 to our consolidated financial statements.

4.8.3. Managing Board remuneration

For details on the performance of ST in 2020, we refer to the Business overview in section 3.2.1.

The remuneration of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, is determined by our Supervisory Board on the advice of the Compensation Committee and within the scope of the remuneration policy as adopted by our 2005 AGM.

Following the results of our 2020 AGM, where our proposed new remuneration policy for our Managing Board and remuneration report to ensure compliance with the new requirements under the Dutch Civil Code following the implementation of the new Shareholder Rights Directive II (SRDII) were rejected (leaving the remuneration policy as adopted by our 2005 AGM intact), and after review of the related comments received by proxy advisors, we have conducted a thorough review of our current compensation structure, with the involvement of members of the Company and the Supervisory Board (directly and through an ad-hoc committee and the Compensation Committee), each with the support of their own independent external consulting firm.  We have also conducted a comprehensive qualitative and quantitative benchmark against our industry peers and best-in-class market practices – in particular, regarding the level of transparency and disclosure of compensation information of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer.

Following this process, we started preparing an amended proposal for a remuneration policy for the Managing Board, which we expect to submit to the AGM in 2021.  Furthermore, we have increased the level of disclosure and transparency in relation to the remuneration of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer herein to address the 2020 AGM results and provide our stakeholders with an increased level of insight in our remuneration practices.

The key principles that are considered to determine the remuneration of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer as well as the other members of Senior Management are as follows:

61

---

 

To determine the remuneration structure, the Supervisory Board considers, among others, the main principles outlined above.

In accordance with the main principles of the Company’s remuneration structure, the total remuneration of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer takes into consideration factors such as the size and complexity of our Company, our global presence and that of our customers, the pace of change in our industry, our strategy and goal of long-term value creation, and the need to recruit and retain key personnel.

The remuneration structure is reflective of the level of responsibility of the Company’s sole member of the Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer. The remuneration structure is further adapted to the Company’s context while remaining competitive and providing an incentive to promote the Company’s performance over the medium to long-term, in compliance with the corporate interest and the interests of all the stakeholders.

The Compensation Committee advises the Supervisory Board in reviewing the remuneration package of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer both in the context of the Company performance and against a range of semiconductor peer companies and relevant market index. Before setting targets for the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, the Compensation Committee carries out scenario analyses of the possible financial outcomes of meeting target levels. Finally, the Compensation Committee determines the remuneration structure and remuneration amounts for our sole member of the Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer based on the analysis of the theoretical maximum total direct remuneration (i.e., sum of base salary, maximum annual bonus opportunity, and maximum long-term incentives (“LTI”)).

The elements considered for the determination of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer’s remuneration package are as follows:

The sum of these three elements represents the maximum total direct remuneration for the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer.

The following provides a breakdown of the maximum total direct remuneration structure of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer:

 

62

---

 

The sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, received compensation in the form of a fixed salary, annual bonus, stock awards, employer social contributions, company car allowance, pension contributions and miscellaneous allowances.

Set forth in the following table is the maximum total direct remuneration structure of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer for 2020:

 

63

---

 

Set forth in the following table is the total compensation of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, paid in 2020, 2019 and 2018.  The total compensation of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, comprises (i) with relation to 2020 of the total compensation of Mr. Jean-Marc Chery and takes into consideration the voluntary decrease of the base salary during six months, (ii) with relation to 2019 (y) the total compensation of Mr. Jean-Marc Chery and (z) contractually obligated deferred compensation relating to Mr. Carlo Bozotti’s retirement in 2018; and (iii) with relation to 2018 (x) the total compensation of Mr. Bozotti until May 31, 2018 (excluding any accelerated compensation), (y) the total compensation of Mr. Chery from June 1, 2018 and (z) accelerated compensation relating to Mr. Bozotti’s retirement:

 

 

 

 

 

Set forth in the following table is the total compensation of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer in office during the years 2020, 2019 and 2018:

 

 

 

The sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, was appointed on May 31, 2018 for a three-year term expiring at the 2021 AGM. He has employment agreements with us, the first with our Dutch parent

64

---

 

company, which relates to his activities as sole member of our Managing Board and representative of the Dutch legal entity, and the second with one of our entities in Switzerland, which relates to his activities as President and Chief Executive Officer, the EIP, Pension and other items covered by the compensation policy adopted by our General Meeting of Shareholders. While the relationship between a member of the managing board and a listed Dutch company will be treated as a mandate agreement, not an employment agreement, existing employment agreements, including the employment agreement between us and our sole member of the Managing Board, will remain in effect.

 

 

The purpose of the base salary is to provide a fixed level of earnings and to attract and retain the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer. It is a key component of overall remuneration, particularly as the annual bonus is expressed as a percentage of base salary. The Company seeks to determine a fair and competitive fixed salary as compared to industry and index peers. The determination of salary is based on several factors including, but not limited to, market pay levels among international industry peers of comparable size.

The amount of base salary paid in 2020 is $856,837. This amount considers the temporary, voluntary decrease in base salary for a six-month period in relation with the COVID-19 pandemic.

 

The purpose of the annual bonus is to motivate the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer to achieve financial and commercial objectives consistent with and supportive of the Company’s strategy and to create a tangible link between annual performance and individual pay opportunity.

 

In accordance with the resolutions adopted at our AGM held on May 23, 2019, the annual bonus of the sole member of our Managing Board and President and Chief Executive Officer is composed of a portion payable in cash (up to a maximum of 150% of the base salary for the relevant year) and a portion payable in shares (up to a maximum of 60% of the base salary for the relevant year), all subject to the assessment and fulfillment of a number of pre-defined conditions which are set annually by the Compensation Committee of our Supervisory Board.

 

Performance measures and weightings were reviewed by the Compensation Committee. The calculation of the annual bonus opportunity is based on the sum of the target weight of each performance criterion.

 

The Supervisory Board, upon the recommendation of its Compensation Committee, set the conditions and performance criteria that must be met by Mr. Chery for the attribution of his 2020 bonus (to be paid in 2021).

 

Set forth in the following table are the performance criteria and weight set for 2020 that have been assessed for the attribution of the 2020 bonus (to be paid in 2021).

 

65

---

 

 

The maximum amount of annual bonus is 210% of the base salary, including up to a maximum of 150% which may be paid in cash and up to a maximum of 60% which may be paid in shares. The amount of the portion paid in shares is determined based on a number of strategic special programs (usually three to four), with the completion of each program adding to the overall achievement of the share-based annual bonus. Similarly, the amount of the portion in cash is based on five criteria (financial, operational, market-based criteria, revenue-based criteria and activity-based criteria) in order to conduct a holistic and comprehensive assessment of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer’s annual performance.

 

We believe that the five criteria set out for the cash component of the annual bonus plan are also well balanced in terms of external and internal criteria and reflect the challenging objectives set by the Compensation Committee in line with the Company’s ambitious long-term vision and business strategy.

 

The two external criteria include share price evolution and market share evolution. Share price evolution is measured on a year-over-year basis compared to the PHLX Semiconductor Sector Index^SM (SOX^SM) evolution, which provides a market-based metric which evaluates how the Company’s share price is evolving against a set group of industry peers. Market share evolution is measured by assessing the Company’s relative positioning and competitiveness in relation to its market and its industry peers and how fast the Company grows its revenues compared to its competitors.

 

The three internal criteria include total company revenue, operating income and net operating cash flow. Total company revenue represents the total amount of income generated by the Company’s operations. Operating income is an important yardstick of profit measurement and reflects the operating performance of the business which does not take into consideration non-operating gains or losses suffered by business, the impact of financial leverage and tax factors. Net operating cash flow is a liquidity metric that evaluates whether the Company has enough liquidity to meet its debt obligations. This metric helps assess the financial soundness of the company in terms of liquidity risk, financial risk, credit risk and business risk. We believe the three above criteria be a crucial in determining the financial strength of the company.

 

The Compensation Committee sets scorecard targets and weightings, which support the delivery of the strategy. However, annual bonus scorecard targets are not disclosed prospectively as they would require the disclosure of commercially sensitive information. The Compensation Committee retains the ability to adjust performance measure targets and weightings year-by-year within the overall target and maximum payouts approved in the remuneration policy.

 

The evaluation and assessment of the fulfillment of conditions and performance criteria were completed by the Compensation Committee of our Supervisory Board on March 24, 2021, in order to determine the actual amount of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer’s bonus to be paid in 2021.

 

The Compensation Committee of our Supervisory Board determined that based on the 2020 performance of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Jean-Marc Chery, the performance criteria relating to the portion of the bonus payable in cash have been assessed as follows: market price evolution (stretch), share price evolution (below threshold), revenue (target), operating income (target) and net financial position (stretch). Consequently, the portion of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief

66

---

 

Executive Officer’s 2020 bonus (to be paid in 2021) payable in cash is an amount of EUR 1,080,000 (gross), which is 135% of his base salary.

 

The Compensation Committee of our Supervisory Board determined that based on the 2020 performance of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Jean-Marc Chery, the following performance criteria relating to the portion of the bonus payable in shares have been assessed as follows: execute key projects (met), strategy implementation program (met), specific transformation program (met) and boost open innovation initiative (not met). Consequently, the portion of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer’s 2020 bonus (to be paid in 2021) payable in shares amounts to 16,000 shares, representing 48% of his base salary, representing a global achievement rate of 183% (out of the maximum of 210%).

 

The purpose of stock awards is to motivate the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer to deliver sustainable long-term shareholder value through long-term profitability and share price growth.

 

Award levels are determined annually by the Compensation Committee within the maximum approved by the AGM each year. In accordance with the resolution adopted by our General Meeting of Shareholders, the maximum annual grant allowed in relation to the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer’s stock award for 2017, 2018, 2019, and 2020 was 100,000 unvested stocks awards subject to performance criteria.

 

Performance metrics and targets are set by the Compensation Committee at the beginning of the relevant performance period. When setting performance targets, the Compensation Committee allocates weightings to each metric as it considers appropriate considering strategic priorities.

 

Set forth in the following table are the performance criteria, weight, and achievement rate for the periods indicated below set for the LTIP plan.

 

 

In accordance with the 2017-2020 Long Term Incentives Plan as approved by the 2017 AGM, the stock awards vest over a three year horizon from the date of the grant, with 32% vesting after one year, a further 32% after two years and the remaining 36%, provided that the eligible employee is still an employee at such time (subject to the acceleration provisions in the event of a change in control).

Our Supervisory Board, upon recommendation of the Compensation Committee, determines whether the performance criteria, as described below, have been met and concludes whether and to which extent all eligible employees, including the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, are entitled to any stock awards under the stock award plan. Scorecard targets will be disclosed prospectively, unless it would require the disclosure of commercially sensitive information. Scorecard targets will be disclosed only when they are no longer deemed to be commercially sensitive.

Set forth in the following table is an overview of the outstanding awards that have been granted to our sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer:

 

67

---

 

 

In cases of resignation or dismissal for cause, variable remuneration elements (including annual bonus and LTI) will generally lapse and the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer will not be eligible for compensation for loss of office.

Termination not in connection with a change-in-control

If our sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer is not employed by the Company at the time of vesting, the award will lapse, except in certain circumstances as determined by the Supervisory Board including death, disability, retirement and any other circumstance as decided by the Board. The portion of any award which vests will be determined solely by the Supervisory Board based on several factors including performance against targets.

In the case that employment is terminated by the Company without cause or termination but for a pre-defined good reason as detailed above, then the portion of any award which vests will be determined solely by the Supervisory Board based on several factors including performance against targets.

Termination in connection with a change-in-control

In the event of a change in control of the Company, any award will be rolled over into an award in the new entity, subject to performance, with the balance rolled over.

In the case that employment is terminated by the Company without cause, or termination by the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer for a pre-defined good reason detailed above in connection with a change in control, then outstanding awards will vest immediately without time proration.

During 2020, our sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Chery, did not have any stock options, and did not purchase any shares in the Company. During 2020, our sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Chery, sold 122,000 shares.

For further details on the compensation of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer we also refer to Note 7.6.34 to our consolidated financial statements.

For further information regarding stock options and other stock-based compensation granted to members of our Supervisory Board, the Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, and our Senior Management, please refer to “4.8.5. Stock Awards and Options” below.

68

---

 

Comparative information on the change of remuneration and company performance

Set forth in the following table is the annual change over the last five years of (i) the remuneration of the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, (ii) the performance of the Company and (iii) the average remuneration of our global indirect employees (i.e., all employees other than those directly manufacturing our products), excluding the compensation of our Senior Management, including the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer):

 

 

4.8.4. Share ownership

None of the members of our Supervisory Board, Managing Board or Senior Management holds shares or options to acquire shares representing more than 1% of our issued share capital.

4.8.5. Stock awards and options

Our stock-based compensation plans are designed to incentivize, attract and retain our executives and key employees by aligning compensation with our performance and the evolution of our share price. We have adopted stock based compensation plans comprising either stock options or unvested stock awards for our Senior Management as well as key employees. Furthermore, until 2012, the Compensation Committee (on behalf of the Supervisory Board and with its approval) granted stock-based awards (the options to acquire common shares in the share capital of the Company) to the members and professionals of the Supervisory Board.

Pursuant to the shareholders’ resolutions adopted by our general meetings of shareholders, our Supervisory Board, upon the proposal of the Managing Board and the recommendation of the Compensation Committee, took the following actions:

69

---

 

The exercise of stock options and the sale or purchase of shares of our stock by the members or professionals of our Supervisory Board, the sole member of our Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, and all our employees are subject to an internal policy which involves, inter alia, certain blackout periods.

5.    Corporate Governance

5.1. Commitment to the principles of good corporate governance

Our consistent commitment to good corporate governance principles is evidenced by:

As a Dutch company, we are subject to the 2016 Dutch Corporate Governance Code (“DCGC”). We are committed to informing our shareholders of any significant changes in our corporate governance policies and practices at our AGM. Along with our Supervisory Board Charter (which we last updated in October 2019 and which also includes the charters of our Supervisory Board Committees) and our Code of Conduct, the current version of our Corporate Governance Charter is posted on our website (www.st.com), and these documents are available in print to any shareholder who may request them.

As required by the DCGC, our Corporate Governance Charter includes information on the broad outline of our corporate governance structure and our compliance with the DCGC.

Our Supervisory Board is carefully selected based upon the combined experience and expertise of its members. In fulfilling their duties under Dutch law, Supervisory Board members serve the best interests of the Company and its business, taking into consideration the interests of all our shareholders and other stakeholders, and must act

70

---

 

independently in their supervision of our management. Our Supervisory Board has adopted criteria to assess the independence of its members in accordance with corporate governance listing standards of the NYSE.

Our Supervisory Board has on various occasions discussed Dutch corporate governance standards, the implementing rules and corporate governance standards of the SEC and of the NYSE, as well as other corporate governance standards. The Supervisory Board has determined, based on the evaluations by an ad hoc committee, the following independence criteria for its members: Supervisory Board members must not have any material relationship with STMicroelectronics N.V., or any of our consolidated subsidiaries, or our management. A “material relationship” can include commercial, industrial, banking, consulting, legal, accounting, charitable and familial relationships, among others, but does not include a relationship with direct or indirect shareholders.

We believe we are fully compliant with all material NYSE corporate governance standards, to the extent possible for a Dutch company listed on Euronext Paris, Borsa Italiana, as well as the NYSE.

Because we are a Dutch company, the Audit Committee is an advisory committee to the Supervisory Board, which reports to the Supervisory Board, and our General Meeting of Shareholders appoints our statutory auditors. Our Audit Committee has established a charter outlining its duties and responsibilities with respect to, among others, the monitoring of our accounting, auditing, financial reporting and the appointment, retention and oversight of our external auditors. In addition, our Audit Committee has established procedures for the receipt, retention and treatment of complaints regarding accounting, internal accounting controls or auditing matters, and the confidential anonymous submission by our employees regarding questionable accounting or auditing matters.

Pursuant to our Supervisory Board Charter, the Supervisory Board is responsible for handling and deciding on potential reported conflicts of interests between the Company and members of the Supervisory Board, as well as the Managing Board.

The sole member of our Managing Board may not serve on the board of a public company without the prior approval of our Supervisory Board. Pursuant to the Supervisory Board Charter, the sole member of our Managing Board must inform our Supervisory Board of any (potential) conflict of interest and pursuant to such charter and Dutch law, any Managing Board resolution regarding a transaction in relation to which the sole member of our Managing Board has a conflict of interest must be approved and adopted by our Supervisory Board. Should our entire Supervisory Board also have a conflict of interest, the resolution must be adopted by our shareholders’ meeting pursuant to Dutch law. We are not aware of any potential conflicts of interests between the private interest or other duties of our sole Managing Board member and our senior managers and their duties to us.

71

---

 

5.2. General Meeting of Shareholders

Our ordinary General Meetings of Shareholders are held at least annually, within six months after the close of each financial year, in Amsterdam, Haarlemmermeer (Schiphol Airport), Rotterdam or The Hague, The Netherlands. Extraordinary General Meetings of Shareholders may be held as often as our Supervisory Board deems necessary, and must be held upon the written request of registered shareholders or other persons entitled to attend General Meetings of Shareholders of at least 10% of the total issued share capital to our Managing Board or our Supervisory Board specifying in detail the business to be dealt with. Such written requests may not be submitted electronically. In the event that the Managing Board or the Supervisory Board does not convene the General Meeting of Shareholders within six weeks of such a request, the aforementioned shareholders or individuals may be authorized by a competent judicial authority.

Notice of General Meetings of Shareholders shall be given by our Managing Board or by our Supervisory Board or by those who according to the law or our Articles of Association are entitled thereto. The notice shall be given in such manner as shall be authorized or required by law (including but not limited to a written notice, a legible and reproducible message sent by electronic means and an announcement published by electronic means), as well as in accordance with the regulations of a stock exchange where our shares are officially listed at our request. In addition, shareholders and other persons entitled to attend our General Meetings of Shareholders that are registered in our share register shall be notified by letter that the meeting is being convened. The notice convening our General Meeting of Shareholders shall be given with due observance of the statutory notice period, which is currently 42 days prior to the meeting.

The notice of our General Meeting of Shareholders states the business to be transacted as well as other information prescribed by law and our Articles of Association. The agenda is fixed by the author of the notice of the meeting; however, one or more shareholders or other persons entitled to attend General Meetings of Shareholders representing at least one-tenth of our issued share capital may, provided that the request was made at least five days prior to the date of convocation of the meeting, request that proposals be included on the agenda. Notwithstanding the previous sentence, proposals of persons who are entitled to attend General Meetings of Shareholders will be included on the agenda, if such proposals are made in writing to our Managing Board within a period of sixty days before that meeting by persons who are entitled to attend our General Meetings of Shareholders who, solely or jointly, represent at least 1% of our issued share capital or a market value of at least €50 million. The requests referred to in the previous two sentences may not be submitted electronically. The aforementioned requests must comply with conditions stipulated by our Managing Board, subject to the approval of our Supervisory Board, which shall be posted on our website. Pursuant to Dutch law, a shareholder requesting discussion of an agenda item must disclose to us its entire beneficial interest (long and short position). We are required to disclose this interest on our website.

Dutch law prescribes a fixed registration date of 28 days prior to the date of the General Meeting of Shareholders, which means that shareholders and other persons entitled to attend our General Meetings of Shareholders are those persons who have such rights at such date and, as such, are registered in a register designated by our Managing Board, regardless of who is a shareholder or otherwise a person entitled to attend our General Meeting of Shareholders at the time of the meeting if a registration date would not be applicable.

Unless otherwise required by our Articles of Association or Dutch law, resolutions of our General Meetings of Shareholders require the approval of a majority of the votes cast at a meeting at which at least fifteen percent of the issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. If a quorum is not present, a further meeting can be convened which shall be entitled, irrespective of the share capital represented, to pass a resolution. We may not vote our shares held in treasury. Blank and invalid votes shall not be counted.

72

---

 

In general, the most important items of our General Meetings of Shareholders are:

Under Dutch law, our General Meeting of Shareholders has the authority to adopt our statutory annual accounts as prepared by our Managing Board. Our General Meeting of Shareholders does not have the authority to amend our statutory annual accounts as prepared by our Managing Board. Our General Meeting of Shareholders can:

If our General Meeting of Shareholders instructs our Managing Board to amend our statutory annual accounts, our Managing Board is required to make the necessary amendments, unless the instruction contravenes the provisions of reasonableness and fairness (redelijkheid en billijkheid). Furthermore, the instruction must not contravene with the applicable presentation rules for the statutory annual accounts, including requirements of consistency and balance continuity. If there are multiple options, our General Meeting of Shareholders is authorized to decide with due observance of said limits.

If there are doubts regarding the correctness of our statutory annual accounts, the annual report and the other information, a petition for revision of our statutory annual accounts can be filed with the Enterprise Chamber (Ondernemingskamer) of the Amsterdam Court of Appeal in The Netherlands by each interested party on the basis of non-compliance with the applicable presentation requirements for the statutory annual accounts, the annual report and/or the other information prescribed by the EU IFRS regime, Title 9 of Book 2 of the Dutch Civil Code and/or the Dutch Financial Markets Supervision Act (Wet op het financieel toezicht). The petition must state in which respect the documents require revision. The petition can also be filed by the Advocate General (advocaat-generaal) of the Amsterdam Court of Appeal on the basis of public interest as well as the Dutch Authority for the Financial Markets (Autoriteit Financiële Markten) with due observance of Section 4 of the Dutch Financial Markets Supervision Act.

73

---

 

5.3. Supervisory Board

Our Supervisory Board advises our Managing Board and is responsible for supervising the policies pursued by our Managing Board, the manner in which the Managing Board implements the long-term value creation strategy and the general course of our affairs and business. Our Supervisory Board consists of such number of members as is resolved by our General Meeting of Shareholders upon a non-binding proposal of our Supervisory Board, with a minimum of six members. Decisions by our shareholders concerning the number and the identity of our Supervisory Board members are taken by a simple majority of the votes cast at a meeting, provided quorum conditions are met.

Under Dutch law, certain statutory provisions limit the number of supervisory positions that members of our Supervisory Board may hold. A member of our Supervisory Board can only be appointed as such if he/she does not hold more than four supervisory positions at other so-called “large” Dutch entities. In this connection, the position of chairman equals two positions. The term supervisory position means the position of supervisory director or non-executive director. Supervisory positions at several entities belonging to the same group constitute one position, and supervisory positions at non-Dutch entities are not taken into account. Furthermore, an appointment by the Enterprise Chamber (Ondernemingskamer) of the Amsterdam Court of Appeal as part of corporate inquiry proceedings is not taken into account. For purposes of the foregoing, ”large” Dutch entities are Dutch limited liability companies, private companies with limited liability and foundations which meet at least two of the following three criteria (“‘Large Dutch Entities”): (i) the value of the assets according to the consolidated statement of financial position with explanatory notes exceeds €20 million; (ii) the net turnover for the financial year exceeds €40 million; or (iii) there are, on average, 250 or more employees during the financial year.

In the Netherlands, companies such as ours are expected to pursue a policy of having a balanced participation by men and women in supervisory boards. Where seats on a supervisory board are to be divided among individuals, balanced participation is deemed to exist if at least 30% of the seats are taken by men and at least 30% by women. We have balanced participation by men and women on our Supervisory Board and currently, our Supervisory Board comprises nine members of which 4 are female and 5 are male.

In accordance with the criteria as reflected in our Supervisory Board Charter and diversity policy, members of our Supervisory Board are selected on the basis of their specific business, financial, technical and/or legal expertise, prior professional experience, soundness of judgment, ability to make analytical enquiries and willingness to devote the time required to adequately perform their activities as Supervisory Board members. The object of our diversity policy is to have a diverse composition of our Supervisory Board in the areas that are relevant to us, such as nationality, experience, background, gender and age. Our Supervisory Board endorses the principle of a diversified Supervisory Board, including the aforementioned statutory gender balance rules, within the scope of the criteria as reflected in our Supervisory Board Charter and diversity policy. We will continue to ensure an appropriate balance as recommended by the aforementioned statutory gender balance rules. The Supervisory Board meets the other criteria as set forth in their Charter as well, resulting in a diversified composition of the Supervisory Board.

The responsibilities of our Supervisory Board include (but are not limited to):

74

---

 

Our Supervisory Board Charter, as posted on our website, contains detailed provisions on the reporting and handling of (potential) conflicts of interest.

For information on the identity of our Supervisory Board members, including its committees, as well as the compensation of the members of our Supervisory Board, see the report of our Supervisory Board. We believe that at least one member of our Supervisory Board can be regarded as a financial expert.

For information on the role and identity of the committees of our Supervisory Board, see the report of our Supervisory Board.

5.4. Managing Board

In accordance with Dutch law, our management is entrusted to the Managing Board under the supervision of our Supervisory Board. Mr. Jean-Marc Chery is currently the sole member of our Managing Board with the function of President and Chief Executive Officer. Under our Articles of Association, the sole member of our Managing Board is appointed for a three-year term, upon a non-binding proposal by our Supervisory Board, at our AGM (by a simple majority of the votes cast, provided quorum conditions are met), which term may be renewed one or more times.

In the Netherlands, companies such as ours are expected to pursue a policy of having a balanced participation by men and women in managing boards. Where seats on a managing board are to be divided among individuals, balanced participation is deemed to exist if at least 30% of the seats are taken by men and at least 30% by women. Since its creation in 1987, our Managing Board has always been comprised of a sole member.

Our shareholders may suspend or dismiss one or more members of our Managing Board, in accordance with the procedures laid down in our Articles of Association. Under Dutch law, our Managing Board is entrusted with our general management and the representation of our Company. Our Managing Board must seek prior approval from our shareholders for decisions regarding a significant change in the identity or nature of the Company. Under our Articles of Association and our Supervisory Board Charter, our Managing Board must also seek prior approval from our Supervisory Board for certain other decisions with regard to the Company and our direct or indirect subsidiaries.

75

---

 

The sole member of our Managing Board may not serve on the board of a public company without the prior approval of our Supervisory Board. Pursuant to our Supervisory Board Charter, the sole member of our Managing Board must inform our Supervisory Board of any (potential) conflict of interest and pursuant to such charter and Dutch law, any Managing Board resolution regarding a transaction in relation to which the sole member of our Managing Board has a conflict of interest must be approved and adopted by our Supervisory Board. Should our entire Supervisory Board also have a conflict of interest, the resolution must be adopted by our shareholders pursuant to Dutch law. We are not aware of any potential conflicts of interests between the private interest or other duties of our sole Managing Board member and our senior managers and their duties to us.

Pursuant to our Articles of Association and the Supervisory Board Charter, the following decisions by our Managing Board with regard to the Company and any of our direct or indirect subsidiaries (an “ST Group Company”) require prior approval from our Supervisory Board: (i) any modification of our or any ST Group Company’s Articles of Association or other constitutional documents, other than those of wholly owned subsidiaries; (ii) other than for wholly owned subsidiaries, any change in our or any ST Group Company’s authorized share capital or any issue, acquisition or disposal by us — with the exception of shares in our share capital acquired in order to transfer these shares under employee stock option or stock purchase plans — or any ST Group Company of own shares or change in share rights and any issue of instruments resulting in a share in the capital of any ST Group Company or its profits (iii) the liquidation or dissolution of the Company or any ST Group Company or the disposal of all or a substantial and material part of our business or assets, or those of any ST Group Company, or of any shares in any ST Group Company; (iv) any merger, acquisition or joint venture agreement (and, if substantial and material, any agreement relating to IP) to which we or any ST Group Company is, or is proposed to be, a party, as well as the formation of new companies by us or any ST Group Company (with the understanding that only acquisitions above $25 million per transaction are subject to prior Supervisory Board approval); (v) our draft Consolidated Statement of Financial Position and Consolidated Financial Statements, as well as our and any ST Group Company’s profit distribution policies; (vi) entering into any agreement that may qualify as a related party transaction, including any agreement between us or any ST Group Company and any of our major shareholders; (vii) the appointment of members of the Executive Committee; (viii) the key parameters of our pluri-annual plans and our consolidated annual budgets, as well as any significant modifications to said plans and budgets, or any one of the matters set forth in our Articles of Association and not included in the approved plans or budgets; (ix) operations which have to be submitted for Supervisory Board prior approval even if their financing was already provided for in the approved annual budget; (x) our quarterly, semi-annual and annual Consolidated Financial Statements prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP and, as required, according to IFRS; (xi) the exercise of any shareholder right in a ST joint venture company, which is a company (a) with respect to which we hold directly or indirectly either a minority equity position in excess of 25% or a majority position without the voting power to adopt extraordinary resolutions, or (b) in which we directly or indirectly participate and such participation has a value of at least one-third of our total assets according to the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position and notes thereto in our most recently adopted (statutory) annual accounts, with the understanding, for the avoidance of doubt, that decisions of the Managing Board regarding the general management and/or operations of such ST joint venture company are not subject to Supervisory Board approval and that the Managing Board reports to the Supervisory Board on the operations of the ST joint venture companies as part of its regular reporting to the Supervisory Board and in principle at least every six months; (xii) the strategy of our company; (xiii) the annual internal audit plan and the appointment, replacement, reassignment and dismissal of our Chief Audit and Risk Executive; (xiv) all proposals to be submitted to a vote at the AGM; (xv) the formation of all companies, acquisition or sale of any participation and conclusion of any cooperation and participation agreement; (xvi) all our pluri-annual plans and the budget for the coming year (covering investment policy, policy regarding research and development, and commercial policy and objectives, general financial policy and policy regarding personnel); and (xvii) all acts, decisions or operations covered by the foregoing and constituting a significant change with respect to decisions already approved by the Supervisory Board or not provided for in the above list and as specifically laid down by a Supervisory Board resolution to that effect.

76

---

 

Senior Management

On January 11, 2021, we announced the appointment of Rajita D’Souza as President, Human Resources and Corporate Social Responsibility (CHRO) and member of the Executive Committee.

General management of our business

The sole member of our Managing Board, our President and Chief Executive Officer, is entrusted with our general management and is supported in his tasks by our Executive Committee and Executive Vice Presidents, who together constitute our Senior Management.

As a company committed to good governance, we hold corporate meetings on a regular basis. Such meetings, which involve the participation of several members of our Senior Management include:

Executive Committee, which meets once every month and oversees the general strategy and is responsible for the risk management of the Company.

Corporate Operations Review, which meets twice per quarter to review monthly results, short-term forecasts and monthly business results.

Corporate Staff Meeting, which meets once per quarter to review the business in its entirety and to plan and forecast for the next quarter and beyond.

Executive Committee

The Executive Committee was established on May 31, 2018 to improve the corporate governance of the Company consistent with evolving Dutch practice. The Executive Committee acts under the authority and responsibility of the Managing Board and in this respect manages the Company. The Managing Board remains legally responsible for the management of the Company. The responsibilities of the Executive Committee include overseeing the general strategy as well as the risk management in connection with the Company’s activities, operational and financial objectives and financial reporting processes. The Executive Committee adopts resolutions based on consensus, or if no consensus can be reached, by a majority of the votes cast by the members of the Managing Board including the vote of the chairman of the Executive Committee.

The chairman of the Executive Committee is the President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company and thus serves as the primary interface between the Executive Committee and the Supervisory Board. Members of the Executive Committee are appointed by the Managing Board subject to the approval of the Supervisory Board. Members of the Executive Committee can be suspended and dismissed by the Managing Board without prior approval by the Supervisory Board.

The Executive Committee was composed of the following eight members as of December 31, 2020 as set forth in the table below.

77

---

 

 

Furthermore, Rajita D’Souza has been as a member of the Executive Committee since January 1, 2021.

 

Detailed biographies of our Executive Committee Members are available on our website www.st.com.

 

Executive Vice Presidents

The group of Executive Vice Presidents consisted of the following people as of December 31, 2020:

 

Detailed biographies of our Executive Vice Presidents are available on our website www.st.com.

78

---

 

5.5. Indemnification of members of our Managing Board and Supervisory Board

To the extent permitted by Dutch law, members of our Managing Board and Supervisory Board as well as our officers or agents shall be indemnified by us against expenses, such as the reasonable costs of defending claims, as stated in our Articles of Association. Under certain circumstances, there will be no entitlement to this reimbursement. We hold a Director & Officer liability insurance for the members of our Managing Board and Supervisory Board as well as our officers.

5.6. Risk Management and Control Systems

For our statement on the main features of our risk management and control systems and of the group of which the financial data are included in our annual accounts, please refer to the section Risk Management and Internal Control in the Report of the Managing Board.

5.7. Required information Article 10 Takeover Directive

The EU Takeover Directive requires that listed companies publish additional information providing insight into defensive structures and mechanisms which they apply. The relevant provision has been implemented into Dutch law by means of a decree of April 5, 2006. Pursuant to this decree, Dutch companies whose securities have been admitted to trading on a regulated market have to include information in their annual report which could be of importance for persons who are considering taking an interest in the company.

This information comprises amongst other things:

Capital structure.

The authorized share capital of STMicroelectronics N.V. is €1,810 million consisting of 1,200,000,000 common shares and 540,000,000 preference shares, each with a nominal value of €1.04. As at December 31, 2020, the number of common shares issued was 911,239,420 shares (December 31, 2019: 911,186,920 shares).

As of December 31, 2020, the number of common shares outstanding was 905,415,002 shares (December 31, 2019: 891,434,489 shares). There were no preference shares issued as of December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019, respectively.

Restrictions on the transfer of shares.

We do not have restrictions on the transfer of our common and preference shares, provided that Stichting Continuïteit ST, if it holds preference shares, requires our consent to sell or otherwise dispose of preference shares or voting rights attached thereto.

79

---

 

Holdings in us that are subject to a disclosure obligation.

For information on holdings in us that are subject to a disclosure obligation pursuant to Chapter 5.3 of the Dutch Financial Markets Supervision Act (“Wet op het financieel toezicht”) (the “FMSA”), please refer to chapter “Major Shareholders” further on.

Special controlling rights.

We do not have special controlling rights attached to our common or preference shares.

Control of employees share/option schemes.

We do not have any scheme granting rights to employees to subscribe for or acquire shares in our share capital or the share capital of a subsidiary of us where the control is not directly exercised by the employees. However, key employees as determined by our Unvested Share Award Plans are granted share awards (as part of their compensation) with a staggered vested schedule pursuant to our determined criteria. For more information on employees share/option schemes, see the Remuneration Report.

Restrictions on voting rights.

We do not have any restrictions on voting rights nor have we cooperated in the issuance of depositary receipts for shares.

Agreements with shareholders that may give rise to restrictions on the transfer of shares or restrictions of voting rights.

We do not have any agreements with shareholders that may give rise to restrictions on the transfer of shares or restrictions of voting rights. However, please see below under “Shareholders’ Agreements” for certain information on shareholders’ agreements regarding us to which we are not a party.

Provisions on appointment and dismissal of members of our Managing Board and Supervisory Board and amendment of our Articles of Association.

Please see the information included above under “Managing Board” and “Supervisory Board” with respect to the appointment and dismissal of the members of our Managing Board and Supervisory Board.

Our Articles of Association can be amended by our General Meeting of Shareholders, upon the proposal of our Supervisory Board, by a simple majority of the votes cast at a meeting where at least 15% of the issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. If a quorum is not present, a further meeting can be convened which shall, irrespective of the share capital represented, to pass a resolution. If the relevant amendment affects the rights of holders of common shares or holders of preference shares, the approval of the meeting of holders of common shares and the meeting of holders of preference shares, respectively, is required.

Authority of the Managing Board and Supervisory Board regarding the issuance and repurchase of shares.

Pursuant to our Articles of Association, our Managing Board does not have the authority to issue shares or grant rights to subscribe for shares. Our Supervisory Board has this authority. Our 2020 AGM, held on June 17, 2020, authorized our Supervisory Board, until the conclusion of the 2021 AGM, to resolve upon: (i) the issuance of common and preference shares or the granting of rights to subscribe for common and preference shares in our share capital, up to a maximum of 10% of our issued common share capital as per December 31, 2018, in the case of mergers and acquisitions, but not exceeding the limits of authorized share capital, and without limitation for preference shares (ii) the terms and conditions of an issuance of common and preference shares; and (iii) the limitation and/or exclusion of pre-emptive rights of existing shareholders upon issuance of common shares or rights to subscribe for it.

80

---

 

Pursuant to a shareholders’ resolution adopted at our 2020 AGM held on June 17, 2020, our Managing Board, subject to the approval of our Supervisory Board, was authorized, until the conclusion of the 2021 AGM, to acquire common shares and/or preference shares subject to the limits of our Articles of Association and the acquisition price conditions set forth in such shareholders’ resolution. Furthermore, our Articles of Association provide that we shall be able to acquire shares in our own share capital in order to transfer these shares under employee stock option or stock purchase plans, without an authorization of our General Meeting of Shareholders.

Significant agreements to which we are a party and which contain change of control rights

On June 22, 2017, we announced the issuance of senior unsecured bonds, in two tranches, one of $750 million with a maturity of 5 years and one of $750 million with a maturity of 7 years, convertible into new or existing common shares in our share capital. On July 28, 2020, we announced the issuance of senior unsecured bonds, in two tranches, one of $750 million with a maturity of 5 years and one of $750 million with a maturity of 7 years, convertible into new or existing common shares in our share capital. Pursuant to the terms and conditions of the senior bonds (the “Conditions”), bondholders have certain conversion rights and redemption rights upon a change of control, all as provided in the Conditions.

Agreements with the sole member of our Managing Board and other employees regarding distributions upon the termination of their employment contract in connection with a public offer on us.

The contract of our President and Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Jean-Marc Chery, provides that upon a change of control following a takeover bid (i) all unvested stock awards granted to Mr. Chery will fully vest and (ii) the bonus payable under our Executive Incentive Plan will be due for the full amount, which is 150% of the executive gross annual base salary. Such benefits are not linked to termination of the employment agreement.

Stichting Continuïteit ST — our preference shares

We have an option agreement with an independent foundation, Stichting Continuïteit ST (the “Stichting”), regarding our preference shares. This is a common practice used by a majority of publicly traded Dutch companies. Our Managing Board and our Supervisory Board, along with the board of the Stichting, have declared that they are jointly of the opinion that the Stichting is independent of us. The option agreement provides for the issuance of up to a maximum 540,000,000 preference shares. Any such shares would be issued to the Stichting upon its request and in its sole discretion and upon payment of at least 25% of the par value of the preference shares to be issued.

The Stichting would have the option, which it shall exercise in its sole discretion, to take up the preference shares. The shares would be issuable in the event of actions which the board of the Stichting determines would be contrary to our interests, our shareholders and our other stakeholders and which in the event of a creeping acquisition or offer for our common shares are not supported by our Managing Board and Supervisory Board. The preference shares may remain outstanding for no longer than two years.

No preference shares have been issued to date. The effect of the preference shares may be to deter potential acquirers from effecting an unsolicited acquisition resulting in a change of control as well as to create a level-playing field in the event actions which are considered to be hostile by our Managing Board and our Supervisory Board, as described above, occur and which the board of the Stichting determines to be contrary to our interests and our shareholders and other stakeholders.

The board of the Stichting is currently comprised of the following three members:

All members of the board of the Stichting are independent from the Company.

81

---

 

5.8. Code of Ethics

Our Code of Conduct is designed to promote honest and ethical business conduct, to deter wrongdoing and to provide principles to which our employees are expected to adhere and advocate. Our Code of Conduct is applicable to all of our employees and senior managers. We have adapted and will amend our Code of Conduct and related policies, as appropriate, to raise awareness, ensure effectiveness and compliance, and to reflect regulatory or other changes. Our Code of Conduct also encourage our employees (or any interest third party) to speak up and express any concern they may have in good faith, without fear of retaliation. Our Code of Conduct provides that if any employee or senior manager acts in contravention of the principles set forth therein, we will take appropriate steps in terms of the procedures in place for fair disciplinary action. This action may, in cases of severe breaches, include dismissal. Our Code of Conduct is available on our website in the Corporate Governance section, at http://investors.st.com.

5.9. Deviations from the Code

According to the DCGC, we are required to publish a list of current deviations from the DCGC, and an explanation why we do not comply (“Comply or Explain”). For more information on the DCGC, please visit the website www.commissiecorporategovernance.nl. Because we are listed on the NYSE, we are required to comply with the U.S. Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, as well as NYSE listing rules, and the rules and regulations promulgated by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”). For the full text of the U.S. Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 as well as the NYSE listing rules, and the rules and regulations promulgated by the SEC, please see www.sec.gov.

We comply with such principles and best practice provisions or by explaining why it deviates from such provisions. We comply such principles and best practice provisions, with the exception of the following best practice provisions:

82

---

 

5.10. Major Shareholders

Holders of our shares (including certain comparable instruments, such as instruments with a value (partly) dependent on shares or distributions on shares, or contracts creating an economic position similar to shares) or voting rights (including potential interests, such as via options or convertible bonds) may have disclosure obligations under Dutch law. Any person or entity whose direct or indirect interest in our share capital or voting rights (including potential interest) reaches, exceeds or falls below a certain threshold must make a disclosure to the AFM immediately. The threshold percentages are 3%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 75% and 95%. If a person’s direct or indirect interest in the share capital or voting rights passively reaches, exceeds or falls below the abovementioned thresholds (e.g. as a result of a change in the capital of the company), the person in question must give notice to the AFM no later than the fourth trading day after the AFM has published the change in the share capital and/or voting rights in the public register. In addition, a notification requirement applies in respect of shares with special statutory rights (e.g. priority shares), regardless of the abovementioned percentages.

Furthermore, each person who is or ought to be aware that the substantial holding he holds in the Company, reaches, exceeds or falls below any of the abovementioned thresholds vis-à-vis his most recent notification to the AFM, which change relates to the composition of the notification as a result of certain acts (e.g. (i) the exchange of certain financial instruments for shares or depositary receipts for shares, (ii) the exchange of shares for depositary receipts for shares, or (iii) as a result of the exercise of rights pursuant to a contract for the acquisition of voting rights) must give notice to the AFM no later than the fourth trading day after he became or ought to be aware of this change.

For the purpose of calculating the percentage of capital interest or voting rights, among others, the following interests must be taken into account: (i) those directly held by him; (ii) those held by his controlled undertakings for purposes of the Dutch Financial Supervision Act; (iii) shares held by a third party for such person’s account and the votes such third party may exercise; (iv) the votes held by a third party if such person has concluded an oral or written voting agreement with such party which provides for a lasting common policy on voting; (v) the votes held by a third party if such person has concluded an oral or written agreement with such party which provides for a temporary and paid transfer of the votes; and (vi) the votes which a person may exercise as a proxy but in his own discretion. A person who has a 3% or larger interest in the share capital or voting rights and who ceases to be a controlled undertaking must without delay notify the AFM. As of that moment, all notification obligations under the Dutch Financial Supervision Act will become applicable to the former controlled undertaking itself. The management company of a common fund (beleggingsfonds) shall be deemed to have the disposal of the shares held by the depositary and the related voting rights. The depositary of a common fund shall be deemed not to have the disposal of shares or voting rights. Furthermore, special rules apply to the attribution of the ordinary shares which are part of the property of a partnership or other community of property. A holder of a pledge or right of usufruct in respect of our shares can also be subject to a notification obligation if such person has, or can acquire, the right to vote on our shares. If a pledgor or usufructuary acquires such voting rights, this may also trigger a notification obligation for the holder of our shares. A person is also deemed to hold shares if he has a financial instrument (i) whose rise in value depends in part on the rise in value of the underlying shares or on dividend or other payments on those shares (in other words, a long position must be held in those shares), and (ii) which does not entitle him to acquire shares in a listed company (i.e., it is a cash-settled financial instrument). In addition, a person who may, by virtue of an option, be obliged to buy shares in a listed company is also equated with a shareholder. Moreover, a person who has entered into a contract (other than a cash-settled financial instrument) that gives him an economic position comparable to that of a shareholder in a listed company is also deemed to hold shares for the purposes of the disclosure obligation.

The holder of a financial instrument representing a short position in our shares is required to notify the AFM if such short position, expressed in a capital percentage, reaches or crosses a threshold percentage. The threshold percentages are the same as referred to above in this section. Short position refers to the gross short position (i.e., a long position held by the holder cannot be offset against the short position). There is also a requirement to notify

83

---

 

the AFM of the net short position (i.e., long positions are offset against short positions) if such short position, expressed in a capital percentage, reaches or crosses a threshold percentage; The threshold percentages are 0.2% and each 0.1% above that. Notifications as of 0.5% and each 0.1% above that will be published by the AFM. The notification shall be made no later than 3:30 pm CET on the following trading day.

Under Dutch law, the sole member of our Managing Board and each of the members of our Supervisory Board must without delay notify the AFM of any changes in his interest or potential interest in our share capital or voting rights. Under the European Market Abuse Regulation, the sole member of our Managing Board, the members of the Executive Committee and each of the members of our Supervisory Board, as well as any other person who would have the power to take managerial decisions affecting the future developments and business prospects of the Company having regular access to inside information relating, directly or indirectly, to the Company, must notify the AFM of any transactions conducted for his or her own account relating to the shares or in financial instruments the value of which is also based on the value of the shares. In addition, certain persons who are closely associated with members of the Managing Board, the Executive Committee and Supervisory Board or any of the other persons as described above, are required to notify the AFM of any transactions conducted for their own account relating to the shares or in financial instruments the value of which is also based on the value of the shares.

The AFM publishes all notifications on its public website (www.afm.nl). Non-compliance with the notification obligations under European or Dutch law can lead to imprisonment or criminal fines, or administrative fines or other administrative sanctions. In addition, non-compliance with these notification obligations may lead to civil sanctions, including, without limitation, suspension of the voting rights attaching to our shares held by the offender for a maximum of three years, (suspension and) nullification of a resolution adopted by our shareholders’ meeting (if it is likely that such resolution would not have been adopted if the offender had not voted) and a prohibition for the offender to acquire our shares or votes for a period of no more than five years. Shareholders are advised to consult with their own legal advisers to determine whether notification obligations apply to them.

The following table sets forth certain information with respect to the ownership of our issued common shares as of December 31, 2020 based on information available to us:

 

We are not aware of any significant change over the past three years in the percentage ownership of our shares by ST Holding, our major shareholder. ST Holding does not have any different voting rights from those of our other shareholders.

According to the report on Schedule 13G (“ST Holding 13G”) jointly filed with the SEC on February 11, 2020 by ST Holding, the Italian Ministry of the Economy and Finance (the “MEF”), Bpifrance Participations S.A., a successor to its former wholly-owned subsidiary FT1CI, (“Bpifrance” and together with the MEF, the “STH Shareholders”) and the Italian Government and the French Government, each indirectly through the MEF and Bpifrance, respectively, hold 14.1% of our share capital as of December 31, 2019. The ownership percentages of each the MEF and Bpifrance are based on 891,434,489 shares outstanding as of December 31, 2019. As of this date, no report on 13G in respect of the STH Shareholders was filed subsequent to the ST Holding 13G. On November 17, 2016, Commissariat à l’Energie Atomique et aux Énergies Alternatives (“CEA”) and Bpifrance, which were, at the time, the shareholders of FT1CI, entered into a share purchase agreement pursuant to which CEA transferred 721,513 shares of FT1CI to Bpifrance.

84

---

 

As a result of the transaction, Bpifrance increased its shareholding in FT1CI from 79.2% to 95.1%, with CEA retaining the remaining 4.9% in FT1CI. On November 16, 2018, CEA and Bpifrance entered into a second purchase agreement, pursuant to which CEA transferred 222,265 shares, representing its remaining ownership interest in FT1CI, to Bpifrance. As a result of this transaction, Bpifrance became the sole shareholder of FT1CI. On June 21, 2019, FT1CI merged with and into Bpifrance and ceased to exist.

All transactions with major shareholders were in compliance with provisions of the 2016 Dutch Corporate Governance Code.

5.11. Shareholders’ Agreements

5.11.1. STH Shareholders’ Agreement

The filers of the ST Holding 13G have entered into a shareholders agreement which governs relations between them, including for certain matters relating to the ownership of our shares and the actions of our management to the extent shareholder approval is required (the “STH Shareholders Agreement”). Below is a brief summary of certain details from the ST Holding 13G.

5.11.1.1.        Standstill

The STH Shareholders’ Agreement contains a standstill provision that precludes any of the parties and the parties’ affiliates from acquiring, directly or indirectly, any of our common shares or any instrument providing for the right to acquire any of our common shares other than through ST Holding. The standstill is in effect for as long as such party holds our common shares through ST Holding. The parties agreed to continue to hold their stakes in us at all times through the current holding structure of ST Holding, subject to certain limited exceptions.

5.11.1.2.        Corporate Governance

The STH Shareholders’ Agreement provides for a balanced corporate governance between the STH Shareholders for the duration of the “Balance Period”, despite actual differences in indirect economic interest in us. The “Balance Period” lasts as long as each STH Shareholder owns at any time a voting stake in ST Holding equal to at least 47.5% of the total voting stakes of ST Holding.

Managing Board and Supervisory Board members can only be appointed by the General Meeting of Shareholders upon a proposal by the Supervisory Board. The Supervisory Board passes resolutions, including on such a proposal, by at least three quarters of the votes of the members in office. The STH Shareholders Agreement, to which STM is not a party, furthermore provides that: (i) each of the STH Shareholders, Bpifrance, on the one hand, and the MEF, on the other hand, may propose the same number of members for election to the Supervisory Board by our shareholders, and ST Holding shall vote in favor of such members; and (ii) any decision relating to the voting rights of ST Holding shall require the unanimous approval of the STH Shareholders. ST Holding may therefore be in a position to effectively control actions that require shareholder approval, including, as discussed above, the proposal of six out of nine members for election to our Supervisory Board (three members by each STH Shareholder) and the appointment of our Managing Board, as well as corporate actions, and the issuance of new shares or other securities. As a result of the STH Shareholders Agreement, the Chairman of our Supervisory Board is proposed by an STH Shareholder for a three-year term, and the Vice-Chairman of our Supervisory Board is proposed by the other STH Shareholder for the same period, and vice-versa for the following three-year term. The STH Shareholder proposing the appointment of the Chairman may furthermore propose the appointment of the Assistant Secretary of our Supervisory Board, and the STH Shareholder proposing the appointment of Vice-Chairman proposes the appointment of the Secretary of our Supervisory Board. Finally, each STH Shareholder also proposes the appointment of a Financial Controller to the Supervisory Board.

The STH Shareholders furthermore agreed that during the Balance Period, any other decision, to the extent that a resolution of ST Holding is required, must be pursuant to the unanimous approval of the shareholders of ST Holding.

At the end of the Balance Period i.e., once a shareholder’s voting stake in ST Holding has decreased under the 47.5% threshold, such STH Shareholder being thereafter referred to as “minority shareholder” and the other one being referred to as “majority shareholder”, the members of our Supervisory Board and those of ST Holding designated by

85

---

 

the minority shareholder of ST Holding will, pursuant to the Shareholders’ Agreement, immediately resign upon request of ST Holding’s majority shareholder.

After the end of the Balance Period, unanimous approval by the shareholders of ST Holding remains required to approve:

Finally, at the end of the Balance Period, the unanimous approval required for other decisions taken at the STMicroelectronics N.V. level shall only be compulsory to the extent possible, taking into account the actual power attached to the direct and indirect shareholding together held by the STH Shareholders in our company.

5.11.1.3.        Ownership of ST Shares

The STH Shareholders Agreement provides that each STH Shareholder retains the right to cause ST Holding to dispose of its stake in us at its sole discretion pursuant to the issuance of financial instruments, an equity swap, a structured finance deal or a straight sale; however, except in the case of a public offer, no sales by any party to the STH Shareholders Agreement may be made of any of our shares or any shares of Bpifrance or ST Holding to any of our top ten competitors or any company controlling such a competitor. The STH Shareholders Agreement also requires all of the parties to the STH Shareholders Agreement to hold their stakes in us at all time through the current holding structure of ST Holding, subject to certain limited exceptions, and precludes all such parties and their affiliates from acquiring any of our common shares other than through ST Holding.

5.11.1.4.        Change of Control Provision

The STH Shareholders Agreement provides for tag-along rights, pre-emptive rights, and provisions with respect to a change of control of any of the STH Shareholders, on the one hand, and the Italian Ministry of the Economy and Finance, on the other hand. The STH Shareholders may transfer shares of ST Holding, to any of their respective affiliates, which could include entities ultimately controlled by the Italian Government or the French Government.

86

---

 

5.11.1.5.        Deadlock

In the event of a disagreement that cannot be resolved between the parties as to the conduct of the business and actions contemplated by the STH Shareholders’ Agreement, each party has the right to offer its interest in ST Holding to the other, which then has the right to acquire, or to have a third party acquire, such interest. If neither party agrees to acquire or have acquired the other party’s interest, then together the parties are obligated to try to find a third party to acquire their collective interests, or such part thereof as is suitable to resolve the deadlock.

5.11.1.6.        Duration

The STH Shareholders’ Agreement will remain in force as long as the Italian State, on the one hand and Bpifrance, on the other hand, are shareholders of ST Holding.

6.    Dividend Policy

Our dividend policy reads as follows: “STMicroelectronics seeks to use its available cash in order to develop and enhance its position in a competitive semiconductor market while at the same time managing its cash resources to reward its shareholders for their investment and trust in STMicroelectronics. Based on its results, projected capital requirements as well as business conditions and prospects, the Managing Board proposes on an annual basis to the Supervisory Board, whenever deemed possible and desirable in line with STMicroelectronics’ objectives and financial situation, the distribution of a quarterly cash dividend, if any. The Supervisory Board, upon the proposal of the Managing Board, decides or proposes on an annual basis, in accordance with this policy, which portion of the profits or distributable reserves shall not be retained in reserves to fund future growth or for other purposes and makes a proposal concerning the amount, if any, of the quarterly cash dividend.”

On June 17, 2020, our shareholders approved a cash dividend of US$0.168 per outstanding share of our common stock, which was distributed in quarterly installments of US$0.042 in each of the second, third and fourth quarters of 2020 and will also be distributed in the first quarter of 2021. Future dividends, if any, and their timing and amounts may be affected by our accumulated profits, our capacity to generate cash flow, our financial situation, the general economic situation and prospects and any other factors that the Supervisory Board, upon the recommendation of our Managing Board, shall deem important. For a history of dividends paid by us to our shareholders, see Note 7.6.21.7 of our Consolidated Financial Statements.

87

---

 

7.    Consolidated financial statements

7.1. Consolidated income statement

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

88

---

 

7.2. Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

89

---

 

7.3. Consolidated statement of financial position

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

*Comparative amounts have been revised to reflect measurement-period adjustment reported on certain business acquisitions as detailed in note 7.6.10.

 

 

90

---

 

 

7.4. Consolidated statement of changes in equity

For the year ended December 31, 2020

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

91

---

 

For the year ended December 31, 2019

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

 

 

 

 

92

---

 

 

7.5. Consolidated statement of cash flows

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements

93

---

 

7.6. Notes to the consolidated financial statements

7.6.1. Corporate information

STMicroelectronics N.V. (“the Company”), with Commercial Register No. 33194537 and RSIN 008751171, is organized under the laws of the Netherlands with its corporate legal seat in Amsterdam, the Netherlands, and head offices at WTC Schiphol Airport, Schiphol Boulevard 265, 1118 BH Schiphol, the Netherlands. Headquarters and operational offices are managed through STMicroelectronics International N.V., a wholly owned subsidiary of STMicroelectronics N.V., and are located at 39 Chemin du Champ des Filles, 1228 Plan-les-Ouates, Geneva, Switzerland.

The Company and its subsidiaries (together “the Group”) are a global independent semiconductor company that designs, develops, manufactures and markets a broad range of products, including discrete and general purpose components, application-specific integrated circuits (“ASICs”), full custom devices and semi-custom devices and application-specific standard products (“ASSPs”) for analog, digital and mixed-signal applications.  

The Group’s products are used in a wide variety of applications for the four end-markets the Group addresses: automotive, industrial, personal electronics and communications equipment, computers and peripherals.  For the automotive and industrial markets the Group addresses a wide customer base, particularly in industrial, with a broad and deep product portfolio.  In personal electronics and communications equipment, computers and peripherals the Group has a selective approach both in terms of the customers the Group serves, as well as in the technologies and products the Group offers.

The Company is a publicly traded company, listed on the New York Stock Exchange, on Euronext Paris and on the Borsa Italiana (Italian Stock Exchange).

These consolidated financial statements have been approved by the Supervisory Board on March 24, 2021 for submission to the Annual General Meeting of Shareholders.

7.6.2. Basis of preparation

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared on a historical cost basis, except for derivative financial instruments, debt and equity financial assets that have been measured at fair value. The consolidated financial statements are presented in dollars of the United States of America and all values are rounded to the nearest million ($ million) except when otherwise stated. Under Article 35 of the Company’s Articles of Association, the financial year extends from January 1 to December 31, which is the period-end of each fiscal year. Certain prior year amounts have been revised to conform to current year presentation.

7.6.3. Statement of compliance

These consolidated financial statements are prepared for Dutch statutory purposes in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as adopted by the European Union. These consolidated financial statements also comply with Article 362.9 of Book 2 of the Dutch Civil Code. For internal and external financial reporting purposes, the Group uses generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“U.S. GAAP”) as its primary set of reporting standards.

94

---

 

7.6.4. Basis of consolidation

The consolidated financial statements comprise the financial statements of the Company and its subsidiaries for the year ended December 31, 2020.

Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date of acquisition, being the date on which the Group obtains control and continues to be consolidated until the date that such control ceases. Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Group has control. The Group controls an entity when the Group is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power to direct the activities of the entity. If the Group loses control over a subsidiary, it:

The financial statements of the subsidiaries are prepared for the same reporting period as the parent company, using consistent accounting policies. All intra-group assets and liabilities, equity, income, expenses and cash flows resulting from intra-group transactions are eliminated in full on consolidation.

Non-controlling interest is the share of equity in a subsidiary not attributable, directly or indirectly, to the parent company. Non-controlling interest is presented separately in the consolidated income statement, consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of financial position and consolidated statement of changes in equity respectively.

Changes in a parent’s ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in a loss of control are accounted for as equity transactions.

95

---

 

7.6.5. Changes in accounting policies

The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those followed in the preparation of the Group’s annual financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2019. New accounting guidance was effective and adopted by the Group on January 1, 2020, with no material effect on the Group’s consolidated financial statements. Changes to significant accounting policies are described below:

Amendments to existing standards adopted in 2020

The Group adopted the following new or amended standards on January 1, 2020:

Amendment to IFRS 3 Business Combinations: the amendment provides a revised definition of a business and is intended to reduce the number of transactions that qualify as business combinations and for which the acquisition method is mandatory. IFRS 3, as amended, was endorsed by the European Union, with January 1, 2020 as the effective date. The amendment was adopted with no material effect on the Group’s consolidated financial statements.

Amendments to IFRS 9 and IFRS 7, Interest Rate Benchmark (IBOR) Reform (Phase 1): the amendments provide temporary reliefs which enable hedge accounting to continue during the period of uncertainty before the replacement of an existing interest rate benchmark with an alternative nearly risk-free interest rate. The amendments were endorsed by the European Union, with January 1, 2020 as the effective date. The amendments were adopted with no material effect on the Group’s accounting policies and consolidated financial statements as the Group does not report any hedging relationships or critical financial contracts that are directly affected by the interest rate benchmark reform.

The following amendments were also adopted in 2020, with no material effect on the accounting policies, financial position or performance of the Group:

7.6.6. Standards and amendments issued but not yet effective

Standards and amended standards issued but not yet effective up to the date of issuance of the Group’s financial statements are listed below. The detailed descriptions of new or amended standards and interpretations issued are those that the Group reasonably expects to have an impact on disclosures, financial position or performance when applied at a future date. The Group intends to adopt these standards when they become effective.

Amendments to IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements: the amendments specify the requirements for classifying liabilities as current or non-current by clarifying the requirements of IAS 1 when an entity expects to refinance or roll over an obligation under an existing loan facility. The amendments also have implications on the requirements related to covenant breaches. The amendments clarify: what is meant by a right to defer settlement; that a right to defer must exist at the end of the reporting period and that the classification is not affected by the likelihood that an entity will exercise its deferral right and; that only if an embedded derivative in a convertible liability is itself an equity instrument would the terms of a liability not impact its classification. IAS 1, as amended, has not been endorsed by the European Union yet. The Group will apply these amendments when effective. The presentation on the consolidated statement of financial position of the convertible bonds issued in 2017 and 2020 is in the scope of the amended guidance, which is not expected to have a significant impact upon adoption.

Amendments to IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements and IFRS Practice Statement 2: Disclosure of Accounting Policies: the amendments require entities to disclose their material accounting policy information rather than their significant accounting policies. IAS 1, as amended, has not been endorsed by the European Union yet. The

96

---

 

Group will apply these amendments when effective and will modify its disclosures related to the Group’s accounting policies accordingly. These amendments are not expected to have a material impact upon adoption.

Amendments to IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors: Definition of Accounting Estimates: the amendments introduce the definition of accounting estimates (defined as monetary amounts in financial statements that are subject to measurement uncertainty) and clarify the distinction between changes in accounting estimates and changes in accounting policies.  IAS 8, as amended, has not been endorsed by the European Union yet. The Group will apply these amendments when effective. These amendments are not expected to have a material impact upon adoption.

Amendments to IFRS 9, IFRS 7, IFRS 4 and IFRS 16, Interest Rate Benchmark (IBOR) Reform (Phase 2): the amendments address issues that arise during the reform of an interest rate benchmark, including the replacement of one benchmark with an alternative one. The amendments correspond to the second phase of the project undertaken by the IASB to consider what reliefs, if any, to give from the effect of the IBOR reform. The Phase 1 amendments, as adopted on January 1, 2020, provide temporary reliefs from applying specific hedge accounting requirements to relationships affected by uncertainties arising as a result of the IBOR reform. The Phase 2 amendments address issues that arise from the implementation of the IBOR reform, including the accounting for changes in the basis for determining contractual cash flows as a result of the IBOR reform, the prospective cease-application of Phase 1 reliefs, additional temporary exceptions from applying specific hedge accounting requirements and the requirements for additional disclosures related to the IBOR reform. The Phase 2 amendments have been endorsed by the European Union, with January 1, 2021 as effective date. These amendments are not expected to have a significant impact upon adoption.

The following new standard and amendments to existing standards are not expected to have a material impact on the accounting policies, financial position or performance of the Group:

 

7.6.7. Summary of significant accounting policies

7.6.7.1.        Business combinations and goodwill

The Group applies the acquisition method to account for business combinations. The consideration transferred in a business combination (including any deferred and contingent consideration) is measured at fair value. Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred.

Each identifiable asset and liability are, with limited exceptions as set forth in the purchase accounting method, measured initially at the acquisition-date fair value. Only components of noncontrolling interest that constitute a present ownership interest and entitle their holder to a proportionate share of the entity’s net assets in the event of liquidation are measured at either fair value or at the present ownership interests’ proportionate share of the acquiree’s net identifiable assets. All other components of noncontrolling interest are measured at their acquisition date fair value.

Goodwill arises when there is a positive difference between:

97

---

 

Goodwill is initially recorded at cost. If the acquirer has made a gain from a bargain purchase, that gain is recognized in the consolidated income statement.

After initial recognition, goodwill is not subject to amortization but is tested at least annually for impairment. For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business combination is, from the acquisition date, allocated to each of the Group’s cash generating units (“CGU”) that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination, irrespective of whether other assets or liabilities of the acquiree are assigned to those units.

A cash-generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets.

Goodwill impairment tests are undertaken annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate a potential impairment. The impairment test determines whether the recoverable amount of each cash-generating unit, which is the higher of its assets’ fair value less costs of disposal and its value in use, is lower than its total carrying amount. If lower, an impairment loss is recognized for the excess of the carrying amount over the recoverable amount. If the impairment loss exceeds the book value of goodwill, allocation is made on a pro rata basis over the remaining assets of the CGU. In determining the value in use of a cash-generating unit, the Group usually estimates the expected discounted future cash flows associated with the unit. Significant management judgments and estimates are used in forecasting the future discounted cash flows, including: the applicable industry’s sales volume forecast and selling price evolution, the cash-generating unit’s market penetration and its revenue evolution, the market acceptance of certain recent technologies and products, or the relevant cost structure. The pre-tax discount rates applied are based on various scenarios incorporating a weighted average cost of capital and the perpetuity rates used in calculating cash flow terminal values.

7.6.7.2.        Investments in joint ventures

The Group’s investment in its joint ventures is accounted for using the equity method. A joint venture is a separate vehicle whereby the partners have a contractual arrangement that establishes joint control over the economic activities of the entity. The agreement requires unanimous consent for financial and operating decisions among the partners.

Under the equity method, the investment in the joint venture is carried in the consolidated statement of financial position at cost plus post-acquisition changes in the Group’s share of net assets of the joint venture. Goodwill relating to the joint venture is included in the carrying amount of the investment and is neither amortized nor individually tested for impairment.

The consolidated income statement reflects the share of the result of operations of the joint venture. Where there has been a change recognized directly in the equity of the joint venture, the Group recognizes its share of any changes and discloses this element, when applicable, in the consolidated statement of changes in equity or other comprehensive income. Unrealized gains and losses resulting from transactions between the Group and the joint ventures are eliminated to the extent of the interest in the joint ventures.

The share of profit (loss) of joint ventures is shown on the face of the consolidated income statement on the line “Share of profit (loss) of joint ventures”. This is the profit (loss) attributable to equity holders of the joint ventures and therefore is after tax and after net result attributable to noncontrolling interest of the joint venture’s subsidiaries, if any.

The financial statements of the joint ventures are prepared for the same reporting period as the parent company or with not more than a quarter-lag if the joint venture cannot prepare financial statements in a timing compliant with the closing timeframe of the Group. Where necessary, adjustments are made to bring the accounting policies in line with those of the Group.

After application of the equity method, the Group determines whether it is necessary to recognize an additional impairment loss on the Group’s investment in its joint ventures. The Group determines at each reporting date whether there is any objective evidence that the investment in the joint venture is impaired. If this is the case, the Group calculates the amount of impairment as the difference between the recoverable amount of the joint venture and its carrying value, when higher, and recognizes any loss in the income statement. To the extent that the

98

---

 

recoverable amount of an investment in a joint venture subsequently increases, the Group reverses the impairment loss previously recorded.

7.6.7.3.        Foreign currency translation

The U.S. dollar is the functional currency for the Company and the presentation currency for the Group, which is the currency of the primary economic environment in which the Group operates. The worldwide semiconductor industry uses the U.S. dollar as a currency of reference for actual pricing in the market. Furthermore, the majority of the Group’s transactions are denominated in U.S. dollars, and revenues from external sales in U.S. dollars largely exceed revenues in any other currency. However, certain significant costs are largely incurred in the countries of the Eurozone and other non-U.S. dollar currency areas.

The functional currency of each subsidiary throughout the Group is either the local currency or the U.S. dollar, determined on the basis of the economic environment in which each subsidiary operates. For consolidation purposes, assets and liabilities included in the statement of financial position of the Group’s subsidiaries having the local currency as functional currency are translated into the presentation currency of the Group at current rates of exchange at the reporting date. Income and expense items and cash flow items are translated at the prevailing exchange rate in which they are recognized. The currency translation adjustments (“CTA”) generated by the conversion of the financial position and results of operations from local functional currencies are reported as a component of other comprehensive income in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income and the consolidated statement of changes in equity.

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign entity are treated as assets and liabilities of the foreign entity and translated into the presentation currency of the Group at closing rate. Exchange differences arising are recognized in other comprehensive income.

Assets, liabilities, revenues, expenses, gains or losses arising from transactions denominated in foreign currency are recorded in the functional currency of the recording entity at the prevailing exchange rate. At each reporting date, monetary assets and liabilities denominated in a currency other than the recording entity’s functional currency are re-measured into the functional currency at the exchange rate prevailing at the reporting date. The related exchange gains and losses are recorded in the consolidated income statement as “Other income” or “Other expenses”.

7.6.7.4.        Revenue recognition

Arrangements with customers are considered contracts if all the following criteria are met: (a) parties have approved the contract and are committed to perform their respective obligations; (b) each party’s rights regarding the goods or services to be transferred can be identified; (c) payment terms for the goods or services to be transferred can be identified; (d) the contract has commercial substance and (e) collectability of the consideration is probable. The Group recognizes revenue from products sold to a customer, including distributors, when it satisfies a performance obligation by transferring control over a product to the customer. In certain circumstances, the Group may enter into arrangements that concern principally revenues from services where the performance obligation is satisfied over time. The objective when allocating the transaction price is to allocate the transaction price to each performance obligation (or distinct good or service) in an amount that depicts the amount of consideration to which the Group expects to be entitled in exchange for transferring the promised goods or services to the customer. The payment terms typically range between 30 and 90 days.

Consistent with standard business practice in the semiconductor industry, price protection is granted to distribution customers on their existing inventory of the Group’s products to compensate them for declines in market prices. The Group accrues a provision for price protection based on a rolling historical price trend computed monthly as a percentage of gross distributor sales. This historical price trend represents differences in recent months between the invoiced price and the final price to the distributor, adjusted to accommodate a significant change in the selling price. The short outstanding inventory time, visibility into the inventory product pricing and long distributor pricing history have enabled the Group to reliably estimate price protection provisions at period-end. The Group records the accrued amounts as a deduction of “Sales” in the consolidated income statement at the time of the sale. Revenue related to arrangements with distribution customers including price protection variable consideration is recognized when it is highly probable that a significant reversal of revenues will not occur.

99

---

 

The Group’s customers occasionally return the Group’s products for technical reasons. The Group’s standard terms and conditions of sale provide that if the Group determines that products do not conform, the Group will repair or replace the non-conforming products, or issue a credit note or rebate of the purchase price. Quality returns are identified shortly after sale in customer quality control testing. Quality returns are usually associated with end-user customers, not with distribution channels. The Group records the accrued amounts as a deduction of “Sales” in the consolidated income statement, using historical and current conditions to form a reasonable estimate of future returns.

The Group’s insurance policy relating to product liability covers third party physical damages and bodily injury, indirect financial damages as well as immaterial non-consequential damages caused by defective products. The Group records a provision for warranty costs as a charge against “Cost of sales” in the consolidated income statement, based on historical trends of warranty costs incurred as a percentage of sales, which management has determined to be a reasonable estimate of the probable losses to be incurred for warranty claims in a period. Any potential warranty claims are subject to the Group’s determination that the Group is at fault for damages, and such claims usually must be submitted within a short period of time following the date of sale. This warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties, conditions or terms expressed or implied by statute or common law. The Group’s contractual terms and conditions typically limit its liability to the sales value of the products which gave rise to the claims.

In addition to product sales, the Group enters into arrangements with customers consisting in transferring licenses or related to license services. The revenue generated from these arrangements is reported on the line “Other revenues” of the consolidated income statement. Other revenues also include patent royalty income, sale of scrap materials and manufacturing by-products.

7.6.7.5.        Other significant categories of income

Funding

The Group receives funding mainly from governmental entities and income is recognized when all contractual conditions for receipt of these funds are fulfilled. The Group’s primary sources for government funding are French, Italian and other country governmental entities. Such funding is generally provided to encourage research and development activities, industrialization and local economic development. The conditions for receipt of government funding may include eligibility restrictions, approval by the European Union (“EU”) authorities, annual budget appropriations, compliance with the European Commission regulations, as well as specifications regarding objectives and results. Certain specific contracts contain obligations to maintain a minimum level of employment and investment during a certain period. There could be penalties if these objectives are not fulfilled. Other contracts contain penalties for late deliveries or for breach of contract, which may result in repayment obligations. Funding related to these contracts is recorded when the conditions required by the contract are met.

 

The Group’s funding programs are classified under three general categories: funding for research, development and other innovative activities, capital investments, and loans. The Group also benefits from tax credits for R&D activities in several countries (notably in France and Italy) as they are generally available to all companies.

Funding for research, development and other innovative activities

Funding for research, development and innovative activities is the most common form of funding that the Group receives. Public funding for such activities is recorded as “Other income” in the Group’s consolidated income statement. The funding is recognized ratably as the related costs are incurred once the agreement with the respective governmental agency has been signed and all applicable conditions are met. The majority of this public funding is not received for development projects recognized by the Group as intangible assets, in which case the Group would have recognized such funding as a reduction of the corresponding intangible assets.

 

The Group receives certain specific project-related research tax credits – “Crédit Impôt Recherche” and “Credito d’Imposta Ricerca e Sviluppo” – in the French and Italian tax jurisdictions, respectively. The Group considers the tax credits received as government grants based on the fact that the tax credits are received independently from tax payments of the Group. The Group recognizes these credits as long-term or short-term receivables depending on

100

---

 

the expected time of collection. These credits are deducted from “Research and development” in the consolidated income statement or recorded as a reduction of intangible assets, as described in note 7.6.7.6.

Capital investments

Capital investment funding is recorded as a reduction of “Property, plant and equipment” in the consolidated statement of financial position and is recognized in the Group’s consolidated income statement by offsetting the depreciation charges of the funded assets during their useful lives. The Group also receives capital funding in Italy, which can be recovered through the reduction of various government liabilities, including income tax, value-added tax and employee-related social charges.

When the funding has been classified as a long-term receivable with no tax attribute or legal restriction, it is reflected in the consolidated statement of financial position at its discounted net present value. The subsequent accretion of the discount is recorded as a non-operating income in “Finance income”.

Loans

The Group receives certain loans, mainly related to large capital investment projects, at preferential interest rates. These loans are measured and recognized in accordance with IFRS 9. The benefit, if any, is calculated as the difference between the initial carrying amount of the loans determined in accordance with IFRS 9 and the proceeds received and is recognized in accordance with the policy described in the preceding paragraphs.

Finance income

Finance income is calculated by applying the effective interest rate to the gross carrying amount of a financial asset, except for financial assets that subsequently become credit-impaired. For credit-impaired financial assets, the effective interest rate is applied to the net carrying amount of the financial asset.

7.6.7.6.        Research and development

Research and development expenditures include costs incurred by the Group, the Group’s share of costs incurred by other research and development interest groups and costs associated with co-development contracts. Research costs are expensed as incurred and are reported net of research tax credits received in the French and Italian tax jurisdictions, as described in note 7.6.7.5.

Expenditures incurred on development projects, mainly related to the design and testing of new or improved products controlled by the Group, are recognized as “Intangible assets” in the consolidated statement of financial position when it is probable that the project will be a success considering its economic profitability and technological feasibility, and costs can be measured reliably, as described in note 7.6.7.11. Certain research tax credits are also recognized as a reduction of intangible assets for the portion that can be reliably allocated to development projects. Development expenditures recognized as assets are amortized, when ready for intended use, over their estimated useful lives, not exceeding three years (refer to note 7.6.7.11). Other development costs are expensed as incurred. Development expenditures recognized as expenses are not recognized as assets in a subsequent period. Amortization expense recognized on capitalized development costs in use is recorded as “Cost of sales” in the consolidated income statement. Amortization expense on technologies and licenses purchased by the Group from third parties or acquired in a business combination to facilitate the Group’s research is recorded as “Research and development” in the consolidated income statement.

An impairment test is performed whenever a triggering event questions the future recoverability, or at least annually, for the capitalized development projects still not in use. A loss is recognized in the consolidated income statement as “Cost of sales” for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount.

7.6.7.7.        Current and deferred income tax

The income tax benefit (expense) in the consolidated income statement for the period comprises current and deferred income tax. Current income tax represents the income tax expected to be paid or the income tax benefit expected to be received related to the current year taxable profit or loss in each tax jurisdiction. Management

101

---

 

periodically evaluates positions taken in tax returns with respect to situations in which applicable tax regulation is subject to interpretation. The Group determines whether it is probable that the taxing authorities will accept an uncertain tax treatment that has been taken or is expected to be taken on a tax return and the accounting for income tax is determined consistently with that tax treatment. If the Group concludes it is not probable that the treatment will be accepted, the effect of the uncertainty is reflected in its income tax accounting in the period in which that determination is made. The Group measures the impact of the uncertainty using the method that best predicts the resolution of the uncertainty; either the most likely amount method or the expected value method. In most cases, the Group applies the most likely amount method to determine the amount of uncertainty to be reflected in the consolidated financial statements, as the assessment generally relies on probabilities of possible outcomes that are either binary or concentrated on one value.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recorded for temporary differences arising between the tax and book bases of assets and liabilities and for the benefits of tax credits and operating loss carry-forwards. However, deferred income tax is not accounted for if it arises from initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction other than a business combination that, at the time of the transaction, affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss. Moreover, deferred tax liabilities are not recognized if they arise from the initial recognition of goodwill. Deferred income tax is determined using tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting date and are expected to apply when the related deferred income tax asset is realized or the deferred income tax liability is settled. Deferred income tax assets are recognized to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary differences can be utilized.

Items recognized in other comprehensive income or directly in equity are recognized net of tax. Income taxes are recognized as cash flows from (used in) operating activities in the consolidated statement of cash flows.

7.6.7.8.        Earnings per share

Basic earnings per share are computed by dividing net earnings attributable to the equity holders of the parent by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period. Diluted earnings per share are computed by dividing net earnings attributable to the equity holders of the parent (adding-back finance costs, net of tax effects, related to convertible debt if determined to be dilutive) by the weighted average number of ordinary shares and potential ordinary shares outstanding during the period. The weighted average shares used to compute diluted earnings per share include the incremental shares of ordinary shares relating to unvested shares or stock options granted and convertible debt to the extent such incremental shares are dilutive. Unvested shares with performance conditions are included in the computation of diluted earnings per share if their conditions have been satisfied at the reporting date and if the awards are dilutive. If all the conditions have not been satisfied by the end of the period, the number of contingently issuable shares included in the diluted earnings per share calculation is based on the number of shares that would be issuable if the end of the period were the end of the contingency period.

7.6.7.9.        Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents include cash on hand, deposits held at call with external financial institutions and other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less. They are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and so near their maturity that they present insignificant risk of changes in value because of changes in interest rates.

102

---

 

7.6.7.10.        Inventories

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or net realizable value. Cost is based on the weighted average cost by adjusting standard cost to approximate actual manufacturing costs on a quarterly basis; the cost is therefore dependent on the Group’s manufacturing performance. In the case of underutilization of manufacturing facilities, the costs associated with the excess capacity are not included in the valuation of inventories but are charged directly to cost of sales. Net realizable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business, less reasonably predictable costs of completion, disposal and transportation.

As described in Note 7.6.7.16, the Group hedges a portion of its Euro-denominated front-end manufacturing costs of semi-finished goods as well as certain Singapore dollar-denominated forecasted transactions. The Group adjusts the initial carrying amount of inventory by the cumulative amount of the hedging instrument fair value changes recorded as other comprehensive income for settled hedging transactions.

The Group performs, on a continuous basis, write-offs of finished products, which have the characteristics of slow-moving, old production dates and technical obsolescence. The Group evaluates its inventory to identify obsolete or slow-selling items, as well as inventory that is not of saleable quality and records a specific reserve if the Group estimates the inventory will eventually become obsolete. Reserve for obsolescence is estimated for excess uncommitted inventory based on the previous quarters sales, order backlog and production plans. Inventory associated with obsolete or uncommitted inventory is expensed to “Cost of sales” in the consolidated income statement.

7.6.7.11.        Intangible assets with definite useful lives

Intangible assets acquired separately are recognized at cost in the consolidated statement of financial position and include technologies and licenses purchased from third parties and purchased software. The cost of intangible assets acquired in a business combination is the acquisition-date fair value.

Expenditures incurred on development projects, mainly related to the design and testing of new or improved products controlled by the Group, and internally generated software developed for the Group’s internal use are recognized as intangible assets when the Group can demonstrate all of the following:

Refer to Note 8.3.11 for composition of Company’s legal reserves, which includes capitalized development costs and internally developed software.

Expenditures incurred on development projects that do not meet these criteria and all research activities are recognized as expenses when incurred.

Development costs are amortized, when the development is complete, on a straight-line basis over the period of their expected benefits, not exceeding three years.

Amortization begins when the intangible asset is available for its intended use. Amortization reflects the pattern in which the asset’s economic benefits are consumed, which usually consists in applying the straight-line method to allocate the cost of the intangible asset over the estimated useful life. The amortization period and the amortization method for an intangible asset with a definite useful life are reviewed at least at each financial year end.

A summary of the policies applied to the Group’s intangible assets is as follows:

103

---

 

 

 

Intangible assets not ready to use, such as capitalized development expenditures, are tested annually for impairment. The carrying value of intangible assets with definite useful lives and subject to amortization is assessed for impairment at the level of a CGU whenever there is an indication that intangible assets may be impaired. An impairment loss is recognized in the consolidated income statement for the amount by which the carrying amount exceeds the recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value less costs of disposal and value in use. In determining recoverability, the Group usually estimates the value in use based on the projected discounted future cash flows associated with the intangible assets. The Group makes maximum use of market inputs and minimizes the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value. Prior impairment charges on intangible assets other than goodwill are reviewed for possible reversal at each reporting date.

7.6.7.12.        Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are stated at historical cost, net of government funding, accumulated depreciation and any impairment losses. Property, plant and equipment acquired in a business combination are recognized at fair value at the acquisition date. Major additions and improvements are capitalized, while minor replacements and repairs are expensed and reported as “Cost of sales”, “Selling, general and administrative”, or “Research and development” in the consolidated income statement according to their intended use.

Land is not depreciated. Depreciation on fixed assets is computed using the straight-line method over the following estimated useful lives:

 

 

The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at the end of each reporting period. The Group evaluates in each period whether there is a reason to suspect that tangible assets or groups of assets might not be recoverable. Several impairment indicators exist for making this assessment such as: restructuring plans, significant changes in the technology, market, economic or legal environment in which the Group operates, available evidence of obsolescence of the asset, or indication that its economic performance is, or will be, worse than expected. For the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash flows (cash-generating units). An impairment loss is recognized in the consolidated income statement for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value less costs of disposal and value in use. The fair value is usually estimated by the Group based on independent market appraisals and the value in use by applying the income approach. The Group makes maximum use of market inputs and minimizes the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value.

 

When property, plant and equipment are retired or otherwise disposed of, the net book value of the assets is removed from the Group’s books and the net gain or loss is included in “Other income” or “Other expenses” in the

104

---

 

consolidated income statement. A manufacturing line is composed of several individual equipment which are individually recorded, depreciated and disposed of if needed.

7.6.7.13.        Leases

 

The Group assesses at contract inception whether a contract implying the use of an asset is, or contains, a lease, which is the case if the contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration. The Group recognizes right-of-use assets at the commencement date of the lease as a category of “Property, plant and equipment” in the consolidated statement of financial position. The corresponding lease liabilities are reported on the line “Other non-current financial liabilities” on the consolidated statement of financial position when payment is expected beyond twelve months, and in the line “Other current financial liabilities” for the current portion of the lease obligations. Lease arrangements with a sum of lease payments not exceeding $5,000 or a total duration lower than twelve months without a purchase option are excluded from capitalization.

The right-of-use asset is initially measured at cost, and subsequently at cost less accumulated depreciation and any impairment losses or adjusted for certain re-measurements of the lease liability when deemed necessary. For income statement purposes, the depreciation charge on right-of-use assets is recorded on a straight-line basis over the lease period and reported as “Cost of sales”, “Selling, general and administrative”, or “Research and development” in the consolidated income statement according to the intended use of the leased asset.

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments that are not paid at the commencement date, discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease or, if that rate cannot be readily determined, the Group’s incremental borrowing rate. Generally, the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate as the discount rate. The lease liability is subsequently increased by the interest cost of the lease liability and decreased by the lease payments. The interest cost is reported in the line “Finance costs” of the consolidated income statement. The Group has applied judgment to determine the lease term for some lease contracts with renewal options. The assessment of whether the Group is reasonably certain to exercise such options impacts the lease term, which affects the amount of reported lease liabilities and corresponding right-of-use assets. The carrying amount of lease liabilities is remeasured if there is a modification, a change in the lease term, a change in the lease payments or a change in the assessment of an option to purchase the underlying asset. Variable lease payments based on an index or a rate are initially measured using the index or rate as at the commencement date. Potential future increases in variable lease payments based on an index or rate are not included in the lease liability until they take effect. When adjustments to lease payments based on an index or rate take effect, the lease liability is reassessed and adjusted against the right-of-use asset.

 

For cash flow presentation purposes, cash payments for the principal portion of the lease liabilities are reported as cash flows used in financing activities. The interest expense recorded on the subsequent measurement of lease liabilities are reported within cash flows from operations, consistent with the Group’s cash flow presentation for interest paid. Short-term lease payments and payments for leases of low-value assets are reported as operating outflows.

7.6.7.14.        Financial Assets

7.6.7.14.1.        Offsetting financial instruments

Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount reported in the consolidated statement of financial position when there is a legally enforceable right to offset the recognized amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or realize the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

7.6.7.14.2.        Classification

The Group classifies its financial assets according to the following measurement categories:

105

---

 

Publicly traded equity securities are measured at FVPL while the Group has made the irrevocable election to measure equity securities with no readily determinable fair value at FVOCI, with subsequent changes in fair value not recycled through earnings. Derivative instruments that are not designated as hedging instruments (trading derivatives) are measured at FVPL. Debt instruments, loans and receivables are measured at amortized cost or FVOCI, depending on the Group’s business model in managing the assets. When the contractual terms of cash flows do not solely correspond to payments of principal and interest (the “SPPI criterion”), the financial asset is mandatorily measured at FVPL.

7.6.7.14.3.        Recognition and measurement

Regular purchases and sales of financial assets are recognized on the trade date — the date on which the Group commits to purchase or sell the asset. Investments are initially recognized at fair value plus transaction costs for all financial assets not carried at fair value through profit or loss. Financial assets carried at fair value through profit or loss are initially recognized at fair value, and transaction costs are expensed in the consolidated income statement. Financial assets are derecognized when the rights to receive cash flows from the investments have expired or have been transferred and the Group has transferred substantially all risks and rewards of ownership.

Debt instruments

Subsequent measurement of debt instruments depends on the Group’s business model for managing the asset and its cash flow characteristics. The contractual cash flows related to all debt instruments held by the Group meet the SPPI criterion. There are two measurement categories into which the Group classifies its debt instruments:

Equity securities

The Group subsequently measures all equity securities at fair value, except investments in  joint ventures, which corresponding accounting policies are described in Note 7.6.7.2. The Group’s has elected to irrevocably measure equity securities with no readily determinable fair value at FVOCI, with no subsequent reclassification of fair value gains and losses, including impairment, from equity to earnings following the derecognition of the financial assets.

Gains and losses arising from changes in the fair value of publicly traded equity securities, which are measured at FVPL, are presented in the consolidated income statement within “Other income” or “Other expenses” in the period in which they arise, when the transactions for such instruments are related to the Group’s operating activities. Gains and losses arising from changes in fair value of these financial assets not related to the operating activities of the Group were presented within “Finance income” and “Finance costs” in the consolidated income statement.

7.6.7.14.4.        Impairment of financial assets

The Group assesses on a forward-looking basis the expected credit losses associated with its debt instruments carried at amortized cost and FVOCI. The impairment methodology applied depends on whether there has been a

106

---

 

significant increase in credit risk. The impairment methodology by category of financial assets is further described in Note 7.6.36.

For trade receivables, the Group applies the simplified approach permitted by IFRS 9, which requires expected lifetime credit losses to be recognized from initial recognition of the receivables as further described in Note 7.6.18.

7.6.7.15.        Trade accounts receivable

Trade accounts receivable are amounts due from customers for goods sold or services rendered to third parties in the ordinary course of business. The accounts receivable are recognized initially at transaction price and subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method, less provision for expected credit losses. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use of a credit loss allowance, and the amount of the credit loss is recognized as “Selling, general and administrative” in the consolidated income statement. When a trade receivable is uncollectible, it is written-off against the impairment account for trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited against “selling, general and administrative” in the consolidated income statement. The impairment policies on trade receivables are further described in Note 7.6.36.

In the event of sales of receivables and factoring, the Group derecognizes the receivables and accounts for them as a sale only to the extent that the receivables have been transferred outside the consolidated group and the Group has transferred substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the receivables.

7.6.7.16.        Derivative financial instruments and hedging activities

Derivative financial instruments are classified as financial instruments measured at FVPL unless they are designated as effective hedging instruments. All derivatives are carried as assets when their fair values are positive and as liabilities when their fair values are negative.

Derivative financial instruments not designated as a hedge

The worldwide operations of the Group lead to an exposure to adverse movements in foreign currency exchange rates. The Group enters into foreign currency forward contracts and currency options to reduce its exposure to changes in exchange rates and the associated risk arising from the denomination of certain assets and liabilities in foreign currencies at the Group’s subsidiaries. In addition, forward contracts and currency options, including collars, are also used by the Group to reduce its exposure to U.S. dollar fluctuations in Euro-denominated forecasted intercompany transactions that cover a large part of research and development expenditures and certain corporate expenses incurred on behalf of STMicroelectronics International N.V. by subsidiaries. These intercompany transactions are not closely linked to ultimate transactions with third parties and consequently, these derivatives do not qualify as hedging instruments under the requirements of IFRS 9.

These derivative financial instruments are initially and subsequently recorded at fair value. Fair value adjustments and realized gains and losses are recognized in the consolidated income statement in the line “Other income” or “Other expenses”.

107

---

 

Derivative financial instruments designated as hedge

These instruments correspond to forward currency contracts and currency options, including collars, which are entered into by the Group to hedge exposure to foreign currency fluctuations.

For the purpose of hedge accounting, the hedging transactions are classified as cash flow hedge as they hedge exposure to variability in cash flows of highly probable forecasted transactions.

The following criteria must be in place before the Group applies hedge accounting:

To further reduce its exposure to U.S. dollar exchange rate fluctuations, the Group hedges a portion of its Euro-denominated forecasted intercompany purchases of products with underlying front-end manufacturing production costs of semi-finished goods incurred in Euros, since these transactions are considered highly probable to occur and are closely linked to ultimate transactions with third parties. Additionally, the Group hedges certain Singapore dollar-denominated manufacturing forecasted transactions.

These derivative financial instruments are initially recognized at fair value. The effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognized in other comprehensive income, while the ineffective portion, if any, is recognized in the consolidated income statement on the line “Other income” or “Other expenses”. The Group has elected to designate the full change in fair value, including the time value of options or combination of options, as the hedging instrument.

7.6.7.17.        Non-current assets held for sale

Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell. Costs to sell include incremental direct costs to transact the sale that would not have been incurred except for the decision to sell. Non-current assets and disposal groups are classified as held for sale if their carrying amounts will be recovered through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use. This condition is regarded as met only when the sale is highly probable and the asset or disposal group is available for immediate sale in its present condition. Management must be committed to the sale, which should be expected to qualify for recognition as a completed sale within one year from the date of classification.

Property, plant and equipment and intangible assets once classified as held for sale are not depreciated or amortized.

7.6.7.18.        Employee benefits

The Group operates various post-employment schemes, including both defined benefit and defined contribution pension plans.

108

---

 

Pension obligations

The Group sponsors various pension schemes for its employees. These schemes conform to local regulations and practices of the countries in which the Group operates. Defined benefit pension plans define amounts of pension benefits that employees will receive on retirement, usually dependent on one or more factors such as age, years of service and compensation. The liability recognized in the line “Employee benefits” in the consolidated statement of financial position in respect of defined benefit pension plans is the present value of the defined benefit obligation at the reporting date less the fair value of plan assets. Significant estimates are used in determining the assumptions incorporated in the calculation of the pension obligations, which is supported by input from independent actuaries. The defined benefit obligation is calculated annually using the projected unit credit method. The present value of the defined benefit obligation is determined by discounting the estimated future cash outflows using in most cases interest rates of high-quality corporate bonds that are denominated in the currency in which the benefits will be paid, and that have terms to maturity approximating the terms of the related pension obligation.

Actuarial gains and losses arising from experience adjustments and changes in actuarial assumptions are charged or credited to equity in other comprehensive income in the period in which they arise. Past service costs are recognized immediately in profit or loss.

For defined contribution plans, the Group pays contributions to publicly or privately administered pension insurance plans on a mandatory, contractual or voluntary basis. The Group has no further payment obligations once the contributions have been paid. The contributions are recognized as employee benefit expense when they are due. Prepaid contributions are recognized as an asset to the extent that a cash refund or a reduction in the future payments is available.

Other long-term employee benefits

The Group provides long-term employee benefits such as seniority awards in certain countries. The entitlement to these benefits is usually conditional on the employee completing a minimum service period. The expected costs of these benefits are accrued over the period of employment. Actuarial gains and losses arising from experience adjustments, and changes in actuarial assumptions, are charged or credited to earnings in the period of change. These obligations are valued annually with the assistance of independent qualified actuaries.

Termination benefits

Termination benefits are payable when employment is terminated by the Group before the normal retirement date, or whenever an employee accepts voluntary termination in exchange for these benefits. The Group recognizes termination benefits at the earlier of the following dates: (a) when the Group can no longer withdraw the offer of those benefits; and (b) when the entity recognizes costs for a restructuring that is within the scope of IAS 37 and involves the payment of termination benefits. In the case of an offer made to encourage voluntary leaves, the Group bases the measurement of termination benefits on the number of employees accepting the offer. Benefits falling due more than twelve months after the reporting date are discounted to present value.

Profit-sharing and bonus plans

The Group recognizes a liability and an expense for bonuses and profit-sharing plans when it is contractually obliged or where there is a past practice that has created a constructive obligation.

Share-based compensation

All the share plans of the Group are equity settled.

The fair value of the employee services received in exchange for the grant of share-based awards is recognized as an expense and as a corresponding increase in shareholders’ equity. The total amount to be expensed over the vesting period, which is the period over which all of the specified vesting conditions are to be satisfied, is determined by reference to the fair value of the awards granted at the date of grant, reduced by the present value of the dividends expected to be paid on the shares during the requisite service period. Non-market performance and service conditions are included in assumptions about the number of instruments that are expected to vest. Any applicable employee social charges are also expensed ratably over the same period as the share-based compensation expense.

109

---

 

At the end of each reporting period, the Group revises its estimates of the number of instruments that are expected to vest based on the non-market vesting conditions. It recognizes the impact of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the consolidated income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

7.6.7.19.        Financial Debt

Bank loans

Bank loans are recognized initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred, if any. They are subsequently stated at amortized cost; any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognized within “Finance costs” in the consolidated income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least twelve months after the reporting date.

Hybrid financial instruments

The Group issued in 2017 and 2020 convertible bonds that can be converted to share capital at the option of the holder and that are callable by the Group, in certain events and circumstances, but for which the number of shares to be issued does vary.

 

The issuer’s call option and the bondholder’s conversion option are embedded non-equity derivative instruments and are recognized separately from the debt host contract. Upon initial recognition, the derivatives are measured at fair value, and the debt is measured as a residual amount. The debt is subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method. The embedded derivatives are measured at fair value through profit and loss, with changes in fair value reported in the line “Finance costs” or “Finance income” in the consolidated income statement.

7.6.7.20.        Equity

Ordinary share capital

The Company has issued ordinary shares that are classified as equity. Incremental external costs that are directly attributable to the issuance of these shares are recognized in equity, net of tax.

Treasury shares

Own equity instruments which are acquired (treasury shares) are deducted from equity for the consideration paid including any directly attributable incremental costs (net of taxes). No gain or loss is recognized in the income statement on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of the Company’s own equity instruments.

Dividends on ordinary share capital

Dividends on ordinary shares are recognized as a liability and deducted from equity when they are approved by the Company’s shareholders.

Dividends for the year that are approved after the reporting date are dealt with as an event after the reporting date.

110

---

 

7.6.7.21.        Trade payables

Trade accounts payable are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the ordinary course of business from suppliers. Trade payables are recognized initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method when maturity of the payables exceeds one year.

7.6.7.22.        Provisions

Provisions for restructuring costs and legal claims are recognized when: the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events; it is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation; and the amount has been reliably estimated. Restructuring provisions primarily comprise provisions for employee termination payments. Provisions are not recognized for future operating losses.

If the effect of time value of money is material, provisions are discounted using a current pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and, when appropriate, the risk specific to the obligation. The increase in the provision due to passage of time is recognized as finance cost.

7.6.7.23.        Contingencies

The Group is subject to the possibility of loss contingencies arising in the ordinary course of business. These include but are not limited to: warranty cost on the products of the Group, breach of contract claims, claims for unauthorized use of third party intellectual property, tax claims and provisions for specifically identified income tax exposures as well as claims for environmental damages. In determining loss contingencies, the Group considers the likelihood of a loss of an asset or the incurrence of a liability as well as the ability to reasonably estimate the amount of such loss or liability. The Group regularly evaluates claims to determine whether provisions need to be recorded based on the most current information available to the Group. Changes in these evaluations could result in adverse, material impact on the Group’s results of operations, cash flows or its financial position for the period in which they occur.

7.6.7.24.        Segment reporting

Operating segments are defined as a component of the entity that (i) engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur expenses, (ii) whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the entity’s Chief Operating Decision Maker (Sole member of Managing Board), under the extensive oversight of the Company’s Supervisory Board, to make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segments and assess its performance and (iii) for which discrete financial information is available.

For the computation of the segments’ internal financial measurements, the Group uses certain internal rules of allocation for the costs not directly chargeable to the segments, including cost of sales, selling, general and administrative expenses and part of research and development expenses. In compliance with the Group’s internal policies, certain costs are not allocated to the segments. These costs comprise unused capacity charges, including reduced manufacturing activity due to COVID-19 pandemic, impairment, restructuring charges and other related closure costs, management reorganization expenses, phase-out and start-up costs of certain manufacturing facilities, and other unallocated expenses such as: strategic and special research and development programs, certain corporate-level operating expenses, patent claims and litigations, and other costs that are not allocated to product groups, as well as operating earnings of other products.

7.6.8. Critical accounting estimates and judgments

Estimates and judgments are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under circumstances. The COVID-19 outbreak declared by the World Health Organization in March 2020 and the measures taken worldwide by governments to limit the spread of the pandemic have generated uncertainties on future economic conditions, with a direct impact on the Group’s forward-looking growth and financial outlook. Despite these uncertainties and some markets being hit by closures and lockdowns extended in some regions, the Group did not report in 2020 major disruptions in the supply chain or in its operations. The Group returned to normal operations in the second quarter of 2020, with solid fundamentals and a strong capital structure, while taking the necessary measures to protect the health and safety of its employees. There are no conditions and events, despite the COVID-19 pandemic, which raise substantial doubt about the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern, in light with: its current financial

111

---

 

condition, including its liquidity sources; its obligations – due or anticipated; the funds necessary to maintain the Group’s operations; and other conditions and events, if any.

The uncertainties arisen from these unprecedented business conditions have been factored in the critical accounting estimates and judgements made in preparing these consolidated financial statements, on the basis of all known consequences of the pandemic and reasonable and supportable forecast of future conditions. However, the impact on future economic performance cannot be fully determined and is closely monitored on an on-going basis by means of different scenarios, which are highly dependent on the further development of the pandemic.

No events or changes in circumstances, including the COVID-19 pandemic, indicated in 2020 that the carrying amount of major tangible assets, including lease right-of-use assets, might not be recoverable or that useful lives might not be appropriate. The Group did not enter into any significant rent concessions as a direct consequence of the COVID-19 pandemic or significant modifications to existing lease agreements. The Group concluded that no material impairment was to be recorded on its tangible assets as at December 31, 2020. The Group also reviewed the recoverability of its intangible assets, including capitalized development costs. On the latter, the Group recorded a total impairment charge of $110 million. Refer to note 7.6.13 for further details on amounts capitalized, amortized and impaired during the year.

There is no major contingency to be reported as at December 31, 2020 related to the COVID-19 pandemic. The tax loss carryforwards capitalized as deferred tax assets are deemed recoverable in all major tax jurisdictions. To consider any potentially increased risk of default on accounts receivable, the Group adjusted the expected credit loss assumptions to reflect current conditions, reasonable and supportable forecast of future conditions and how current uncertainties due to the COVID-19 pandemic may impact customers’ and other debtors’ future credit quality. This reassessment did not have any material effect on the expected credit loss allowances reported by the Group on its major categories of financial assets as at December 31, 2020.

The Group makes estimates and assumptions concerning the future. The resulting accounting estimates will, by definition, seldom equal the related actual results. Estimates and assumptions that have a significant risk of causing material adjustments to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are described below.

7.6.8.1.        Right-of-use assets and lease liabilities

Significant assumptions and judgements may be made in applying the requirements of lease accounting, such as the exercise of extension or renewal options and the determination of applicable discount rates.

The Group determines the lease term as the non-cancellable term of the lease, together with any periods covered by an option to extend the lease if it is reasonably certain to be exercised, or any periods covered by an option to terminate the lease, if it is reasonably certain not to be exercised.

The Group has elected not to recognize right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for some leases of low-value and for leases which term ends within 12 months with no purchase option at the date of initial application (primarily for certain office and IT small equipment). The Group leases land, buildings, cars and certain equipment (including IT equipment) which have remaining lease terms between less than one year and 49 years. Certain lease contracts contain options to extend the leases by up to 30 years. The Group applies judgement in evaluating if and when it is reasonably certain for the Group to exercise that option. In addition, the Group made an accounting policy election for all the asset classes to not account for short-term leases, as described in note 7.6.7.13. The Group considers all relevant factors that create an economic incentive to exercise any existing option to extend or renew a lease arrangement. After the commencement date, the Group reassesses the lease term if there is a significant event or change in circumstances that is within its control and affects its ability to exercise or not exercise the option. In most cases, the Group has included the extension or renewal option as part of the lease term of plants, buildings and equipment when the controlled use of the leased assets is significant and critical to its operations. These leases generally include a non-cancellable period and there will be a significant negative effect on the normal course of the Group’s business, should a replacement not be readily available.

112

---

 

In calculating the present value of lease payments, the rate implicit in the lease should be used whenever that rate is readily determinable. In most cases, this rate is not readily determinable and the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate, which is derived from information available at the lease commencement date. The Group gives consideration to its recent debt issuance as well as publicly available data for instruments with similar characteristics when calculating its incremental borrowing rates. Due to immateriality of any intra-quarter discount rate changes, the Group determines the discount rate based on the mid-quarter date.

Lease term and discount rate are as follows:

 

 

7.6.8.2.        Income taxes

The Group is required to make estimates and judgments in determining income tax for the period, comprising current and deferred income tax. The Group needs to assess the income tax expected to be paid or the income tax benefit expected to be received related to the current year income (loss) in each tax jurisdiction and recognizes deferred income tax for temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amount in the consolidated financial statements, except when the initial recognition exception applies, as described in note 7.6.7.7. Furthermore, the Group is required to assess all material open income tax positions in all tax jurisdictions to determine any uncertain tax positions, and to record a provision for those, if any.

The Group is also required to assess the likelihood of recovery of its deferred tax assets originated by the net operating losses carried forward. This assessment requires the exercise of judgment with respect to, among other things, benefits that could be realized from available tax strategies and future taxable income, as well as other positive and negative factors. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets is dependent upon, among other things, the Group’s ability to generate future taxable income that is sufficient to utilize loss carry-forwards or tax credits before their expiration or the Group’s ability to implement prudent and feasible tax planning strategies.

As of December 31, 2020, the Group reported deferred tax assets of $487 million (2019: $391 million) on the consolidated statement of financial position. A significant portion of these deferred tax assets was recorded in relation to net operating losses incurred in certain tax jurisdictions. These net operating losses may not be realizable before their expiration, unless the Group is capable of identifying favorable tax strategies.

The Group could reduce the amount of total deferred tax assets, resulting in a decrease in the total assets and, consequently, in equity, if the estimates of projected future taxable income and benefits from available tax strategies are reduced as a result of a change in the assessment or due to other factors, or if changes in current tax regulations are enacted that impose restrictions on the timing or extent of the Group’s ability to utilize net operating losses and tax credit carry-forwards in the future. Likewise, a change in the tax rates applicable in the various jurisdictions or unfavorable outcomes of any ongoing tax audits could have a material impact on the future tax provisions in the periods in which these changes could occur.

The Group operates in many jurisdictions with highly complex and varied tax regimes. Management applies professional judgement in assessing whether relevant tax authorities will accept reported tax treatments under tax law. Those uncertainties may arise when tax laws are not clear or not consistently understood, which generates ambiguity in the tax law interpretations and application. Those uncertainties are particularly present in tax jurisdictions or tax regimes where the expected amount to be paid or the expected tax benefit to be recognized arise from complex, lengthy and technical negotiations or require possible settlements involving a high degree of subjectivity and discretion.

Assumptions and estimates used in the assessment of uncertainties over income tax treatments include, but are not limited to: whether certain income tax treatments are considered jointly or separately when assessing their degree of uncertainty; the assumptions the Group makes about the examination of tax treatments by taxing authorities; how the Group determines taxable profits, deductions taken on tax returns, unused tax losses, unused tax credits, applicable tax rates, the probability of acceptance of these income tax treatments by the relevant taxing authorities

113

---

 

or on the contrary to what extent the income tax treatments as applied by the Group may be disallowed, including the outcome of unresolved disputes or settlements on existing tax audits; and consideration of changes in facts and circumstances requiring a reassessment of applied judgments and assumptions.

As of December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019, the Group reported unrecognized tax benefits for uncertain tax treatments totaling $48 million, respectively. It is reasonably possible that certain of these uncertainties over tax treatments could increase within the next 12 months due to changes in facts and circumstances, such as ongoing tax audits or taxing authority new decisions. The Group is not able to make an estimate of the range of the reasonably possible change. Accrued interest and penalties amounted to $7 million and $6 million as at December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019, respectively. The tax years that remain open for review in the Group’s major tax jurisdictions, including France, Italy, United States and India, are from 1997 to 2020.

7.6.8.3.        Impairment of non-financial assets

An impairment exists when the carrying value of an asset or cash generating unit exceeds its recoverable amount, which is the higher of its fair value less costs of disposal and its value in use. The fair value less costs of disposal calculation is based on observable market prices less incremental costs of disposing the asset, in order to measure the price at which the asset could be sold in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. In case observable market prices are not available, fair value less costs of disposal could be measured based on data from binding sales transactions in arm’s length transactions of similar assets. For the current year’s annual impairment test, the recoverable amount of the CGUs was determined based on value-in-use calculations. Non-financial assets are tested or reviewed for impairment in accordance with accounting policies stated in Notes 7.6.7.1, 7.6.7.6, 7.6.7.11 and 7.6.7.12. Considerable management judgment is necessary to identify impairment indicators and to estimate future sales and expenses, which underlie the discounted future cash flow projections. Factors such as changes in the planned use of property, plant and equipment, the closure of facilities, the change in the use or in the market acceptance of certain new technologies, could result in shortened useful lives or impairment charges to be recognized in the period in which such determination is made.

7.6.8.4.        Pension obligations

The Group sponsors various pension schemes for its employees. The expense incurred under the defined benefit pension plans is based upon statistical and actuarial calculations and is impacted by assumptions on discount rates used to reach the present value of future pension liabilities, expected return that will be made on existing pension assets, future salary increases as well as future pension increases and statistical-based assumptions covering future withdrawals of participants from the plan and estimates of life expectancy. Refer to note 7.6.23.

The actuarial assumptions used may differ materially from actual results due to changes in market and economic conditions, higher or lower withdrawal rates or longer or shorter life spans of participants and may significantly impact the amount of pension costs and pension liabilities to be recognized in the period in which such determination is made.

7.6.8.5.        Capitalized development costs

Development costs are capitalized in accordance with the accounting policy described in notes 7.6.7.6. and 7.6.7.11. Initial capitalization of costs is based on management’s judgment that economic profitability and technological feasibility are confirmed, usually when a product or technology has reached a certain maturity level in product life cycle model used by the Group. In determining the amounts to be capitalized, management makes assumptions regarding the expected future cash generation of a project and the expected period of benefits. As of December 31, 2020, the carrying amount of capitalized development costs was $849 million (2019: $892 million). Refer to note 7.6.13 for disclosure of amounts capitalized, amortized and impaired during the period.

7.6.8.6.        Inventory obsolescence reserves and normal manufacturing capacity thresholds

Inventory is stated at the lower of cost or net realizable value. Cost is based on the weighted average cost by adjusting the standard cost to approximate actual manufacturing costs on a periodic basis; therefore, the cost is dependent on the Group’s manufacturing performance. In case of underutilization of the manufacturing facilities, the Group estimates the costs associated with the excess capacity. These costs are not included in the valuation of

114

---

 

inventory but are charged directly to cost of sales. For the year ended December 31, 2020, the unused capacity charges amounted to $153 million, including reduced manufacturing activity due to COVID-19 pandemic, compared to $65 million for the year ended December 31, 2019. Net realizable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business, less predictable costs of completion, disposal and transportation. Refer to note 7.6.17.

The Group performs, on a continuous basis, inventory write-offs of finished products. The valuation of inventory requires to estimate a reserve for obsolete inventory as well as inventory that is not of saleable quality. Provisions for obsolescence are estimated for excess uncommitted inventories based on the previous quarters sales, order backlog and production plans. To the extent that future negative market conditions generate order backlog cancellations and declining sales, or if future conditions are less favorable than the projected revenue assumptions, the Group could be required to record additional inventory reserve, which would have a negative impact on its gross margin.

115

---

 

7.6.9. Investments in subsidiaries

The following table lists the Company’s consolidated subsidiaries and its percentage ownership as of December 31, 2020:

 

116

---

 

 

New subsidiaries correspond to acquisitions concluded in 2020 as described in note 7.6.10. In addition, the Group incurred certain legal mergers and liquidations that are not significant to the consolidation perimeter.

 

7.6.10. Business Acquisitions

2020 Acquisitions

In the second quarter of 2020, the Group closed the acquisition of 80% of the share capital of French GaN innovator Exagan, while the risks and rewards of owning the noncontrolling interests have been obtained by the Group. Exagan’s expertise in epitaxy, product development and application know-how will broaden and accelerate ST’s power GaN roadmap and business for automotive, industrial and consumer applications. Exagan acquisition has been accounted for as a business combination, with the Group getting a present and effective controlling interest of 100%. The activities of this business are included in the Automotive and Discrete Group (ADG) reportable segment.

In the third quarter of 2020, the Group closed the acquisitions of the entire share capital of Ultra Wide Band specialist BeSpoon, of the cellular IoT connectivity assets of Riot Micro and of the radio-frequency assets of SOMOS. Through these transactions, the Group will further strengthen its offer for wireless connectivity in the roadmap for STM32 microcontrollers and secure MCUs. These three acquisitions have been accounted for as business combinations. The activities of these businesses are included in the Microcontrollers and Digital ICs Group (MDG) reportable segment.

In the fourth quarter of 2020, the Group completed another minor acquisition in the Microcontrollers and Digital ICs Group (MDG) reportable segment. This acquisition has been accounted for as a business combination.

As of December 31, 2020, the purchase price allocation of the above business acquisitions was subject to finalization. The preliminary fair value at acquisition date of the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed were as follows:

 

As of the acquisition date, the total consideration transferred in relation to the business acquisitions concluded in 2020 consisted of cash paid of $104 million, before cash acquired of $1 million, deferred consideration of $18 million and contingent consideration of $117 million. The fair value of the consideration transferred was determined by the Group with the assistance of a third party as part of the preliminary purchase price allocation. The contingent consideration comprised variable payment components, contingent upon meeting certain financial (such as cumulative sales volumes and/or revenues) and/or technical targets (such as market maturity of products and other products development milestones) by the acquired businesses. The potential undiscounted amount payable under these acquisition agreements range between $0 million in the event of non-fulfilment of the above-mentioned targets and approximately $130 million, should these targets be met. The fair value measurement of the acquisition-date contingent consideration was based on the probability that the milestones defining the variable components of the consideration will be achieved and was estimated by calculating the present value of the future expected cash

117

---

 

flows. The estimates were based on discount rates ranging between 1.55% and 4.07%, reflecting the term-specific cost of debt plus, where appropriate, an additional risk premium.

 

As at December 31, 2020, deferred consideration amounted to $20 million and contingent consideration amounted to $123 million, both reported in the line “Other non-current financial liabilities” in the consolidated statement of financial position. The fair value measurement of the contingent consideration corresponds to a Level 3 fair value hierarchy measurement and is further described in Note 7.6.15.5.

 

The amount paid of $103 million for the above-mentioned business acquisitions was reported in the line “Payment for business acquisitions, net of cash acquired” in the consolidated statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2020.

 

2019 Acquisitions

 

In 2019, the Group acquired the Swedish SiC wafer manufacturer Norstel AB (“Norstel”). This acquisition extends the Group’s SiC ecosystem and strengthens the Group’s flexibility to serve fast growing automotive and industrial applications. The purchase consideration, net of $1 million of cash acquired, was funded with available cash. The full acquisition was executed in two stages. On February 6, 2019, the Group acquired 55% of Norstel’s common stock, obtaining control over the entity. The fair value of the business as a whole was estimated at $138 million, of which $77 million was paid by the Group for its majority stake, with an option to acquire the remaining 45% at a later date, subject to certain conditions. On December 2, 2019, the Group exercised its option to acquire the remaining 45% stake. The Group paid $51 million to complete the closing of the full acquisition. An amount of $10 million was held in an escrow account as protection for any claims, and reported as current restricted cash in the consolidated statement of financial position as at December 31, 2019. The escrow amount was released to the seller in 2020 and the amount paid was reported in the line “Payment for business acquisitions, net of cash acquired” in the consolidated statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2020.

 

Norstel acquisition was accounted for as a business combination. The activities of this business are included in the Automotive and Discrete Group (ADG) reportable segment. The purchase price allocation was finalized in 2020. The Group recognized against goodwill a deferred tax liability of $18 million associated with the acquired technology in process, as well as a deferred tax asset of $4 million arising from Norstel’s net operating losses. The Group revised comparative information accordingly, reflected in its consolidated statement of financial position for the year ended December 31, 2019. The final fair value of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed from Norstel were as follows:

 

 

 

 

 

118

---

 

7.6.11. Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment consisted of the following:

 

 

 

 

119

---

 

 

Changes in the net carrying amount of property, plant and equipment are detailed as follows:

 

 

 

In the year ended December 31, 2020, capital investment funding totaled $8 million (2019: $11 million) and were accounted for as a reduction of the gross value of the related tangible assets. The impact of capital funding on depreciation expense for the year ended December 31, 2020 is a reduction of $11 million (2019: $9 million). In 2020, the Group sold property, plant and equipment for cash proceeds of $4 million (2019: $7 million).

 

 

 

 

120

---

 

 

7.6.12. Leases

 

A lease contract is a contract, or part of a contract, that conveys the right to control the use of identified property, plant, or equipment (an identified asset) for a period of time in exchange for consideration. The Group determines if an arrangement is a lease at inception. Leases are included in right-of-use assets within plant, property and equipment. Current lease liabilities are included in current financial liabilities, while non-current lease liabilities are included in non-current financial liabilities in the Group’s consolidated statement of financial position.

Right-of-use assets represent the Group’s rights to use an underlying asset for the lease term and lease liabilities represent the Group’s obligations to make lease payments arising from the lease. Right-of-use assets and liabilities are recognized at the lease commencement date based on the estimated present value of lease payments over the lease term.

The right-of-use asset is a nonmonetary asset while the lease liability is a monetary liability. When accounting for a lease that is denominated in a foreign currency, the lease liability is re-measured using the current exchange rate, while the right-of-use asset is measured using the exchange rate as of the commencement date.

The Group leases land, buildings, cars and certain equipment (including IT equipment) which have remaining lease terms between less than one year and 49 years. Certain lease contracts contain options to extend the leases by up to 30 years, which the Group has included in the lease term when it is reasonably certain for the Group to exercise that option. In addition, the Group made an accounting policy election for all the asset classes to not account for short-term and low-value leases. A short-term lease is defined as a lease that, at the commencement date, has a lease term of 12 months or less and does not include an option to purchase the underlying asset. The short-term lease election can only be made at the commencement date. Expenses related to short-term and low-value leases were not significant in 2020 and 2019. Cash outflows for leases totaled $67 million for the year ended December 31, 2020 (2019: $66 million).

Variable lease payments that depend on an index or a rate are included in the lease payments and are measured using the prevailing index or rate at the measurement date (January 1, 2019 for initial measurement of the leases existing at that date and commencement date for subsequent lease contracts). Potential future increases in variable lease payments based on an index or rate are not included in the lease liability until they take effect. When adjustments to lease payments based on an index or rate take effect, the lease liability is reassessed and adjusted against the right-of-use asset. Changes to index and rate-based variable lease payments are recognized in income statement in the period of the change.

Maturities of lease liabilities are as follows:

 

 

 

121

---

 

 

A reconciliation of opening and closing right-of-use assets is provided below:

 

 

Reported amounts related to lease arrangements are described in Notes 7.6.11, 7.6.15 and 7.6.30.

 

7.6.13. Intangible assets

Intangible assets consisted of the following:

 

122

---

 

 

 

 

 

As described in Note 7.6.10, the business acquisitions completed in 2020 resulted in the recognition of technologies of $108 million, reported on the line “Purchased technologies & licenses”, $10 million of technology in progress reported on the line “Technologies and software in progress” and $2 million of other intangible assets reported on the line “Other intangible assets”.

 

Furthermore, the 2019 acquisition of Norstel resulted in the recognition of technology in progress for $86 million reported on the line “Technologies and software in progress” as at December 31, 2019. The acquired technology was reported on the line “Purchased technologies & licenses” as at December 31, 2020.

 

In the year ended December 31, 2020, specific project-related funding totaled $29 million (2019: $25 million) and were accounted for as a reduction of the gross value of related capitalized development costs.

 

Changes in the net carrying amount are detailed as follows:

 

 

For the year ended December 31, 2020, additions of intangible assets amounted to $394 million (2019: $364 million).

123

---

 

The 2020 amortization expense included $242 million (2019: $269 million) in costs of sales, $45 million (2019: $39 million) in research and development and $20 million (2019: $20 million) in selling, general and administrative.

Development costs capitalized on projects that are still in progress and therefore not yet amortized amounted to $561 million as at December 2020 (2019: $543 million). Following the annual impairment test performed in the second half of 2020, no impairment was recorded on intangible assets not ready for use, excluding capitalized development costs as detailed below, for any of the Group’s CGUs. The key-assumptions used for value-in-use calculations are based on the most recent budget of each CGU tested. Management determined budgeted gross margin based on past performance, and its expectations for the market development.

The impairment and write-offs for 2020 amounted to $114 million, recorded in costs of sales for $110 million, resulting from write-offs of capitalized development costs related to certain projects that were cancelled, and in research and development for $4 million related to acquired licenses dedicated exclusively to certain development projects that were cancelled, while no alternative future use was identified internally. The impairment and write-offs for 2019 amounted to $146 million, recorded in costs of sales for $142 million, resulting from write-offs of capitalized development costs related to certain projects that were cancelled, and in research and development for $4 million related to acquired licenses and technologies for which it was determined that they had no alternative future use.

7.6.14. Goodwill

Goodwill split by operating segment is as follows:

 

 

 

* Comparative amounts have been revised to reflect measurement-period adjustment reported on certain business acquisitions as detailed in note 7.6.10.

As at December 31, 2020, the gross value of goodwill was $357 million (2019: $203 million) and the accumulated impairment was $45 million (2019: $45 million).

As described in Note 7.6.10, the 2020 business acquisitions resulted in the recognition of $135 million in goodwill which has been included in the ADG and MDG segments to align the goodwill of the acquired businesses with the segments for which the related activities are reported.

Pursuant to the finalization of Norstel purchase price allocation, the Group revised comparative information to reflect an increase in goodwill of $14 million in its consolidated statement of financial position for the year ended December 31, 2019 as detailed in note 7.6.10.

Goodwill is allocated to the Group’s CGUs. The recoverable amount of a CGU is determined based on value-in-use calculations. These calculations use cash flow projections based on financial budgets and management’s best estimates about future developments, as well as market and customer assumptions.

The Group tests whether goodwill has suffered any impairment on an annual basis during the second half of each year. In the 2020 and 2019 reporting periods, no goodwill impairment was recorded for any of the Group’s CGUs. For the annual impairment test, the key-assumptions used for value-in-use calculations are based on the most recent five-year plan of each CGU tested. The average perpetuity growth rate was 1.5% and discount rate was 11% pre-tax and inferred from the observable volatility of share prices for comparable companies in the semiconductor industry. These assumptions have been used, as applicable, for the analysis of each CGU within the operating segments. Management determined budgeted gross margin based on past performance, and its expectations for the market

124

---

 

development. The average yearly growth rates used are consistent with the forecast included in industry reports. The discount rates used are pre-tax and reflect specific risks relating to the relevant CGUs. No reasonably possible change in key assumptions would lead to a significant impairment loss.

 

 

 

125

---

 

7.6.15. Other financial assets and financial liabilities

7.6.15.1.        Other financial assets

 

 

Risk management policies relating to credit risk exposure to derivatives counterparties are further described in Note 7.6.36.

126

---

 

Movements in other financial assets (excluding derivatives) recorded in 2020 are summarized as follows:

 

 

Movements in other financial assets (excluding derivatives) recorded in 2019 are summarized as follows:

 

 

Investments held in debt securities

As at December 31, 2020, the Group held $133 million of U.S. Treasury Bonds, all transferred to a financial institution with high credit quality. These transactions were concluded in compliance with the Group’s policy to optimize the return on its short-term interest rate investments, which requires placement with institutions with high credit rating. The Group, acting as the securities lender, does not hold any collateral on the unsecured securities lending transactions. The Group retains effective control on the transferred securities. U.S. Treasury Bonds totaling $200 million matured in 2019. The amount was reported as “Proceeds from matured marketable securities” in the consolidated statement of cash flows for the period ended December 31, 2019.

The debt securities had an average rating of Aaa/AA+/AAA from Moody’s, S&P and Fitch, respectively, with a weighted average maturity of 0.5 years. The debt securities were reported as current assets on the line “Other current financial assets” on the consolidated statement of financial position as at December 31, 2020 since they represented investments of funds available for current operations. The bonds were measured at FVOCI as at December 31, 2020. This fair value measurement corresponds to a Level 1 fair value hierarchy measurement.

127

---

 

The Group applies a forward-looking expected credit loss (ECL) approach on all debt financial assets not held at FVPL. For debt securities at FVOCI, the ECL is based on a 12-month expected credit loss basis. The 12-month ECL is the portion of lifetime ECLs that results from default events on a financial instrument that are possible within 12 months after the reporting date. Since the Group’s quoted debt instruments at FVOCI comprise solely U.S. Treasury debt securities, the Group has considered that the ECLs on these investments were insignificant.

Investments held in equity securities

As at December 31, 2020, the Group also had investments in quoted equity securities for an aggregate value of $13 million, measured at FVPL (December 31, 2019: $12 million).

As at December 31, 2020, the Group also reported other trading financial assets for an aggregate value of $12 million (December 31, 2019: $11 million).

The Group irrevocably elected to measure at FVOCI unquoted equity securities for an aggregate value of $10 million (December 31, 2019: $12 million). Since these are strategic investments, the Group considers this classification, which implies that changes in fair value are not subsequently recycled to earnings, to be more relevant.

The changes in fair value reported on the Group’s investments held in equity securities for the years ended December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019 were immaterial.

Short-term deposits

To optimize the return yield on its short-term investments, the Company invested $581 million of available cash in short-term deposits as at December 31, 2020. These short-term deposits had a maturity beyond three months and no significant risk of changes in fair value and are reported in “Short-term deposits” in the consolidated statement of financial position.

 

7.6.15.2.        Other financial liabilities

 

 

128

---

 

Risk management policies relating to credit risk exposure to derivatives counterparties are further described in Note 7.6.36. Lease financial liabilities are further described in Note 7.6.12.

7.6.15.3.        Interest-bearing loans and borrowings

 

 

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings are denominated in the following currencies:

 

 

The European Investment Bank’s loans denominated in Euros, but drawn in US dollar, are classified as US dollar denominated debt.

Aggregate contractual maturities of interest-bearing loans and borrowings outstanding, excluding repayments of coupons and interests, are as follows:

 

129

---

 

 

The difference between the total aggregated future maturities in the preceding table and the total carrying amount of long-term debt is due to unamortized debt discount and issuance costs on the dual tranche senior unsecured convertible bonds.

Senior convertible bonds

On July 3, 2017, the Company issued $1,500 million in principal amount of dual tranche senior unsecured convertible bonds (Tranche A for $750 million and Tranche B for $750 million), due 2022 and 2024, respectively. Tranche A bonds were issued at 101.265% as zero-coupon bonds while Tranche B bonds were issued at par and bear a 0.25% per annum nominal interest, payable semi-annually. The conversion price at issuance was $20.54, equivalent to a 37.5% premium on both tranches, which corresponds to 9,737 equivalent shares per each $200,000 bond par value. The bonds are convertible by the bondholders or are callable by the issuer upon certain conditions, on a net-share settlement basis, except if the issuer elects a full-cash or full-share conversion as an alternative settlement. The net proceeds from the bond offering were $1,502 million, after deducting issuance costs payable by the Group.

The issuer’s call option and the holder’s conversion option have been identified as embedded non-equity derivative instruments, resulting in the recognition of the options separately from the debt host contract. Upon initial recognition, the derivatives were measured at fair value based on the income approach, the debt being determined as a residual amount of the $1.5 billion total proceeds. The value of the issuer’s call option was deemed to be nil at initial recognition. The value of the holder’s conversion option was estimated at $248 million at issuance date, which determined the initial recognition of the liability component at $1,261 million before allocation of issuance costs. The fair value measurement of the embedded derivative instruments corresponded to a Level 3 fair value hierarchy measurement. The Group elected to allocate issuance costs, totaling $7 million, to the debt component. The debt was subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method.

The call option available to the Company for the early redemption of Tranche A was exercised in July 2020. As a consequence, bondholders exercised their conversion rights on Tranche A. As the Company elected to net-share settle the bonds, each conversion exercised by the bondholders followed the process defined in the original terms and conditions of the senior unsecured convertible bonds, which determined the actual number of shares to be transferred upon each conversion. The Company settled the bonds upon conversion, by redeeming through cash the $750 million principal amount and by settling the residual consideration through the delivery of 11.4 million treasury shares. The net-share settlement was fully completed as of October 1, 2020. The consideration transferred in shares was a non-cash item and, as such, was not reported in the consolidated statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2020. The Company allocated the total consideration transferred between the carrying amount of the debt and the non-equity derivative instruments, by measuring at fair value the non-equity derivative instruments prior to settlement. Tranche A liability component, net of unamortized issuance costs, as measured at amortized cost prior to settlement, amounted to $712 million. The holder’s conversion option totaled $341 million and was measured based on the intrinsic value of the option. The fair value measurement of the non-equity embedded derivative instruments and the extinguishment of the liability component against the $750 million cash paid generated a charge of $64 million reported on the line “Finance costs” on the consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, 2020.

The liability component and the holder’s conversion option of Tranche B, which original maturity is July 3, 2024, were reported as current liabilities on the lines “Interest-bearing loans and borrowings – current portion” and “Other current financial liabilities”, respectively, on the consolidated statement of financial position as of December 31, 2020, since bondholders of Tranche B bonds will have full conversion rights starting July 26, 2021. The issuer’s call option of Tranche B was reported on the line “Other current financial assets” on the consolidated statement of financial position as of December 31, 2020.

The embedded derivatives are measured at fair value through profit and loss, with the changes in fair value being immediately reported in earnings. The value of the conversion option of Tranche B was $676 million as at December 31, 2020 (2019: $380 million), which generated a change in fair value of $296 million reported on the line “Finance costs” on the consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, 2020. The value of the issuer’s call option of Tranche B was $61 million as at December 31, 2020 (2019: $22 million), which generated a

130

---

 

change in fair value of $38 million reported on the line “Finance income” on the consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, 2020.

On August 4, 2020, the Company issued $1,500 million in principal amount of dual tranche senior unsecured convertible bonds (Tranche A for $750 million and Tranche B for $750 million), due 2025 and 2027, respectively. Tranche A bonds were issued at 105.8% as zero-coupon bonds while Tranche B bonds were issued at 104.5% as zero-coupon bonds. The conversion price at issuance was $43.62 for Tranche A equivalent to a 47.5% conversion premium and $45.10 for Tranche B, equivalent to a 52.5% conversion premium. These conversion features correspond to an equivalent of 4,585 shares per each Tranche A bond $200,000 par value and an equivalent of 4,435 shares per each Tranche B bond $200,000 par value. The bonds are convertible by the bondholders or are callable by the issuer upon certain conditions, on a net-share settlement basis, except if the issuer elects a full-cash or full-share conversion as an alternative settlement. The net proceeds from the bond offering were $1,567 million, after deducting issuance costs payable by the Group.

The issuer’s call option and the holder’s conversion option have been identified as embedded non-equity derivative instruments, resulting in the recognition of the options separately from the debt host contract. Upon initial recognition, the derivatives were measured at fair value based on the income approach, the debt being determined as a residual amount of the $1.5 billion total proceeds. The value of the issuer’s call option was deemed to be nil at initial recognition. The value of the holder’s conversion option was estimated at $219 million at issuance date, which determined the initial recognition of the liability component at $1,358 million before allocation of issuance costs. The fair value measurement of the embedded derivative instruments corresponded to a Level 3 fair value hierarchy measurement, which is further described in note 7.6.15.5. The Group elected to allocate issuance costs, totaling $10 million, to the debt component. The debt was subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method.

Reconciliation of liabilities arising from financing activities

The reconciliation for the year ended December 31, 2020 is as follows:

 

 

*”Other non-current financial liabilities” reported above do not include deferred and contingent consideration, as they relate to business acquisitions. They are further described in Note 7.6.10.

** ”Other current financial liabilities” reported above correspond to the current portion of the lease liability for an amount of $54 million and to the $676 million bondholders’ embedded conversion option on Tranche B of the Company’s convertible debt issued on July 3, 2017. Derivatives are not reported in the above table as they relate to operating activities. Lease financial liabilities are further described in Note 7.6.12 and convertible bonds issued in 2017 are further described in Note 7.6.15.3.

 

131

---

 

The reconciliation for the year ended December 31, 2019 is as follows:

 

 

* ”Other current financial liabilities” reported above correspond to the current portion of the lease liability for an amount of $55 million and to the $330 million bondholders’ embedded conversion option on Tranche A of the Company’s convertible debt issued on July 3, 2017. Derivatives are not reported in the above table as they relate to operating activities. Lease financial liabilities are further described in Note 7.6.12 and convertible bonds issued in 2017 are further described in Note 7.6.15.3.

Credit facilities

The Group’s long-term debt contained standard conditions but does not impose minimum financial ratios. The Group had unutilized committed credit facilities with core relationship banks totaling $1.2 billion as of December 31, 2020, including a €500 million long-term line signed with the EIB in the first half of 2020, undrawn as at December 31, 2020. Out of the €500 million undrawn as at December 31, 2020, an amount of €335 million was drawn in February 2021.

The Group also had three long-term amortizing credit facilities with the European Investment Bank as part of R&D funding programs. The first one, signed on September 27, 2010, a €350 million multi-currency loan for R&D programs in Europe, was drawn mainly in U.S. dollars for an amount of $321 million and only partially in Euros for an amount of €100 million. The outstanding amount as at December 31, 2019 was fully repaid in 2020. The second one, signed on March 12, 2013, a €350 million multi-currency loan which also supported R&D programs, was drawn in U.S. dollars for $471 million, of which $59 million was outstanding as at December 31, 2020. The third one, signed in August 2017 amounted to €500 million, in relation to R&D and capital expenditures in the European Union for the years 2017 and 2018. The entire amount was fully drawn in Euros corresponding to $520 million outstanding as at December 31, 2020.

7.6.15.4.        Hedging activities and derivatives

Derivative instruments not designated as hedge

The Group conducts its business on a global basis in various major international currencies. As a result, the Group is exposed to adverse movements in foreign currency exchange rates, primarily with respect to the Euro. Foreign exchange risk mainly arises from future commercial transactions and recognized assets and liabilities at the Group’s subsidiaries. The Group enters into currency forward contracts to reduce its exposure to changes in exchange rates and the associated risk arising from the denomination of certain assets and liabilities in foreign currencies at the Group’s subsidiaries. These instruments do not qualify as hedging instruments and are marked-to-market at each

132

---

 

period-end with the associated changes in fair value recognized in “Other income” or “Other expenses” in the consolidated income statement.

To reduce its exposure to U.S. dollar exchange rate fluctuations, the Group also hedges certain Euro-denominated forecasted transactions that cover at reporting date a large part of its research and development, selling, general and administrative expenses through the use of currency forward contracts and currency options, including collars. These instruments do not qualify as hedging instruments and are marked-to-market at each period-end with the associated changes in fair value recognized in “Other income” or “Other expenses” in the consolidated income statement.

The notional amount of these financial instruments amounted to $1,452 million in 2020 (2019: $1,075 million). The principal currencies covered at the end of the year 2020 are the Euro, the Singapore dollar, the Swedish krona, the China Yuan Renminbi, the Swiss franc, the Moroccan dirham, the Japanese yen, the Malaysian ringgit, the Indian rupee, the Philippines peso, the South Korean won and the Taiwan dollar.

Foreign currency forward contracts and currency options, including collars, not designated as cash flow hedge outstanding as of December 31, 2020 have remaining terms of 4 days to 11 months, maturing on average after 74 days.

Foreign currency forward contracts and currency options, including collars, not designated as cash flow hedge outstanding as of December 31, 2019 had remaining terms of 6 days to 15 months, maturing on average after 78 days.

Derivative instruments designated as cash flow hedge

To reduce its exposure to U.S. dollar exchange rate fluctuations, the Group hedges certain Euro-denominated forecasted transactions that cover at reporting date a portion of its front-end manufacturing costs of semi-finished goods through the use of currency forward contracts and currency options, including collars. The Group also hedges certain manufacturing transactions denominated in Singapore dollars.

The principles regulating the hedging strategy for derivatives designated as cash flow hedge is to hedge up to 70% of the total forecasted transactions of the following quarter for these manufacturing costs. In order to follow a dynamic hedge strategy, the Group may change the percentage of the designated hedged item within the limit of 100% of the forecasted transaction. The maximum length of time over which the Group could hedge its exposure to the variability of cash flows for forecasted transactions is 24 months.

These derivative instruments are designated and qualified as cash flow hedges. Hedge effectiveness is determined at the inception of the hedge relationship, and through periodic prospective effectiveness assessments to ensure that an economic relationship exists between the hedged item and the hedging instrument. The Group enters into hedge relationships where the critical terms of the hedging instrument match with the terms of the hedged item, which ensures a 1:1 hedge ratio on a monthly basis. The Group therefore performs a qualitative assessment of effectiveness. If changes in circumstances affect the terms of the hedged item such that the critical terms no longer match with the critical term of the hedging instrument, the Group uses the hypothetical derivative method to assess effectiveness. Ineffectiveness may arise if the timing of the forecast transaction changes from what was originally estimated, which cannot occur as the Group designates as hedged items forecasted intercompany transactions denominated in foreign currency over which the Group has full oversight, control, and visibility. Ineffectiveness may arise only if there are changes in the credit risk of the counterparty.

The derivative instruments designated as cash flow hedges are reflected at fair value in the consolidated statement of financial position. The unrealized gain or loss from the effective portion of the hedge is reported in other comprehensive income and is reclassified into earnings in the same period in which the hedged transaction affects earnings, and within the same consolidated income statement line item as the impact of the hedged transaction.

 

For the year ended December 31, 2020, the Group recorded an increase in cost of sales of $3 million (2019: increase of $51 million) related to the realized losses incurred on such hedged transactions. No significant ineffective portion of the hedge was recorded on the lines “Other income” or “Other expenses” for the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019.

133

---

 

The notional amount of foreign currency forward contracts and currency options, including collars, designated as cash flow hedge amounted to $947 million (2019: $827 million). The forecasted transactions hedged at December 31, 2020 were determined to be highly probable of occurring.

As at December 31, 2020, the amount of net deferred gains on derivative instruments included in the cash flow hedge reserve in equity was $31 million (2019: net deferred losses of $2 million), all of which were expected to be reclassified as earnings during the next 12 months based on the monthly forecasted semi-finished manufacturing costs.

Foreign currency forward contracts and currency options, including collars, designated as cash flow hedge outstanding as of December 31, 2020 have remaining terms of 6 days to 11 months, maturing on average after 113 days.

Foreign currency forward contracts and currency options, including collars, designated as cash flow hedge outstanding as of December 31, 2019 had remaining terms of 6 days to 15 months, maturing on average after 121 days.

As at December 31, 2020, the Group had the following outstanding derivative instruments that were entered into to hedge Euro-denominated and Singapore-dollar-denominated forecasted transactions:

 

 

As at December 31, 2019, the Group had the following outstanding derivative instruments that were entered into to hedge Euro-denominated and Singapore-dollar-denominated forecasted transactions:

 

 

Cash flow and fair value interest rate risk

The Group’s interest rate risk arises from long-term borrowings. Borrowings issued at variable rates expose the Group to cash flow interest rate risk. Borrowings issued at fixed rates expose the Group to fair value interest rate risk.

The Group analyzes its interest rate exposure on a dynamic basis. Various scenarios are simulated taking into consideration refinancing, renewal of existing positions, alternative financing and hedging. The Group invests primarily on a short-term basis and as such its liquidity is invested in floating interest rate instruments. As a consequence, the Group is exposed to interest rate risk due to potential mismatch between the return on its short-term floating interest rate investments and the portion of its long-term debt issued at fixed rate.

134

---

 

Other market risk

As part of its ongoing investing activities, the Group may be exposed to equity security price risk for investments in public entities. In order to hedge the exposure to this market risk, the Group may enter into certain derivative hedging transactions.

Credit risk and the Group’s impairment policies on financial assets are further described in Note 7.6.7.14 and Note 7.6.36.

Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities

The Group entered into currency collars as combinations of two options, which are reported, for accounting purposes, on a net basis. The fair value of these collars represented as at December 31, 2020 assets totaling $15 million (a gross amount of $16 million recognized as assets offset with a liability of $1 million). In addition, the Company entered into other derivative instruments, primarily forward contracts, which are governed by standard International Swaps and Derivatives Association (“ISDA”) agreements, which are not offset in the statement of financial position, and representing total assets of $50 million and liabilities of $2 million as at December 31, 2020.

Risk management policies relating to credit risk exposure to derivatives counterparties is further described in Note 7.6.36.

135

---

 

7.6.15.5.        Fair values

Set out below is a comparison by class of the carrying amounts and fair value of the Group’s financial instruments that are carried in the consolidated financial statements.

136

---

 

 

 

 

The fair value of financial assets and liabilities are included at the price at which the instrument could be sold in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate fair value:

 

137

---

 

Fair value hierarchy

The Group uses the following hierarchy for determining and disclosing the fair value of financial instruments by valuation technique:

As at December 31, 2020, the Group held the following assets and liabilities measured at fair value:

 

 

During the reporting period ending December 31, 2020, there was no transfer between Level 1 and Level 2 fair value measurements, and no transfer into and out of Level 3 fair value measurements.

138

---

 

As at December 31, 2019, the Group held the following assets and liabilities measured at fair value:

 

 

During the reporting period ending December 31, 2019, there was no transfer between Level 1 and Level 2 fair value measurements, and no transfer into and out of Level 3 fair value measurements.

Financial instruments in Level 1

The fair value of financial instruments traded in active markets is based on quoted market prices at the balance sheet date. A market is regarded as active if quoted prices are readily and regularly available from an exchange, dealer, broker, industry group, pricing service or regulatory agency, and those prices represent actual and regularly occurring market transactions on an arm’s length basis. The quoted market price used for financial assets held by the Group is the current bid price. These instruments are included in Level 1.

Financial instruments in Level 2

The fair value of financial instruments that are not traded in active markets (for example over the counter derivatives) is determined by using valuation techniques. These valuation techniques maximize the use of observable market data when available and rely as little as possible on entity’s specific estimates. If all significant inputs required to fair value an instrument are observable, the instrument is included in Level 2. If one or more of the significant inputs is not based on observable market data, the instrument is included in Level 3. Specific valuation techniques used to value financial instruments include:

139

---

 

Financial instruments in Level 3

For financial assets (liabilities) measured at fair value using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3), the reconciliation between January 1, 2020 and December 31, 2020 is presented as follows:

 

 

In 2020, the Group closed the acquisition of French GaN innovator Exagan and the acquisitions of the entire share capital of Ultra Wide Band specialist BeSpoon, of the cellular IoT connectivity assets of Riot Micro and of the radio-frequency assets of SOMOS, as detailed in Note 7.6.10. For these acquisitions, the purchase price allocation on the assets acquired and liabilities assumed, measured at fair value, was determined by the Group with the assistance of an independent third party. This corresponded to a Level 3 fair value measurement hierarchy. The main assets that were identified separately corresponded to technologies and amounted to $118 million. The fair value of the

140

---

 

intangible assets was determined using the multi-period excess earnings method, consisting in discounting at a discount rate, which approximates 9%, the future earnings attributable to the asset.

 

The following table shows the impact on the income statement of the valuation of the embedded derivative instruments outstanding as at December 31, 2020:

 

 

The change in fair value amounting to $417 million on the embedded bondholders’ conversion options was reported as “Finance costs” in the consolidated income statement ended December 31, 2020. The change in fair value amounting to $71 million on the embedded issuer’s call options was reported as “Finance income” in the consolidated income statement ended December 31, 2020.

The model used to price the derivative instruments embedded in the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017 (Tranche B) and on August 4, 2020 (Tranche A and Tranche B) included the following inputs:

Sensitivity to the share price variations is further described in Note 7.6.36. Implied volatility should be considered an unobservable input due to the lack of market data (stock exchange listing of the bond option) for a time horizon equal to the duration of the option. The figure is, therefore, an assumption based on the volatility implied by the price of the financial instrument, as negotiated at the issue stage, and market volatility for the nearest time horizon.

The prices of the bondholders’ conversion options are sensitive to implied volatility. The table below shows a sensitivity analysis of the net carrying amount of the embedded conversion options in relation to a series of changes expressed in percentage point terms of volatility.

 

 

141

---

 

For financial assets (liabilities) measured at fair value using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3), the reconciliation between January 1, 2019 and December 31, 2019 is presented as follows:

 

 

The following table shows the impact on the income statement of the valuation of the embedded derivative instruments outstanding as at December 31, 2019:

 

 

The change in fair value amounting to $544 million on the embedded bondholders’ conversion option was reported as “Finance costs” in the consolidated income statement ended December 31, 2019. The change in fair value amounting to $25 million on the embedded issuer’s call option was reported as “Finance income” in the consolidated income statement ended December 31, 2019.

7.6.16. Other non-current assets

Other non-current assets consisted of the following:

 

 

Long-term state receivables include receivables related to funding and receivables related to tax refunds. Funding are mainly public grants to be received from governmental agencies in Italy and France as part of long-term research and development, industrialization and capital investment projects. Long-term receivables related to tax refund correspond to tax benefits claimed by the Group in certain of its local tax jurisdictions. These non-current receivables are all due within 5 years from the balance sheet date.

The Group holds long-term receivables related to funding and tax refund with the objective to collect the contractual cash flows and therefore, these receivables are measured subsequently at amortized cost using the effective interest method.

As at December 31, 2020, $96 million of the long-term state receivables were sold without recourse, compared to $131 million as at December 31, 2019, with a financial cost of less than $1 million for both years.

 

142

---

 

The Group applies a forward-looking expected credit loss (ECL) approach on all debt financial assets not held at FVPL. For receivables and other financial assets carried at amortized cost, the ECL is based on a 12-month expected credit loss basis. The 12-month ECL is the portion of lifetime ECLs that results from default events on a financial instrument that are possible within 12 months after the reporting date. The major portion of other long-term receivables to which this impairment model applies corresponds to receivables from governmental agencies. Due to the existing history of zero-default on receivables originated by governments, the expected credit loss is assumed to be negligible. Other non-current assets presented in the table above within the line "Deposits and other non-current assets" are composed of individually insignificant amounts not deemed to have exposure of default.

The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date was the carrying amount of other non-current assets, which were individually not material.

 

The carrying amounts of the Group’s non-current assets are denominated in the following currencies:

 

 

7.6.17. Inventories

Inventories consisted of the following:

 

 

Write-offs of inventories were recognized in cost of sales as an expense and amounted to $57 million in 2020 (2019: $65 million). Further impact related to inventories on the Consolidated Income Statement is provided in Note 7.6.28.

The carrying amount of inventories is presented net of a reserve for obsolescence items of $74 million as at December 31, 2020 (2019: $84 million).

7.6.18. Trade accounts receivable

Trade accounts receivable consisted of the following:

 

 

Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods sold or services performed in the ordinary course of business. Trade receivables are non-interest bearing and are generally on 30-90 day terms. They are all classified as current. The Group holds the trade receivables with the objective to collect the contractual cash flows and,

143

---

 

therefore, trade receivables are measured subsequently at amortized cost using the effective interest method. The Group does not expect to have any contracts where the period between the transfer of the promised goods or services to the customer and payment by the customer exceeds one year. As a consequence, the Group does not adjust any of the transaction prices for the time value of money and no significant transaction with customers includes significant financing component. Due to the short-term nature of trade receivables, their carrying amount is considered to be the same as their fair value.

In 2020, the Group’s largest customer, Apple, represented 23.9% (2019: 17.6%) of consolidated net revenues, reported in the ADG, AMS and MDG segments.

As described in Note 7.6.36, the Group monitors the creditworthiness of its customers to which it grants credit terms in the normal course of business. If certain customers are independently rated, these ratings are used. Otherwise, if there is no independent rating, risk control assesses the credit quality of the customer, considering its financial position, past experience and other factors. Individual risk limits are set based on internal and external ratings in accordance with limits set by management. The utilization of credit limits is regularly monitored. Sales to customers are primarily settled in cash. At December 31, 2020 and 2019, no customer represented more than 10% of trade accounts receivable, net. Any remaining concentrations of credit risk with respect to trade receivables are limited due to the large number of customers and their dispersion across many geographic areas.

The Group uses a lifetime expected loss allowance for all trade receivables. The model includes reasonable assumptions about future credit trends. The historical loss rates are adjusted to reflect current and forward-looking information on macroeconomic factors affecting the ability of the Group’s customers to settle the receivables. In addition to the factors already embedded in the failure rates, as applied on trade accounts receivable, the Group has identified cyclicality and uncertainties around continued growth for the semiconductor industry and its serviceable available market to be the most relevant factors. These macroeconomic factors are weighted into four different economic scenarios, in line with estimates and methodologies applied by other business entities, including financial institutions. These scenarios range from upside scenario (above-trend economic growth) to severe downside (recession). In 2019, major weight was given to the baseline and mild downside scenarios, with no significant adjustment to the expected credit loss allowance. As at December 31, 2020, following the uncertainties arising from the COVID-19 pandemic and the impact it may have on future economic and market conditions, major weight was given to mild downside and severe downside macroeconomic scenarios, with no significant adjustments to the expected credit loss rates as used in the measurement of the allowance for trade accounts receivable. On that basis, the loss allowance as at December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019 was determined as follows:

 

 

144

---

 

The loss allowance for trade accounts receivable as at December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019 reconcile to the opening loss allowance as follows:

 

 

Trade accounts receivable are denominated in the following currencies:

 

 

The maximum exposure to credit risk was the fair value of trade accounts receivable, net of expected credit losses as at December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019.

 

During 2020, no trade accounts receivable were sold without recourse (2019: $75 million).

7.6.19. Other receivables and assets

Other receivables and assets consisted of the following:

 

 

Receivables from government agencies relate to research and development contracts, research tax credits, industrialization contracts and capital investment projects.

The Group applies a forward-looking expected credit loss (ECL) approach on all debt financial assets not held at FVPL. For receivables and other financial assets carried at amortized cost, excluding trade accounts receivable, the ECL is based on a 12-month expected credit loss basis. The 12-month ECL is the portion of lifetime ECLs that results from default events on a financial instrument that are possible within 12 months after the reporting date. The major portion of other receivables and assets to which this expected credit loss model applies corresponds to receivables from governmental agencies. Due to the short maturity of these receivables and the existing history of zero-default on receivables originated by governments, the expected credit loss is assumed to be negligible. Other receivables, excluding receivables from government agencies, are composed of individually insignificant amounts at exposure of default. Consequently, no significant loss allowance was reported on other receivables and assets as at December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019.

145

---

 

The carrying amounts of the Group’s other receivables and assets are denominated in the following currencies:

 

 

The maximum exposure to credit risk was the fair value of other receivables and assets, net of expected credit losses, as at December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019.

7.6.20. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents consisted of the following:

 

 

7.6.21. Equity

7.6.21.1.        Outstanding shares

The authorized share capital of the Company is €1,810 million consisting of 1,200,000,000 common shares and 540,000,000 preference shares, each with a nominal value of €1.04. As at December 31, 2020, the number of common shares issued was 911,239,420 shares (December 31, 2019: 911,186,920 shares).

As of December 31, 2020, the number of common shares outstanding was 905,415,002 shares (December 31, 2019: 891,434,489 shares).

7.6.21.2.        Preference shares

The 540,000,000 preference shares, when issued, will entitle a holder to full voting rights and to a preferential right to dividends and distributions upon liquidation.

The Company is a party to an option agreement regarding the preference shares with Stichting Continuïteit ST (the “Stichting”), entered into on January 22, 2007, with a duration of ten years, which agreement was extended for another ten years in October 2016. The Managing Board and the Supervisory Board, along with the board of the Stichting, have declared that they are jointly of the opinion that the Stichting is independent of the Company. The option agreement provides for the issuance of up to a maximum 540,000,000 preference shares. Any such shares would be issued to the Stichting upon its request and in its sole discretion and upon payment of at least 25% of the par value of the preference shares to be issued. The shares would be issuable in the event of actions which the board of the Stichting determines would be contrary to the Company’s interests, shareholders and other stakeholders and which in the event of a creeping acquisition or offer for the Company’s common shares are not supported by the Company’s Managing Board and Supervisory Board. The preference shares may remain outstanding for no longer than two years. No preference shares have been issued to date. The effect of the preference shares may be to deter potential acquirers from effecting an unsolicited acquisition resulting in a change of control as well as to create a level-playing field in the event actions which are considered to be hostile by the Managing Board and the Supervisory Board, as described above, occur and which the board of the Stichting determines to be contrary to the Company’s interests, shareholders and other stakeholders.

There were no preference shares issued as of December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019 respectively.

146

---

 

7.6.21.3.        Treasury shares

As of December 31, 2020, the Company owned 5,824,418 shares classified as treasury stock in the consolidated statement of equity compared to 19,752,431 shares as of December 31, 2019.

 

The treasury shares have been originally designated for allocation under the Company’s share-based remuneration programs of unvested shares. As of December 31, 2020, 60,484,598 of these treasury shares were transferred to employees under the Company’s share-based remuneration programs, of which 7,260,486 in the year ended December 31, 2020.

 

On November 5, 2018, the Company announced a three years buy-back program of up to $750 million. During 2020, the Company repurchased 4.8 million shares of its common stock for a total of $125 million under the share buy-back program, reflected at cost, as a reduction of the parent company stockholders’ equity.

 

As described in note 7.6.15.3, bondholders exercised in 2020 their conversion rights on Tranche A of the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017, which the Company elected to net-share settle. The full settlement of Tranche A resulted in 11.4 million shares delivered to bondholders and released from treasury shares as at December 31, 2020.

7.6.21.4.        Unvested share awards for the Supervisory Board

On an annual basis and until the year 2012, the Compensation Committee (on behalf of the Supervisory Board and with its approval) used to grant stock-based awards (the options to acquire common shares in the share capital of the Company) to the members and professionals of the Supervisory Board (“The Supervisory Board Plan”). The awards were granted at the nominal value of the share of €1.04 (exercise price of the option). The options granted under the Supervisory Board Plan vest and become exercisable immediately, while the shares resulting from these awards vest and therefore become available for trade evenly over three years (one third every year), with no market, performance or service conditions.

The table below summarizes grants under the outstanding stock award plans as authorized by the Compensation Committee:

 

 

A summary of the options’ activity by plan for the years ended December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019 is presented below:

 

 

The total intrinsic value of options exercised during the year 2020 amounted to $2 million, compared to $1 million in 2019. The total intrinsic value of options outstanding as of December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019 amounted to $2 million and $3 million, respectively.

147

---

 

At the Company’s Annual General Meeting of Shareholders held on June 21, 2013, it was resolved to abolish and terminate the stock-based compensation for the Supervisory Board members and professionals.

7.6.21.5.        Unvested share awards for the Employees

On an annual basis, the Compensation Committee (on behalf of the Supervisory Board and with its approval) grants stock-based awards to senior executives along with selected employees (the “Employee Plan”). The awards are granted for services under the Employee Plan. There are two types of unvested shares: (1) shares granted to employees, which are subject only to service conditions and vest over the requisite service period, and (2) shares granted to senior executives, whose vesting is subject to performance conditions. For the plans 2017, 2018, 2019 and 2020, the performance conditions consisted of two external targets (sales evolution and operating income compared to a basket of competitors) weighting for two thirds of the total number of awards granted and of one internal target (return on net assets compared to the previous period), weighting for one third of the total number of awards granted. All the awards vest over a three-year service period (32% as of the first anniversary of the grant, 32% as of the second anniversary of the grant and 36% as of the third anniversary of the grant). In addition, in 2019 and 2020 there was a Special Bonus granted to the Group’s CEO.

The table below summarizes grants under the outstanding stock award plans as authorized by the Compensation Committee:

 

 

A summary of the unvested share activity for the year December 31, 2020 is presented below:

 

 

148

---

 

The grant date weighted average fair value of unvested shares granted to employees under the 2017 Employee Plan was $16.52. On March 27, 2018, the Compensation Committee approved the statement that with respect to the shares subject to performance conditions, all three performance conditions were fully met. Consequently, the compensation expense recorded on the 2017 Employee Plan reflects the statement that — for the portion of the shares subject to performance conditions — 100% of the awards granted will fully vest, as far as the service condition is met.

The grant date weighted average fair value of unvested shares granted to employees under the 2018 Employee Plan was $22.78. On March 27, 2019, the Compensation Committee approved the statement that with respect to the shares subject to performance conditions, all three performance conditions were fully met. Consequently, the compensation expense recorded on the 2018 Employee Plan reflects the statement that — for the portion of the shares subject to performance conditions — 100% of the awards granted will fully vest, as far as the service condition is met.

The grant date weighted average fair value of unvested shares granted to employees under the 2019 Employee Plan was $19.28. On March 25, 2020, the Compensation Committee approved the statement that with respect to the shares subject to performance conditions, two performance conditions were met. Consequently, the compensation expense recorded on the 2019 Employee Plan reflects the statement that — for the portion of the shares subject to performance conditions — two thirds of the awards granted will vest, as far as the service condition is met.

The grant date fair value of unvested shares granted to the CEO under the 2019 CEO Special Bonus Plan was $14.97. On the 2019 CEO Special Bonus Plan, the fair value of the unvested shares granted reflected the market price of the shares at the date of the grant.

The grant date weighted average fair value of unvested shares granted to employees under the 2020 Employee Plan was $30.17. On March 24, 2021, the Compensation Committee approved the statement that with respect to the shares subject to performance conditions, all three performance conditions were fully met. Consequently, the compensation expense recorded on the 2020 Employee Plan reflects the statement that — for the portion of the shares subject to performance conditions — 100% of the awards granted will fully vest, as far as the service condition is met.

The grant date fair value of unvested shares granted to the CEO under the 2020 CEO Special Bonus Plan was $26.64. On the 2020 CEO Special Bonus Plan, the fair value of the unvested shares granted reflected the market price of the shares at the date of the grant.

The following table illustrates the classification of pre-payroll tax and social contribution stock-based compensation expense included in the consolidated income statement for the year ended December 31, 2020 and 2019:

 

 

The fair value of the shares vested in 2020 totaled $141 million compared to $114 million in 2019.

Compensation cost, excluding payroll tax and social contribution, capitalized as part of inventory was $6 million as of December 31, 2020 compared to $6 million as of December 31, 2019. As of December 31, 2020, there was $206 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to the grant of unvested shares, which is expected to be recognized over a weighted average period of approximately 10 months.

The total deferred income tax benefit recognized in the consolidated income statement related to unvested share-based compensation expense amounted to $9 million for the year ended December 31, 2020 compared to $9 million for the year ended December 31, 2019. The excess tax benefit on unvested share-based compensation totaled $7

149

---

 

million as at December 31, 2020 compared to $4 million as at December 31, 2019 and was recorded in “other reserves”.

7.6.21.6.        Other reserves

Other reserves include the following components as at December 31, 2020:

 

 

Share-based compensation reserve: The share-based compensation reserve is used to recognize the value of equity-settled share-based payment to employees, including key management personnel, as part of their remuneration. Refer to Notes 7.6.21.4 and 7.6.21.5 for further details on these share-based compensation programs.

Fair value reserve of financial assets at FVOCI: This reserve records fair value changes on debt and equity securities measured at FVOCI.

Cash Flow hedge reserve: The cash flow hedge reserve contains the effective portion of the cash flow hedge relationship outstanding as at year-end.

Foreign currency translation reserve: The foreign currency translation reserve is used to record exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements for subsidiaries which functional currency is different from the U.S. dollars.

Employee benefit plan reserve: The employee benefit plan reserve is used to recognize the actuarial gains and losses and past service cost of post-employment pension plans.

7.6.21.7.        Dividends

The 2020 AGM held on June 17, 2020 authorized the distribution of a cash dividend of $0.168 per outstanding share of the Company’s common stock, to be distributed in quarterly installments of $0.042 in each of the second, third and fourth quarters of 2020 and first quarter of 2021. The amount of $37 million corresponding to the first installment, $38 million corresponding to the second installment and $34 million corresponding to the third installment were paid as at December 31, 2020. The remaining portion of $4 million related to the third installment and the last installment of $38 million are presented in the line “Other payables and accrued liabilities” in the consolidated statement of financial position as at December 31, 2020.

150

---

 

The 2019 AGM held on May 31, 2019 authorized the distribution of a cash dividend of $0.24 per outstanding share of the Company’s common stock, to be distributed in quarterly installments of $0.06 in each of the second, third and fourth quarters of 2019 and first quarter of 2020. The amount of $53 million corresponding to the first installment, $53 million corresponding to the second installment and $48 million corresponding to the third installment were paid as at December 31, 2019. The remaining portion of the third installment amounting to $6 million and the last installment of $53 million were paid in the first half of 2020.

The 2018 AGM held on May 31, 2018 authorized the distribution of a cash dividend of $0.24 per outstanding share of the Company’s common stock, to be distributed in quarterly installments of $0.06 in each of the second, third and fourth quarters of 2018 and first quarter of 2019. The amount of $54 million corresponding to the first installment, $54 million corresponding to the second installment and $48 million corresponding to the third installment were paid as of December 31, 2018. The remaining portion of the third installment amounting to $6 million and the last installment of $54 million were paid in the first half of 2019.

7.6.21.8.        Legal reserves

Refer to Note 8.3.11 for the composition of the Company’s legal reserves.

7.6.22.        Provisions

Movements in provisions during the year ended December 31, 2020 are detailed as follows:

 

151

---

 

 

 

Restructuring provisions

In 2016, the Group announced its decision to cease the development of new platforms and standard products for set-top-box and home gateway products. This decision resulted in a global workforce review affecting approximately 1,400 employees worldwide, which included about 430 employees in France through a voluntary departure plan, about 670 employees in Asia and about 120 employees in the United States of America. The Group reported in 2020 and 2019 a $1 million and $2 million, respectively, as a reversal on unused provisions. An amount of $4 million is expected to be paid within twelve months for this plan.

In the fourth quarter of 2019, management committed to a restructuring plan impacting its back-end activities. A voluntary plan involving a reduction in force representing approximately 150 employees was announced in Bouskoura, Morocco, in December 2019, in compliance with local legislation. The Company recorded in 2020 a restructuring charge totaling $8 million for this plan, corresponding to the voluntary termination benefits paid to 179 employees who signed the offer for voluntary leaves in 2020.

Warranty and product guarantee

The Group’s customers occasionally return the Group’s products for technical reasons. The Group’s standard terms and conditions of sale provide that if the Group determines that products do not conform, the Group will repair or replace the non-conforming products, or issue a credit or rebate of the purchase price. Quality returns are identified shortly after sale in customer quality control testing. Quality returns are usually associated with end-user customers, not with distribution channels.

 

7.6.23. Employee benefits

Employee benefits liabilities are detailed as follows:

 

 

Pensions

The Group has a number of defined benefit pension plans covering employees in various countries. The defined benefit plans provide pension benefits based on years of service and employee compensation levels. The Group uses December 31 as measurement date for all its plans. Eligibility is generally determined in accordance with local statutory requirements. In 2020 and 2019, the major defined benefit pension plans and long-term employee benefit plans were in the USA (retirement plan closed to new entrants and future accrual), France (retirement indemnities), Switzerland (retirement pension system), UK (retirement benefit scheme closed to new entrants and future accrual) and Italy (termination indemnity plan (“TFR”) generated before July 1, 2007).

152

---

 

The amounts recognized in the statement of financial position are determined as follows:

 

 

The movements in the pension liability are as follows:

 

 

Changes in defined benefit obligations are as follows:

 

 

Defined benefit obligations by main geographical locations are as follows:

 

 

153

---

 

Changes in plan assets are as follows:

 

 

The actual return on plan assets in 2020 was a gain of $84 million (2019: gain of $81 million). In 2020, the theoretical interest income on plan assets was a gain of $14 million (2019: gain of $16 million) resulting in an actuarial gain on plan assets of $70 million (2019: gain of $65 million).

Plan assets by main geographical locations are as follows:

 

 

The effects of the asset ceiling are as follows:

 

 

The amounts recognized in the income statement related to pensions are as follows:

 

 

154

---

 

The Group’s detailed pension plan asset allocation including the fair value measurements of those plan assets as at December 31, 2020 is as follows:

 

 

The Group’s detailed pension plan asset allocation including the fair value measurements of those plan assets as at December 31, 2019 is as follows:

 

 

The majority of plans (in the United Kingdom, United States and Switzerland) are governed by an independent board of trustees, which includes employer representatives.

The Group’s investment strategy for its pension plans is to optimize the long-term investment return on plan assets in relation to the liability structure to maintain an acceptable level of risk while minimizing the cost of providing pension benefits and maintaining adequate funding levels in accordance with applicable rules in each jurisdiction.

The Group’s practice is to periodically conduct a review in each subsidiary of its asset allocation strategy, in such a way that the asset allocation is in line with the targeted asset allocation within reasonable boundaries. The Group’s asset portfolios are managed in such a way as to achieve adapted diversity. The Group does not manage any assets internally.

155

---

 

After considering the funded status of the Group’s defined benefit plans, movements in the discount rate, investment performance and related tax consequences, the Group may choose to make contributions to its pension plans in any given year in excess of required amounts. In 2020, the Group’s contributions to plan assets were $17 million (2019: $21 million) and it expects to contribute cash of $22 million in 2021.

Other long-term employee benefits

Other long-term employee benefits include seniority and loyalty award programs. The movements in the other long-term employee benefits liability are as follows:

 

 

The amounts recognized in the income statement related to other long-term benefits are as follows:

 

 

Assumptions

The weighted average assumptions used in the determination of pension and other long-term obligations are as follows:

 

 

The discount rate was determined by reference to high quality corporate bond rates applicable to the respective country of each plan and estimated terms of the defined benefit obligation. As required by IAS 19, and for pension plans with plan assets, the interest income on plan assets is set equal to the corresponding discount rate.

The average duration of Defined Benefit Obligations is 13 years in 2020 (2019: 15 years).

156

---

 

At December 31, 2020, an increase of the discount rate of 0.50% would have resulted in a reduction of the Defined Benefit Obligations of $94 million and a decrease of the discount rate of 0.50% would have resulted in an increase of the Defined Benefit Obligations by $104 million. An increase of the inflation rate of 0.50% would have resulted in an increase of the Defined Benefit Obligations of $18 million and a decrease of the inflation rate of 0.50% would have resulted in a decrease of the Defined Benefit Obligations of $18 million. An increase of the life expectancy of one year would have resulted in an increase of the Defined Benefit Obligations of $23 million and a decrease of the life expectancy of one year would have resulted in a decrease of the Defined Benefit Obligations of $23 million. These sensitivity analyses are based on a change in an assumption while holding all other assumptions constant. When calculating the sensitivity of the defined benefit obligation to significant actuarial assumptions, the same method has been applied as when calculating the pension liability recognized within the consolidated statement of financial position.

Assumptions regarding future mortality experience are set based on advice from published statistics and experience in each territory.

Defined contribution plans

The Group has certain defined contribution plans, which accrue benefits for employees on a pro-rata basis during their employment period based on their individual salaries. In 2020, the annual cost of these plans amounted to approximately $91 million (2019: $86 million).

7.6.24. Trade accounts payable, other payables and accrued liabilities

 

 

7.6.25. Significant categories of income

 

 

157

---

 

7.6.26. Revenues

7.6.26.1.        Nature of goods and services

The Group designs, develops, manufactures and markets a broad range of products, including discrete and general purpose components, application-specific integrated circuits (“ASICs”), full custom devices and semi-custom devices and application-specific standard products (“ASSPs”) for analog, digital and mixed-signal applications.

The principal activities — separated by reportable segments — from which the Group generates its revenues are described in Note 7.6.27.

Other revenues consist of license revenue, service revenue related to transferring licenses, patent royalty income, sale of scrap materials and manufacturing by-products.

While the majority of the Group’s sales agreements contain standard terms and conditions, the Group may, from time to time, enter into agreements that contain multiple performance obligations or terms and conditions. Those agreements concern principally the revenues from services, where the performance obligation is satisfied over time. The objective when allocating the transaction price is to allocate the transaction price to each performance obligation (or distinct good or service) in an amount that depicts the amount of consideration to which the Group expects to be entitled in exchange for transferring the promised goods or services to the customer.

7.6.26.2.        Revenue recognition and disaggregation

The Group recognizes revenue from products sold to a customer, including distributors, when it satisfies a performance obligation at a point in time by transferring control over a product to the customer. This usually occurs at the time of shipment. The performance obligations linked to the sale of goods contracts have the original expected length of less than one year. The transaction price is determined based on the contract terms, adjusted for price protection if applicable. The revenues from services are usually linked to performance obligations transferred over time and are recognized in line with the contract terms.

The payment terms range between 30 and 90 days.

The Group’s consolidated total revenues disaggregated by product group are presented in Note 7.6.27. The following table presents the Group’s consolidated total revenues disaggregated by geographical region of shipment, nature and market channel.

 

 

158

---

 

 

The Group does not disclose the value of unsatisfied performance obligations for (i) contracts with an original expected length of one year or less and (ii) contracts for which the Group recognizes revenue at the amount to which the Group has the right to invoice for services performed.

7.6.27. Segment information

The Group designs, develops, manufactures and markets a broad range of products, including discrete and general purpose components, application-specific integrated circuits (“ASICs”), full custom devices and semi-custom devices and application-specific standard products (“ASSPs”) for analog, digital and mixed-signal applications.

The Group’s operating segments are as follows:

For the computation of the segments’ internal financial measurements, the Group uses certain internal rules of allocation for the costs not directly chargeable to the segments, including cost of sales, selling, general and administrative expenses and a part of research and development expenses. In compliance with the Group’s internal policies, certain costs are not allocated to the segments, but reported in “Others”. Those comprise unused capacity charges, including reduced manufacturing activity due to COVID-19 pandemic, impairment, restructuring charges and other related closure costs, management reorganization expenses, phase-out and start-up costs of certain manufacturing facilities, and other unallocated expenses such as: strategic or special research and development programs, certain corporate-level operating expenses, patent claims and litigations, and other costs that are not allocated to product groups, as well as operating earnings of other products. In addition, depreciation and amortization expense is part of the manufacturing costs allocated to the segments and is neither identified as part of the inventory variation nor as part of the unused capacity charges; therefore, it cannot be isolated in the cost of goods sold. Finally, public grants are allocated to the Group’s segments proportionally to the incurred R&D expenses on the sponsored projects.

Wafer costs are allocated to the segments based on actual cost. From time to time, with respect to specific technologies, wafer costs are allocated to segments based on market price.

The following tables present the Group’s consolidated total revenues and consolidated operating income by reportable segment.

 

Total revenues by reportable segment:

 

 

159

---

 

Operating profit by reportable segment:

 

 

The following is a summary of operations by entities located within the indicated geographic areas for 2020 and 2019. Total revenues represent sales to third parties from the country in which each entity is incorporated. A significant portion of property, plant and equipment expenditures is attributable to front-end and back-end facilities, located in the different countries in which the Group operates. As such, the Group mainly allocates capital spending resources according to geographic areas rather than along product segment areas.

 

Total revenues by geographical area:

 

 

160

---

 

Non-current assets other than other non-current financial assets and deferred tax assets:

 

 

7.6.28. Expenses by nature

Expenses recorded as cost of sales, research and development and selling, general and administrative are detailed as follows:

 

 

Employee benefit expenses are detailed as follows:

 

 

161

---

 

7.6.29. Other income / expenses

Other income consisted of the following:

 

 

Other expenses consisted of the following:

 

 

The Group receives significant public funding from governmental agencies in several jurisdictions. Public funding for research and development is recognized ratably as the related costs are incurred once the agreement with the respective governmental agency has been signed and all applicable conditions have been met. Public funding received in the year ended December 31, 2017 from the Nano2017 program with the French government is subject to a financial return in the year 2024 and depends on the future cumulative sales of a certain product group over a five-year period. As at December 31, 2020, an amount of $42 million, corresponding primarily to the Nano2017 program, was reported in other non-current liabilities in the consolidated statement of financial position as at December 31, 2020 compared to an amount of $47 million as at December 31, 2019. The Group also participates in the European Commission's Important Projects of Common Interests (IPCEI), until 2022 in France and until 2024 in Italy. For the latter, the Group reported $206 million receivables, of which $105 million reported on the line "Other receivables and assets" in the consolidated statement of financial position for the year ended December 31, 2020.

Phase-out costs are costs incurred during the closing stage of a Group’s manufacturing facility. They are treated in the same manner as start-up costs. Start-up costs represent costs incurred in the start-up and testing of the Group’s new manufacturing facilities, before reaching the earlier of a minimum level of production or six months after the fabrication line’s quality certification.

Foreign exchange gains (losses), net of foreign exchange forward contracts and other currency derivatives, represent the portion of exchange rate changes on transactions denominated in currencies other than an entity’s functional currency and the changes in fair value of derivative instruments which are not designated as hedge, as described in Note 7.6.15.4.  

Patent costs include legal and attorney fees and payment for claims, patent pre-litigation consultancy and legal fees.  They are reported net of settlements, if any, which primarily include reimbursements of prior patent litigation costs.

COVID-19 incremental costs are mainly composed of purchases of medical disposables, such as masks and sanitizers, and other expenses related to sanitary measures undertaken to protect employees during the COVID-19 pandemic.

162

---

 

7.6.30. Finance income / costs

Total finance income consisted of the following:

 

 

 

Total finance costs consisted of the following:

 

 

No borrowing costs were capitalized in 2020 and 2019.

 

As described in Note 7.6.15.3, the change in fair value of the non-equity derivative instrument corresponding to the bondholders’ conversion option embedded in Tranche B of the unsecured senior convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017 generated a cost of $296 million for the year ended December 31, 2020 compared to a cost of $544 million for the year ended December 31, 2019 for both tranches. Additionally, the net-share settlement of the Tranche A of the unsecured senior convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017 generated a cost of $64 million for the year ended December 31, 2020.

 

The change in fair value of the non-equity derivative instrument corresponding to the bondholders’ conversion option embedded in the unsecured senior convertible bonds issued on August 4, 2020 generated a cost of $121 million for the year ended December 31, 2020.

 

Leases are further described in Note 7.6.12.

 

163

---

 

7.6.31. Components of other comprehensive income

 

 

7.6.32. Income tax

The major components of income tax benefit (expense) for the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019 are:

Consolidated income statement

 

 

Consolidated statement of other comprehensive income (deferred tax related to items charged or credited directly to equity during the year)

 

 

164

---

 

A reconciliation between income tax benefit and the product of income before tax multiplied by The Netherlands’ statutory tax rate for the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019 is as follows:

 

 

During the year ended December 31, 2020, the Group did not recognize deferred tax assets on net operating losses for an approximate amount of $9 million (2019: $3 million).

The changes in enacted tax rates resulted in an increase of tax expense of $5 million in 2020 (decrease of $14 million in 2019).

The tax holidays represent a tax exemption period aimed at attracting foreign technological investment in certain tax jurisdictions. The effect of the tax benefits on basic earnings per share was $0.04 per share in 2020 (2019: $0.14 per share). These agreements are present in various countries and include programs that reduce up to 100% of taxes in years affected by the agreements. The Group’s tax holidays expire at various dates through the year ending December 31, 2029.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities consisted of the following:

 

 

 

165

---

 

 

For a particular tax-paying component of the Group and within a particular tax jurisdiction, all deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset and presented as a single amount. The Group does not offset deferred tax assets and liabilities attributable to different tax-paying components or to different tax jurisdictions.

 

 

 

166

---

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2020, the Group has deferred tax assets on tax loss carry forwards and investment credits that expire starting 2021, as follows:

 

 

As at December 31, 2019, the Group has deferred tax assets on tax loss carry forwards and investment credits that expire starting 2020, as follows:

 

 

As at December 31, 2020, deferred tax assets not recognized in the statement of financial position amounted to $638 million (2019: $1,535 million) and are mainly composed of the followings:

167

---

 

7.6.33. Earnings per share

For the year ended December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019, earnings per share (“EPS”) were calculated as follows:

 

 

There was no dilutive effect of the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on August 4, 2020 in the 2020 diluted Earnings per Share since the conversion features were out-of-the-money.

 

Tranche B of the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017 was not dilutive for the year ended December 31, 2020 and December 31, 2019.

 

Dilutive effect of convertible bonds presented in the table above is related to Tranche A of the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017, which was fully settled in 2020. It was not dilutive for the year ended December 31, 2019.

7.6.34. Related party transactions

Transactions with significant shareholders, affiliates and other related parties were as follows:

 

 

For the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019, the related party transactions were primarily with companies in which management of the Group perform similar policymaking functions. These include, but are not limited to: Orange, Telecom Italia and Idemia France. Each of the aforementioned arrangements and transactions is negotiated without the personal involvement of the Supervisory Board members and are made in line with market practices and conditions.

The Group made a contribution of $0.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2020 and $0.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2019 to the ST Foundation, a non-profit organization established to deliver and coordinate

168

---

 

independent programs in line with its mission. Certain members of the Foundation’s Board are senior members of the Group’s management.

 

 

169

---

 

 

In 2020 and 2019, the total remuneration paid to the sole member of the Managing Board and to the other executive officers was as follows:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

170

---

 

 

The Group’s 22 executive officers, including the sole member of the Managing Board, were granted in 2020 for free 1,310,000 unvested shares subject to the achievement of performance objectives and service conditions being met. The weighted average grant date fair value of unvested shares granted to employees under the 2020 Employee Plan was $30.17.

The Group’s 22 executive officers, including the sole member of the Managing Board, were granted in 2019 for free 1,335,000 unvested shares subject to the achievement of performance objectives and service conditions being met. The weighted average grant date fair value of unvested shares granted to employees under the 2019 Employee Plan was $19.28.

The bonus paid to the executive officers corresponds to a Corporate Executive Incentive Program (the “EIP”) that entitles selected executives to a yearly bonus based upon the assessment of the achievement of individual, organizational and company objectives that are set on an annual basis and focused, inter alia, on return on net assets, customer service, profit, cash flow and market share. The maximum bonus awarded under the EIP is based upon a percentage of the executives’ salary and the overall achievement of the above objectives on an annual basis.

The 2020 EIP includes a sustainability index for Senior Management, as part of our effort to include corporate social responsibility into the performance framework of our Senior Management. The sustainability index has a weighting of 1/3 of personal objectives, and is divided into four criteria related to health and safety, environment, diversity & inclusion, and people engagement.

The executive officers and the Managing Board were covered in 2020 and 2019 under certain Group life and medical insurance programs, pension, state-run retirement and other similar benefit programs and other miscellaneous allowances.

At the end of the year 2005, the Compensation Committee recommended and the Supervisory Board decided to grant an additional pension benefit plan to the Group’s sole member of the Managing Board and a limited number of senior executives that have made key contributions to the Group’s success. Pursuant to this plan, in 2020 the Group made a contribution of $0.5 million to the plan of the sole member of the Managing Board, and $0.3 million to the plan for all other beneficiaries. The amount of pension plan payments made for other beneficiaries, such as former employees retired in 2020 and/or no longer salaried in 2020 were $1.1 million.

The Group did not extend any loans or overdrafts to the sole member of the Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, nor to any other member of Senior Management. Furthermore, the Group has not guaranteed any debts or concluded any leases with the sole member of the Managing Board, nor with any other member of Senior Management or their families.

The members of Senior Management, including the sole member of the Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, were covered in 2020 under certain group life and medical insurance programs provided by the Group. The aggregate additional amount set aside in 2020 to provide pension, retirement or similar benefits for Senior Management, including the sole member of the Managing Board, President and Chief Executive Officer, as a group is in addition to the amounts allocated to the complementary pension plan described above and is estimated to have been approximately $5.5 million, which includes statutory employer contributions for state run retirement, similar benefit programs and other miscellaneous allowances.

171

---

 

Individual remuneration paid to Supervisory Board Members in 2020 and 2019 was recorded as follows:

 

 

No share awards were granted to Supervisory Board Members and Professionals in 2020 and 2019.

7.6.35. Commitments, contingencies, claims and legal proceedings

Commitments

The Group’s commitments as at December 31, 2020 were as follows:

 

 

172

---

 

The Group’s commitments as at December 31, 2019 were as follows:

 

 

Purchase obligations are primarily comprised of purchase commitments for equipment, for outsourced foundry wafers and for software licenses.

Other obligations primarily relate to firm contractual commitments with respect to partnership and cooperation agreements and other service agreements.

Contingencies

The Group is subject to possible loss contingencies arising in the ordinary course of business. These include but are not limited to: product liability claims and/or warranty cost on the products of the Group, contractual disputes, indemnification claims, claims for unauthorized use of third-party intellectual property, employee grievances, tax claims beyond assessed uncertain tax positions as well as claims for environmental damages. In determining loss contingencies, the Group considers the likelihood of impairing an asset or the incurrence of a liability at the date of the consolidated financial statements as well as the ability to reasonably estimate the amount of such loss. The Group records a provision for a loss contingency when information available before the consolidated financial statements are issued or are available to be issued indicates that it is probable that an asset has been impaired or a liability has been incurred at the date of the consolidated financial statements and when the amount of loss can be reasonably estimated. The Group regularly re-evaluates claims to determine whether provisions need to be readjusted based on the most current information available to the Group. Changes in these evaluations could result in an adverse material impact on the Group’s results of operations, cash flows or its financial position for the period in which they occur.

Claims and legal proceedings

The Group has received and may in the future receive communications alleging possible infringements of third party patents or other third party intellectual property rights. Furthermore, the Group from time to time enters into discussions regarding a broad patent cross license arrangement with other industry participants. There is no assurance that such discussions may be brought to a successful conclusion and result in the intended agreement. The Group may become involved in costly litigation brought against the Group regarding patents, mask works, copyrights, trademarks or trade secrets. In the event that the outcome of any litigation would be unfavorable to the Group, the Group may be required to take a license to third party patents and/or other intellectual property rights at economically unfavorable terms and conditions, and possibly pay damages for prior use and/or face an injunction, all of which individually or in the aggregate could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, cash flows, financial position and/or ability to compete.

The Group has contractual commitments to various customers which could require the Group to incur costs to repair or replace defective products it supplies to such customer. The duration of these contractual commitments varies and, in certain cases, is indefinite. The Group is otherwise also involved in various lawsuits, claims, inquiries, inspections, investigations and/or proceedings incidental to its business and operations. Such matters, even if not meritorious, could result in the expenditure of significant financial or managerial resources. Any of the foregoing could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, cash flows or its financial position.

173

---

 

Other Contingencies

The Group regularly evaluates claims and legal proceedings together with their related probable losses to determine whether they need to be adjusted based on the current information available to the Group. There can be no assurance that its recorded reserves will be sufficient to cover the extent of its potential liabilities. Legal costs associated with claims are expensed as incurred. In the event of litigation which is adversely determined with respect to the Group’s interests, or in the event the Group needs to change its evaluation of a potential third-party claim, based on new evidence or communications, a material adverse effect could impact its operations or financial condition at the time it were to materialize.

As at December 31, 2020 and 2019, respectively, provisions for estimated probable losses with respect to claims and legal proceedings were not considered material.

7.6.36. Financial risk management objectives and policies

The Group is exposed to changes in financial market conditions in the normal course of business due to its operations in different foreign currencies and its on-going investing and financing activities. The Group’s activities expose it to a variety of financial risks: market risk (including foreign exchange risk, fair value interest rate risk, cash flow interest rate risk and price risk), credit risk and liquidity risk. The Group’s overall risk management program focuses on the unpredictability of financial markets and seeks to minimize potential adverse effects on the Group’s financial performance. The Group uses derivative financial instruments to hedge certain risk exposures.

Financial risk management is carried out by a central treasury department (Corporate Treasury). Additionally, a Treasury Committee, chaired by the CFO, steers treasury activities and ensures compliance with corporate policies. Treasury activities are thus regulated by the Group’s policies, which define procedures, objectives and controls. The policies focus on the management of financial risk in terms of exposure to market risk, credit risk and liquidity risk. Treasury controls are subject to internal audits. Most treasury activities are centralized, with any local treasury activities subject to oversight from Corporate Treasury. Corporate Treasury identifies, evaluates and hedges financial risks in close cooperation with the Group’s operating units. It provides written principles for overall risk management, as well as written policies covering specific areas, such as foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, price risk, credit risk, use of derivative financial instruments, and investments of excess liquidity. The majority of cash and cash equivalents is held in U.S. dollars and Euros and is placed with financial institutions rated at least a single “A” long term rating from two of the major rating agencies, meaning at least A3 from Moody’s Investors Service (“Moody’s”) and A- from Standard & Poor’s (“S&P”) or Fitch (“Fitch”) Ratings, or better. These ratings are closely and continuously monitored in order to manage exposure to the counterparty’s risk. Hedging transactions are performed only to hedge exposures deriving from operating, investing and financing activities conducted in the normal course of business.

Market risk

Foreign exchange risk

The Group conducts its business on a global basis in various major international currencies. As a result, the Group is exposed to adverse movements in foreign currency exchange rates, primarily with respect to the Euro. Foreign exchange risk mainly arises from future commercial transactions and recognized assets and liabilities at the Company’s subsidiaries and future commercial transactions.

Management has set up a policy to require subsidiaries to hedge their entire foreign exchange risk exposure with the Group through financial instruments transacted or overseen by Corporate Treasury. To manage their foreign exchange risk arising from foreign-currency-denominated assets and liabilities, subsidiaries use forward contracts and purchased currency options. Foreign exchange risk arises when recognized assets and liabilities are denominated in a currency that is not the entity’s functional currency. These instruments do not qualify as hedging instruments for accounting purposes. Forward contracts and currency options, including collars, are also used by the Group to reduce its exposure to U.S. dollar fluctuations in Euro-denominated forecasted intercompany transactions that cover a large part of its research and development, selling general and administrative expenses as well as a portion of its front-end manufacturing production costs of semi-finished goods. The Group also hedges using currency forward

174

---

 

contracts certain Singapore dollar-denominated manufacturing forecasted transactions. The derivative instruments used to hedge the forecasted transactions relating to front-end manufacturing production costs meet the criteria for designation as cash flow hedge. The hedged forecasted transactions have a high probability of occurring for hedge accounting purposes.

It is the Group’s policy to keep the foreign exchange exposures in all the currencies hedged month by month against the monthly standard rate. At each month end, the forecasted flows for the coming month are hedged together with the fixing of the new standard rate. For this reason, the hedging transactions will have an exchange rate very close to the standard rate at which the forecasted flows will be recorded on the following month. As such, the foreign exchange exposure of the Group, which consists in the balance sheet positions and other contractually agreed transactions, is always close to zero and any movement in the foreign exchange rates will not therefore influence the exchange effect on items of the consolidated income statement. Any discrepancy from the forecasted values and the actual results is constantly monitored and prompt actions are taken, if needed.

The hedging activity of the Group and the impact on the financial statements is described in detail in note 7.6.15.4.

The following sensitivity analysis was based on recognized assets and liabilities, including non-monetary items, of the Company and its subsidiaries. Equity would have been approximately $40 million higher/lower (2019: $39 million higher/lower) if the Euro strengthened/weakened by 300 basis points against the U.S. dollar, arising mainly from translation of net assets from subsidiaries whose functional currency is the Euro.

At December 31, 2020 if the Euro/U.S. dollar exchange rate had strengthened by 300 basis points with all other variables held constant, net result for the year would have been $32 million higher (2019: $25 million higher), mainly as a result of foreign exchange gains on outstanding derivative instruments. If the Euro/U.S. dollar exchange rate had weakened by 300 basis points with all other variables held constant, impact in net income would have been $28 million lower (2019: $27 million lower), mainly due to foreign exchange losses on outstanding derivative instruments.

175

---

 

Cash flow and fair value interest rate risk

The Group’s interest rate risk arises from long-term borrowings. Borrowings issued at variable rates expose the Group to cash flow interest rate risk. Borrowings issued at fixed rates expose the Group to fair value interest rate risk.

The Group analyzes its interest rate exposure on a dynamic basis. Various scenarios are simulated taking into consideration refinancing, renewal of existing positions, alternative financing and hedging. The Group invests primarily on a short-term basis and as such its liquidity is invested in floating interest rate instruments. As a consequence, the Group is exposed to interest rate risk due to potential mismatch between the return on its short-term floating interest rate investments and the portion of its long-term debt issued at fixed rate.

At December 31, 2020 and 2019, if interest rates had been 20 basis points higher/lower with all other variables held constant, net income for the year would have been $1 million higher/lower respectively, mainly as a result of a high level of liquid assets in relation to debt, with no material impact on equity.

During 2020 and 2019, the Group’s borrowings at variable rate were denominated in Euros and in U.S. dollars.

Price risk

As part of its on-going investing activities, the Group may be exposed to quoted security price risk for investments measured at fair value, as described in Note 7.6.15.1. The Group did not hold as at December 31, 2020 and 2019 any significant investments in quoted equity securities.

The measurement for accounting purposes of the embedded derivative instruments of the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017 and on August 4, 2020 is dependent on various factors including the performance of STMicroelectronics ordinary shares. With respect to the valuation of the embedded issuer’s call options as at December 31, 2020, if the price of the Company’s ordinary shares, as measured on the New York stock exchange, with other valuation inputs remaining equal, increases by 10%, the value of the embedded call options would increase by $13 million (2019: increase of $1 million), whereas for a decrease of 10% in the share price, the value of the embedded call options would decrease by $2 million (2019: decrease of $4 million). With respect to the valuation of the embedded bondholders’ conversion options as at December 31, 2020, if the price of the Company’s ordinary shares, as measured on the New York stock exchange, with other valuation inputs remaining equal, increases by 10%, the value of the embedded conversion options would increase by $195 million (2019: increase of $159 million), whereas for a decrease of 10% in the share price, the value of the embedded conversion options would decrease by $192 million (2019: decrease of $150 million). Details of the sensitivity of the other valuation factors, more specifically implied volatility, are presented in Note 7.6.15.5.

Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk that a counterparty will not meet its obligations under a financial instrument or customer contract leading to a financial loss. Credit risk typically arises from cash and cash equivalents, contractual cash flows of debt investments carried at amortized cost, measured at FVOCI and at FVPL, the counterparty of derivative financial instruments and deposits with banks and financial institutions, as well as credit exposure to customers, including outstanding receivables.

The Group is exposed to credit risk from its operating activities (primarily for trade receivables) and from its financing activities, including deposits with banks and financial institutions, foreign exchange transactions and other financial instruments.

Credit risk is managed on the Group basis. The Group selects banks and/or financial institutions that operate with the Group based on the criteria of long-term rating from at least two major Rating Agencies and keeping a maximum outstanding amount per instrument with each bank not to exceed 20% of the total. For derivative financial instruments, management has established limits so that, at any time, the fair value of contracts outstanding is not concentrated with any individual counterparty.

176

---

 

The Group monitors the creditworthiness of its customers to which it grants credit terms in the normal course of business. If certain customers are independently rated, these ratings are used. Otherwise, if there is no independent rating, risk control assesses the credit quality of the customer, considering its financial position, past experience and other factors. Individual risk limits are set based on internal and external ratings in accordance with limits set by management. The utilization of credit limits is regularly monitored. Sales to customers are primarily settled in cash, which mitigates credit risk. There is no major concentration of credit risk, whether through exposure to individual customers, specific industry sectors or regions. At December 31, 2020 and 2019, no customer represented more than 10% of total trade accounts receivable. Any remaining concentrations of credit risk with respect to trade receivables are limited due to the large number of customers and their dispersion across many geographic areas.

The Group’s investments in debt instruments primarily include U.S. Treasury Bonds and long-term receivables towards government bodies. As such, they are investments with unmaterial credit loss. Any remaining receivable is of low credit risk and are individually not significant. The credit ratings of the investments are monitored for credit deterioration.

The Group has three types of financial assets that are subject to the expected credit loss model:

The impairment methodology by category of financial assets is further described in each respective note. While cash and cash equivalents are also subject to the impairment requirements of IFRS 9, the identified impairment loss is deemed to be immaterial. The maximum exposure for all financial assets is their carrying amount.

Liquidity risk

Prudent liquidity risk management includes maintaining enough cash and cash equivalents and marketable securities, the availability of funding from committed credit facilities and the ability to close out market positions. The Group’s objective is to maintain a significant cash position and a low debt-to-equity ratio, which ensure adequate financial flexibility. Liquidity management policy is to finance the Group’s investments with net cash provided from operating activities.

Management monitors rolling forecasts of the Group’s liquidity reserve based on expected cash flows.

A maturity analysis of interest-bearing loans and borrowings is shown in note 7.6.15.3.

Capital risk management

The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern in order to create value for shareholders and benefits and returns for other stakeholders, as to maintain an optimal capital structure. In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Group may review the amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, or issue new shares.

177

---

 

8.     Company’s financial statements

8.1. Company’s statement of financial position

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these Company’s financial statements

 

* Comparative amounts have been revised to reflect measurement-period adjustments reported on certain business acquisition as detailed in note 8.3.6

178

---

 

8.2. Company’s income statement

 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these Company’s financial statements

8.3. Notes to Company’s financial statements

8.3.1. General

A description of the Company, its activities and group structure are included in the consolidated financial statements, prepared on the basis of accounting policies that conform to International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as endorsed by the European Union. The Company holds investments in subsidiaries operating in the semiconductor manufacturing industry.

8.3.2. Basis of Presentation

The Company’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with art 9 of Book 2 of the Dutch Civil Code. In accordance with the provisions of Section 362-8 of Book 2 of the Dutch Civil code the accounting policies used are the same as those used in the notes to the consolidated financial statements prepared under IFRS as adopted by the European Union, unless otherwise stated. The financial statements were prepared on March 24, 2021.

In accordance with article 2:362 par. 8 of the Dutch Civil Code, the Company has prepared its financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in The Netherlands applying the accounting principles as adopted in the consolidated financial statements and further described in details in the consolidated financial statements note 7.6.7.

The functional and presentation currency of the Company is the U.S. dollar.

All balances and values are in millions of U.S. dollars, except as otherwise noted.

The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the previous financial year.

 

179

---

 

8.3.3. Summary of significant accounting policies

8.3.3.1.        Subsidiaries

Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Company has control. The Company controls an entity when the Company is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power to direct the activities of the entity.

Valuation of Subsidiaries

Investments in subsidiaries are stated at net asset value as the Company effectively controls the operational and financial activities of these investments. The net asset value is determined on the basis of the IFRS accounting principles applied by the Company in its consolidated financial statements.

Amounts due from group companies are stated initially at fair value and subsequently at amortized cost. Amortized cost is determined using the effective interest rate. The Company recognizes a credit loss for financial assets (such as a loan) based on an expected credit loss (ECL) model based first on estimated credit losses expected to occur in the coming twelve months and lifetime expected credit losses after a significant decrease in credit quality or when the simplified model can be used. For intercompany receivables the ECL would be applicable as well, however this could cause differences between equity in the consolidated and separate financial statements. For this reason, the Company elected to eliminate these differences through the respective receivable account in the separate financial statements.

For intercompany financial guarantees issued by the Company, there is no expected default and therefore the financial guarantees are not recognized. Guarantees given by the Company to its subsidiaries are further described in Note 8.3.15.

8.3.3.2.        Joint ventures

The Company’s investment in its joint ventures is accounted for using the equity method. A joint venture is an entity whereby the partners have a contractual arrangement that establishes joint control over the economic activities of the entity. The agreement requires unanimous consent for financial and operating decisions among the partners.

The Company’s share in its joint ventures profit and losses is recognized in the income statement and in the statement of financial position as an adjustment against the carrying amount of the investment, and its share of post-acquisition movement in equity is recognized in equity. The cumulative post acquisition movements are adjusted against the carrying amount of the investment. When the Company’s share of losses in a joint venture equals or exceeds its interest in the joint venture, including any unsecured receivable, the Company does not recognize further losses, unless it has incurred obligations or made payments on behalf of the joint venture.

Unrealized gains on transactions between the Company and its joint ventures are eliminated to the extent of the Company’s interest in the joint ventures. Unrealized losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of the asset transferred. Accounting policies of joint ventures are consistent with the policies adopted by the Company.

8.3.4. Lease right-of-use assets

A lease contract is a contract, or part of a contract, that conveys the right to control the use of identified property, plant, or equipment (an identified asset) for a period of time in exchange for consideration. The Company determines if an arrangement is a lease at inception. Leases are included in right-of-use assets. Current lease liabilities are included in current financial liabilities, while non-current lease liabilities are included in non-current financial liabilities in the Company’s statement of financial position.

180

---

 

Right-of-use assets represent the Company’s rights to use an underlying asset for the lease term and lease liabilities represent the Company’s obligations to make lease payments arising from the lease. Right-of-use assets and liabilities are recognized at the lease commencement date based on the estimated present value of lease payments over the lease term.

The right-of-use asset is a nonmonetary asset while the lease liability is a monetary liability. When accounting for a lease that is denominated in a foreign currency, the lease liability is re-measured using the current exchange rate, while the right-of-use asset is measured using the exchange rate as of the commencement date.

The Company leases buildings, cars and certain equipment (including IT equipment) which have remaining lease terms between less than one year and 6 years. Certain lease contracts contain options to extend the leases by up to 5 years, which the Company has included in the lease term when it is reasonably certain for the Company to exercise that option. In addition, the Company made an accounting policy election for all the asset classes to not account for short-term and low-value leases. A short-term lease is defined as a lease that, at the commencement date, has a lease term of 12 months or less and does not include an option to purchase the underlying asset. The short-term lease election can only be made at the commencement date. Expenses related to short-term and low-value leases were not significant in 2020 and 2019.

Variable lease payments that depend on an index or a rate are included in the lease payments and are measured using the prevailing index or rate at the measurement date (January 1, 2019 for initial measurement of the leases existing at that date and commencement date for subsequent lease contracts). Potential future increases in variable lease payments based on an index or rate are not included in the lease liability until they take effect. When adjustments to lease payments based on an index or rate take effect, the lease liability is reassessed and adjusted against the right-of-use asset. Changes to index and rate-based variable lease payments are recognized in income statement in the period of the change.

Maturities of lease liabilities are as follows:

 

 

181

---

 

 

 

A reconciliation of opening and closing right-of-use assets is provided below:

 

 

8.3.5. Intangible assets

 

 

 

8.3.6. Investments in subsidiaries and goodwill

 

 

* Comparative amounts have been revised to reflect measurement-period adjustments reported on certain business acquisitions.

 

182

---

 

The following table lists the Company’s consolidated subsidiaries and percentage of ownership as of December 31, 2020:

 

 

183

---

 

New subsidiaries correspond to acquisitions concluded in 2020 as described in note 7.6.10. In addition, the Company incurred certain legal mergers and liquidations that are not significant to the Company’s investments in subsidiaries.

 

2019 Acquisitions

In 2019, the Company acquired the Swedish SiC wafer manufacturer Norstel AB (“Norstel”).  This acquisition extends the Company’s SiC ecosystem and strengthens the Company’s flexibility to serve fast growing automotive and industrial applications.  The purchase consideration, net of $1 million of cash acquired, was funded with available cash. The full acquisition was executed in two stages. On February 6, 2019, the Company acquired 55% of Norstel’s common stock, obtaining control over the entity. The fair value of the business as a whole was estimated at $138 million, of which $77 million was paid by the Company for its majority stake, with an option to acquire the remaining 45% at a later date, subject to certain conditions. On December 2, 2019, the Company exercised its option to acquire the remaining 45% stake. The Company paid $51 million to complete the closing of the full acquisition. An amount of $10 million was held in an escrow account as protection for any claims, and reported as restricted cash in the Company’s statement of financial position as at December 31, 2019. The escrow amount was released to the seller in 2020.

Goodwill

 

* Comparative amounts have been revised to reflect measurement-period adjustments reported on certain business acquisitions.

As at December 31, 2020, the gross value of goodwill was $64 million ($57 million in 2019) and with no impairment recorded in 2020 and 2019.

 

8.3.7. Other financial assets and financial liabilities

8.3.7.1.        Other financial assets

Movements on other financial assets are presented as follows:

 

 

184

---

 

 

Investments held in debt securities

As at December 31, 2020, the Company held $133 million of U.S. Treasury Bonds, all transferred to a financial institution with high credit quality. These transactions were concluded in compliance with the Company’s policy to optimize the return on its short-term interest rate investments, which requires placement with institutions with high credit rating. The Company, acting as the securities lender, does not hold any collateral on the unsecured securities lending transactions.

The debt securities have an average rating of Aaa/AA+/AAA from Moody’s, S&P and Fitch, respectively, with a weighted average maturity of 0.5 years. The debt securities were reported as current assets on the line “Other current financial assets” on the Company’s statement of financial position as at December 31, 2020, since they represented investments of funds available for current operations. The bonds were measured at FVOCI as at December 31, 2020. This fair value measurement corresponds to a Level 1 fair value hierarchy measurement.

The Company applies a forward-looking expected credit loss (ECL) approach on all debt financial assets not held at FVPL. For debt securities at FVOCI, the ECL is based on the 12-month expected credit loss basis. The 12-month ECL is the portion of lifetime ECLs that results from default events on a financial instrument that are possible within 12 months after the reporting date. Since the Company’s quoted debt instruments at FVOCI comprise solely U.S. Treasury debt securities, the Company has considered that the ECLs on these investments are insignificant.

Investments held in equity securities

The Company irrevocably elected to measure at FVOCI unquoted equity securities for an aggregate value of $9 million (December 31, 2019: $11 million). Since these are strategic investments, the Company considers this classification, which implies that changes in fair value are not subsequently recycled to earnings, to be more relevant.

185

---

 

Financial assets include the following:

 

 

Financial assets are denominated in the following currencies:

 

 

For further details on Group’s financial assets, see note 7.6.15.1 of the consolidated financial statements of the Group.

Short-term deposits

To optimize the return yield on its short-term investments, the Company invested $550 million of available cash in short-term deposits as at December 31, 2020. These short-term deposits had a maturity beyond three months and no significant risk of changes in fair value. They were reported in “Short-term deposits” in the Company’s statement of financial position.

186

---

 

8.3.7.2.         Other financial liabilities

Movements on other financial liabilities are presented as follows:

 

 

 

Other non-current financial liabilities include the following:

 

 

*Starting July 2021, the bondholders have full conversion rights on Tranche B of the bonds issued on July 3, 2017. Consequently, the bondholders’ conversion option for tranche B, which totaled $676 million as of December 31, 2020, was reclassified as a current financial liability as at December 31, 2020.

 

 

187

---

 

8.3.8. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents consisted of the following:

 

 

8.3.9. Group companies interest-bearing short-term loans

Group companies short-term loans consisted of the following:

 

 

Fair value of Group companies short-term loans is similar to net book value.

8.3.10. Other Group companies receivables and payables

 

 

188

---

 

Group companies short-term notes payable consisted of the following:

 

 

8.3.11. Equity

 

 

 

189

---

 

 

The authorized share capital of the Company is €1,810 million consisting of 1,200,000,000 common shares and 540,000,000 preference shares, each with a nominal value of €1.04. As at December 31, 2020 the number of shares of common stock issued was 911,239,420 shares (911,186,920 at December 31, 2019).

As of December 31, 2020, the number of shares of common stock outstanding was 905,415,002 (891,434,489 at December 31, 2019).

The Euros equivalent of the issued share capital at December 31, 2020 amounts to €947,688,997 (2019: €947,634,397). For the changes in issued and paid-in-capital, additional paid-in-capital and retained earnings, see the Group’s consolidated financial statements.

The cumulative amount of legal reserves at December 31, 2020 is split as follows: $18 million of capitalized internally developed software expenditures, $1,191 million of subsidiaries non distributable reserves and $766 million of currency translation adjustment gain.

The cumulative amount of legal reserves at December 31, 2019 is split as follows: $19 million of capitalized internally developed software expenditures, $1,155 million of subsidiaries non distributable reserves and $564 million of currency translation adjustment gain.

Treasury shares

As of December 31, 2020, the Company owned 5,824,418 shares classified as treasury shares in the Company’s statement of equity compared to 19,752,431 shares as of December 31, 2019.

The treasury shares have been originally designated for allocation under the Company’s share-based remuneration programs of unvested shares. As of December 31, 2020, 60,484,598 of these treasury shares were transferred to employees under the Company’s share-based remuneration programs, of which 7,260,486 in the year ended December 31, 2020.

190

---

 

On November 5, 2018, the Company announced a three years buy-back program of up to $750 million. During 2020, the Company repurchased 4.8 million shares of its common stock for a total of $125 million under the share buy-back program, reflected at cost, as a reduction of the parent company stockholders’ equity.

As described in note 8.3.13, bondholders exercised their conversion rights on Tranche A of the senior unsecured convertible bonds issued on July 3, 2017, which the Company elected to net-share settle. The full settlement of Tranche A resulted in 11.4 million shares delivered to bondholders and released from treasury shares as at December 31, 2020.

Non Distributable Reserve

The amount of the non-distributable reserve was $3,138 million and $2,802 million in the year 2020 and 2019, respectively, and it represents the amount of issued and paid-in capital and legal reserves of the Company.

8.3.12. Other payables and accrued liabilities

Other payables and accrued liabilities consisted of:

 

 

8.3.13. Interest-bearing loans and borrowings

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings consisted of the following:

 

191

---

 

 

 

 

Senior convertible bonds

 

On July 3, 2017, the Company issued $1,500 million in principal amount of dual tranche senior unsecured convertible bonds (Tranche A for $750 million and Tranche B for $750 million), due 2022 and 2024, respectively. Tranche A bonds were issued at 101.265% as zero-coupon bonds while Tranche B bonds were issued at par and bear a 0.25% per annum nominal interest, payable semi-annually. The conversion price at issuance was $20.54, equivalent to a 37.5% premium on both tranches, which corresponds to 9,737 equivalent shares per each   $200,000 bond par value. The bonds are convertible by the bondholders or are callable by the issuer upon certain conditions, on a net-share settlement basis, except if the issuer elects a full-cash or full-share conversion as an alternative settlement. The net proceeds from the bond offering were $1,502 million, after deducting issuance costs payable by the Company.

The issuer’s call option and the holder’s conversion option have been identified as embedded non-equity derivative instruments, resulting in the recognition of the options separately from the debt host contract. Upon initial recognition, the derivatives were measured at fair value based on the income approach, the debt being determined as a residual amount of the $1.5 billion total proceeds. The value of the issuer’s call option was deemed to be nil at initial recognition. The value of the holder’s conversion option was estimated at $248 million at issuance date, which determined the initial recognition of the liability component at $1,261 million before allocation of issuance costs. The fair value measurement of the embedded derivative instruments corresponded to a Level 3 fair value hierarchy measurement. The Company elected to allocate issuance costs, totaling $7 million, to the debt component. The debt was subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method.

The call option available to the Company for the early redemption of Tranche A was exercised in July 2020. As a consequence, bondholders exercised their conversion rights on Tranche A. As the Company elected to net-share settle the bonds, each conversion exercised by the bondholders followed the process defined in the original terms and conditions of the senior unsecured convertible bonds, which determined the actual number of shares to be transferred upon each conversion. The Company settled the bonds upon conversion, by redeeming through cash the $750 million principal amount and by settling the residual consideration through the delivery of 11.4 million treasury shares. The net-share settlement was fully completed as of October 1, 2020. The consideration transferred in shares was a non-cash item. The Company allocated the total consideration transferred between the carrying amount of the debt and the non-equity derivative instruments, by measuring at fair value the non-equity derivative instruments prior to settlement. Tranche A liability component, net of unamortized issuance costs, as measured at amortized cost prior to settlement, amounted to $712 million. The holder’s conversion option totaled $341 million and was measured based on the intrinsic value of the option. The fair value measurement of the non-equity embedded derivative instruments and the extinguishment of the liability component against the $750 million cash paid generated a charge of $64 million reported on the line “Finance costs” on the Company’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2020.

The liability component and the holder’s conversion option of Tranche B, which original maturity is July 3, 2024, were reported as current liabilities on the lines “Interest-bearing loans and borrowings – current portion” and “Other current financial liabilities”, respectively, on the Company’s statement of financial position as of December 31, 2020, since bondholders of Tranche B bonds will have full conversion rights starting July 26, 2021. The issuer’s call option

192

---

 

of Tranche B was reported on the line “Other current financial assets” on the Company’s statement of financial position as of December 31, 2020.

The embedded derivatives are measured at fair value through profit and loss, with the changes in fair value being immediately reported in earnings. The value of the conversion option of Tranche B was $676 million as at December 31, 2020 (2019: $380 million), which generated a change in fair value of $296 million reported on the line “Finance costs” on the Company’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2020. The value of the issuer’s call option of Tranche B was $61 million as at December 31, 2020 (2019: $22 million), which generated a change in fair value of $38 million reported on the line “Finance income” on the Company’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2020.

On August 4, 2020, the Company issued $1,500 million in principal amount of dual tranche senior unsecured convertible bonds (Tranche A for $750 million and Tranche B for $750 million), due 2025 and 2027, respectively. Tranche A bonds were issued at 105.8% as zero-coupon bonds while Tranche B bonds were issued at 104.5% as zero-coupon bonds. The conversion price at issuance was $43.62 for Tranche A equivalent to a 47.5% conversion premium and $45.10 for Tranche B, equivalent to a 52.5% conversion premium. These conversion features correspond to an equivalent of 4,585 shares per each Tranche A bond $200,000 par value and an equivalent of 4,435 shares per each Tranche B bond $200,000 par value. The bonds are convertible by the bondholders or are callable by the issuer upon certain conditions, on a net-share settlement basis, except if the issuer elects a full-cash or full-share conversion as an alternative settlement. The net proceeds from the bond offering were $1,567 million, after deducting issuance costs payable by the Company.

The issuer’s call option and the holder’s conversion option have been identified as embedded non-equity derivative instruments, resulting in the recognition of the options separately from the debt host contract. Upon initial recognition, the derivatives were measured at fair value based on the income approach, the debt being determined as a residual amount of the $1.5 billion total proceeds. The value of the issuer’s call option was deemed to be nil at initial recognition. The value of the holder’s conversion option was estimated at $219 million at issuance date, which determined the initial recognition of the liability component at $1,358 million before allocation of issuance costs. The fair value measurement of the embedded derivative instruments corresponded to a Level 3 fair value hierarchy measurement. The Company elected to allocate issuance costs, totaling $10 million, to the debt component. The debt was subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method.

Credit facilities

 

 

The Company had unutilized committed medium-term credit facilities with core relationship banks totaling $542 million as at December 31, 2020.

 

The Company also had two long-term amortizing credit facilities with the European Investment Bank as part of R&D funding programs. The first one, signed on September 27, 2010, a €350 million multi-currency loan for R&D programs in Europe, was drawn mainly in U.S. dollars for an amount of $321 million and only partially in Euros for an amount of €100 million. The outstanding amount as at December 31, 2019 was fully repaid in 2020. The second one, signed on March 12, 2013, a €350 million multi-currency loan which also supported R&D programs, was drawn in U.S. dollars for $471 million, of which $59 million was outstanding as at December 31, 2020.

193

---

 

Fair values

 

 

 

194

---

 

 

 

8.3.14. Other non-current liabilities

Other non-current liabilities consisted of the following:

 

 

 

8.3.15. Guarantees and contingencies

Guarantees given by the Company to its affiliates for the benefit of third parties amounted to approximately $842 million as of December 31, 2020 (2019: $869 million).

Out of this, €425 million related to STMicroelectronics Finance B.V.’s obligation under the €500 million EIB credit facilities.

As from August 22, 2013, the Company assumes joint and several liabilities for all debts arising from legal acts for STMicroelectronics International N.V., STMicroelectronics Finance II N.V. and STMicroelectronics Finance B.V., all in accordance with section 2:403 Dutch Civil Code.

There is no other type of contingencies as of December 31, 2020 and 2019.

8.3.16. General and administrative expenses

General and administrative expenses are the administrative costs related to the operations of the holding company.

Employees benefits consisted of the following:

 

 

The average number of persons employed by the Company during the year ended December 31, 2020 was 16 out of which 8 outside The Netherlands (2019: 15 out of which 8 outside The Netherlands).

195

---

 

8.3.17. Financial income and expenses

 

 

 

8.3.18. Other income (expenses)

Other income (expenses) consisted of the following:

 

 

196

---

 

8.3.19. Contractual obligations

The Company’s contractual obligations as of December 31, 2020 were as follows:

 

 

 

8.3.20. Related party transactions

There were no material transactions with significant related parties during the years ended December 31, 2020 and 2019.

Remuneration to managing board and supervisory board members

For details on the remuneration to the Managing Board and Supervisory Board members, see the consolidated financial statements of the Company (Note 7.6.34).

8.3.21. Auditors’ fees

The following audit fees were allocated to the period:

 

 

The fees listed above relate only to the procedures applied to the Company and its consolidated group entities by Ernst & Young. The procedures were applied by audit firm’s member of the EY network. In 2020, the fees related to services provided by Ernst & Young Accountants LLP for the audit of the statutory annual accounts totaled $120,750 ($105,000 in 2019).

8.3.22. Proposed cash dividend

Upon the proposal of the Managing Board, the Supervisory Board will propose to the 2021 Annual General Meeting of Shareholders in line with our Dividend Policy, to declare a cash dividend of US$0.24 per outstanding share of the Company’s common stock, to be distributed in quarterly instalments of US$0.06 in each of the second, third and fourth quarter of 2021 and first quarter of 2022 to shareholders of record in the month of each quarterly payment, as further described in the General Meeting of Shareholders agenda and explanatory notes thereto.

 

March 24, 2021

THE MANAGING BOARD

197

---

 

Jean-Marc Chery (President and Chief Executive Officer)

THE SUPERVISORY BOARD

Maurizio Tamagnini (Chairman)

Nicolas Dufourcq (Vice-Chairman)

Janet G. Davidson

Yann Delabrière

Heleen Kersten

Lucia Morselli

Ana de Pro Gonzalo

Alessandro Rivera

Frédéric Sanchez

 

198

---

 

9. Other information

9.1. Auditors’ report

The report of the auditors, Ernst & Young Accountants LLP, is presented on the following pages in this annual report.

9.2. Appropriation of results – provisions in Company’s articles of association

The Supervisory Board, upon the proposal of the Managing Board, is allowed to allocate net profit to a reserve fund. The Articles of Association provide that the net result for the year, after deduction of (i) any amount to set up and maintain reserves required by Dutch Law and the Articles of Association, (ii) if any of our preference shares are issued and outstanding, the dividend to be paid to the holders of preference shares and (iii) the aforementioned allocation to the reserve fund, is subject to the disposition by the General Meeting of Shareholders.

In the case that a net loss for the year exceeds retained earnings, no dividend payments are allowed until the loss has been recovered from net profit(s) in future years.

9.3. Branches

The Company has a branch in Switzerland, located at 39 Chemin du Champ des Filles, 1228 Plan-les-Ouates, Geneva.

199

---

 

Independent auditor’s report

To: the shareholders and supervisory board of STMicroelectronics N.V.

Report on the audit of the financial statements 2020 included in the Annual Report

Our opinion

We have audited the financial statements 2020 of STMicroelectronics N.V., based in (hereinafter also referred to as “the Company”), based in Amsterdam. The financial statements include the consolidated financial statements and the company’s financial statements.

In our opinion:

The consolidated financial statements comprise:

The company’s financial statements comprise:

Basis for our opinion

We conducted our audit in accordance with Dutch law, including the Dutch Standards on Auditing. Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report.

We are independent of STMicroelectronics N.V. in accordance with the EU Regulation on specific requirements regarding statutory audit of public-interest entities, the “Wet toezicht accountantsorganisaties” (Wta, Audit firms supervision act), the “Verordening inzake de onafhankelijkheid van accountants bij assurance-opdrachten” (ViO, Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants, a regulation with respect to independence) and other relevant independence regulations in the Netherlands. Furthermore we have complied with the “Verordening gedrags- en beroepsregels accountants” (VGBA, Dutch Code of Ethics).

We believe the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.  

Our audit approach

Our understanding of the business

STMicroelectronics N.V. is a global semiconductor manufacturer operating in a broad range of markets. The group is structured in components and we tailored our group audit approach accordingly. We paid specific attention in our audit to a number of areas driven by the operations of the group and our risk assessment.

We start by determining materiality and identifying and assessing the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to fraud, non-compliance with laws and regulations or error in order to design audit procedures responsive to those risks and to obtain audit evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a

200

---

 

basis for our opinion. The risk of not detecting a material misstatement resulting from fraud is higher than for one resulting from error, as fraud may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal control.

In 2020 we were forced to perform our procedures to a greater extent remotely due to the Covid-19 measures. This limits our observation and increases the risk of missing certain signals. In order to compensate for the limitations related to physical contact and direct observation, we performed alternative procedures to obtain audit evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

Materiality

We have also taken into account misstatements and/or possible misstatements that in our opinion are material for the users of the financial statements for qualitative reasons.

We agreed with the supervisory board that misstatements in excess of USD 2 million, which are identified during the audit, would be reported to them, as well as smaller misstatements that in our view must be reported on qualitative grounds.

Scope of the group audit

STMicroelectronics N.V. is at the head of a group of entities. The financial information of this group is included in the consolidated financial statements of STMicroelectronics N.V.

Because we are ultimately responsible for the opinion, we are also responsible for directing, supervising and performing the group audit. In this respect we have determined the nature and extent of the audit procedures to be carried out for group entities. Decisive were the size and/or the risk profile of the group entities or operations. On this basis, we selected group entities for which an audit or review had to be carried out on the complete set of financial information or specific items.

Our group audit mainly focused on significant group entities based on significance in activities and risk assessment. Considering the audit procedures which have been performed at head office level by the corporate audit team, we have:

Because of the (international) travel restrictions and social distancing due to the Covid-19 pandemic, we needed to restrict or have been unable to visit management and/or component auditors to discuss, among others, the business activities and the identified significant risks or to review and evaluate relevant parts of the component auditor's audit documentation and to discuss significant matters arising from that evaluation on site. In these extraordinary circumstances we predominantly used communication technology and written information exchange in order to obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence.

201

---

 

These procedures represent 98% of the group's total assets, 98% of profit before tax and 99.9% of gross revenues.

By performing the procedures mentioned above at group entities, together with additional procedures at group level, we have been able to obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence about the group’s financial information to provide an opinion about the consolidated financial statements.

Teaming and use of specialists

We ensured that the audit teams both at group and at component levels included the appropriate skills and competences which are needed for the audit of a listed client in the Semiconductor industry. We included specialists in the areas of IT audit, forensics and income tax and have made use of our own experts in the areas of valuations and actuaries.

Our focus on fraud and non-compliance with laws and regulations

Our responsibility

Although we are not responsible for preventing fraud or non-compliance and cannot be expected to detect non-compliance with all laws and regulations, it is our responsibility to obtain reasonable assurance that the financial statements, taken as a whole, are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error.

Non-compliance with laws and regulations may result in fines, litigation or other consequences for the company that may have a material effect on the financial statements.

Our audit response related to fraud risks

In order to identify and assess the risks of material misstatements of the financial statements due to fraud, we obtained an understanding of the entity and its environment, including the entity’s internal control relevant to the audit and in order to design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances. As in all of our audits, we addressed the risk of management override of internal control. We do not audit internal control per se for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the company’s internal control.

We considered available information and made enquiries of relevant executives, directors (including internal audit, legal, compliance, human resources and regional directors) and the supervisory board. As part of our process of identifying fraud risks, we evaluated fraud risk factors with respect to financial reporting fraud, misappropriation of assets and bribery and corruption.

In our risk assessment we considered the potential impact of performance based bonus schemes which the company has in place at certain components. Furthermore, as STMicroelectronics N.V. is a global company, operating in multiple jurisdictions, we considered the risk of bribery and corruption.

In our process of identifying fraud risks, we considered whether the Covid-19 pandemic gives rise to specific fraud risk factors resulting from a dilution in the effectiveness of controls as a result of the general disruption associated with remote working, illness and workforce reductions, supply chain failures and pressure to make emergency

202

---

 

procurements, management overrides and workarounds becoming the norm, manual invoicing and manual payments, abuse of government schemes intended to support companies during the pandemic.

We evaluated the design and the implementation and, where considered appropriate, tested the operating effectiveness, of internal controls that mitigate fraud risks. In addition, we performed procedures to evaluate key accounting estimates for management bias in particular relating to important judgment areas and significant accounting estimates as disclosed in Note 7.6.8 to the consolidated financial statements. We have also used data analysis to identify and address high-risk journal entries.

We incorporated elements of unpredictability in our audit. We considered the outcome of our other audit procedures and evaluated whether any findings were indicative of fraud or non-compliance. If so, we reevaluate our assessment of fraud risk and its resulting impact on our audit procedures.

Our audit response related to risks of non-compliance with laws and regulations

We assessed factors related to the risks of non-compliance with laws and regulations that could reasonably be expected to have a material effect on the financial statements from our general industry experience, through discussions with the Managing Board, reading minutes, inspection of internal audit and compliance reports and performing substantive tests of details of classes of transactions, account balances or disclosures.

We also inspected lawyers’ letters and correspondence with regulatory authorities and remained alert to any indication of (suspected) non-compliance throughout the audit. Finally we obtained written representations that all known instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations have been disclosed to us.

Going concern

We performed the following procedures in order to identify and assess the risks of going concern and to conclude on the appropriateness of management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting. Management made a specific assessment of the company’s ability to continue as a going concern and to continue its operations for at least the next 12 months . We discussed and evaluated the assessment with management exercising professional judgment and maintaining professional skepticism, and specifically focusing on the process followed by management to make the assessment, management bias that could represent a risk, the impact of current events and conditions have on the company’s operations and forecasted cash flows, with a focus on whether the Company will have sufficient liquidity to continue to meet its obligations as they fall due.

We consider based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the company’s ability to continue as a going concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention in our auditor’s report to the related disclosures in the financial statements or, if such disclosures are inadequate, to modify our opinion.

Our conclusions are based on the audit evidence obtained up to the date of our auditor’s report. However, future events or conditions may cause a company to cease to continue as a going concern.

General audit procedures

Our audit further included among others:

 

 

 

203

---

 

Our key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements. We have communicated the key audit matters to the supervisory board. The key audit matters are not a comprehensive reflection of all matters discussed.

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

 

 

204

---

 

 

 

205

---

 

 

 

206

---

 

 

Report on other information included in the annual report

In addition to the financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon, the annual report contains other information that consists of:

Based on the following procedures performed, we conclude that the other information:

We have read the Other information. Based on our knowledge and understanding obtained through our audit of the financial statements or otherwise, we have considered whether the other information contains material misstatements. By performing these procedures, we comply with the requirements of Part 9 of Book 2 and Section 2:135b sub-Section 7 of the Dutch Civil Code and the Dutch Standard 720. The scope of the procedures performed is substantially less than the scope of those performed in our audit of the financial statements.

207

---

 

Management is responsible for the preparation of the other information, including the report of the Managing Board in accordance with Part 9 of Book 2 of the Dutch Civil Code, Other information required by Part 9 of Book 2 of the Dutch Civil Code and the remuneration report in accordance with Sections 2:135b and 2:145 sub‑section 2 of the Dutch Civil Code.

Report on other legal and regulatory requirements

Engagement

We were engaged by the Supervisory Board as auditor of STMicroelectronics N.V. following our re-appointment at the annual meeting held on 17 June 2020 for the years 2020-2023, and have operated as statutory auditor since the financial year 2016.

No prohibited non-audit services

We have not provided prohibited non-audit services as referred to in Article 5(1) of the EU Regulation on specific requirements regarding statutory audit of public-interest entities.

Description of responsibilities for the financial statements

Responsibilities of management and the supervisory board for the financial statements

Management is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of the financial statements in accordance with EU-IFRS and Part 9 of Book 2 of the Dutch Civil Code. Furthermore, management is responsible for such internal control as management determines is necessary to enable the preparation of the financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

As part of the preparation of the financial statements, management is responsible for assessing the company’s ability to continue as a going concern. Based on the financial reporting frameworks mentioned, management should prepare the financial statements using the going concern basis of accounting unless management either intends to liquidate the company or to cease operations, or has no realistic alternative but to do so. Management should disclose events and circumstances that may cast significant doubt on the company’s ability to continue as a going concern in the financial statements.

The supervisory board is responsible for overseeing the company’s financial reporting process.

Our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements

Our objective is to plan and perform the audit engagement in a manner that allows us to obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence for our opinion.

Our audit has been performed with a high, but not absolute, level of assurance, which means we may not detect all material errors and fraud during our audit.

Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements. The materiality affects the nature, timing and extent of our audit procedures and the evaluation of the effect of identified misstatements on our opinion.

We have exercised professional judgment and have maintained professional skepticism throughout the audit, in accordance with Dutch Standards on Auditing, ethical requirements and independence requirements. The Our audit approach section above includes an informative summary of our responsibilities and the work performed as the basis for our opinion.

Communication

We communicate with the supervisory board regarding, among other matters, the planned scope and timing of the audit and significant audit findings, including any significant findings in internal control that we identify during our

208

---

 

audit. In this respect we also submit an additional report to the audit committee in accordance with Article 11 of the EU Regulation on specific requirements regarding statutory audit of public-interest entities. The information included in this additional report is consistent with our audit opinion in this auditor’s report.

We provide the supervisory board with a statement that we have complied with relevant ethical requirements regarding independence, and to communicate with them all relationships and other matters that may reasonably be thought to bear on our independence, and where applicable, related safeguards.

From the matters communicated with the supervisory board, we determine the key audit matters: those matters that were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements. We describe these matters in our auditor’s report unless law or regulation precludes public disclosure about the matter or when, in extremely rare circumstances, not communicating the matter is in the public interest.

 

Eindhoven, 24 March 2021

Ernst & Young Accountants LLP

 

 

Signed by M. Moolenaar

 

209

---

 

10.    Important dates

May 27, 2021: General Meeting of Shareholders

Please consult our website www.st.com for the latest important dates.

 

210

---

 

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

 

 

211

---